GENESIS SQL

User’s Guide
2009
Read This First

Welcome
Welcome to Time America’s Genesis SQL User’s Guide. This manual is included with each new
Genesis SQL software package and is intended solely for use by the licensee. This User Guide
describes the installation and operation of the Genesis SQL system.
Accuracy of Information
The content of this manual is subject to change without notice. Before using this manual, verify
that the information contained in it is current. Proper installation, configuration, and operation of
the software are contingent upon reading and following the procedures contained in the latest
revision of the manual.
Additional Copies
Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from our website at www.timeamerica.com or
from your local Time America dealer.
User Comments
Every effort is made to ensure that the information contained in this manual is accurate at the
time of publication. If you find an error or omission while reading this manual, direct your
comments to:
Time America, Inc.
Attn: Technical Publications
15990 N. Greenway Hayden Loop
Suite D-500
Scottsdale, AZ 85260

Or you can send emails to:

[email protected]

We welcome your comments and suggestions.

Software Release Version

10.01B
Genesis SQL Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER I ABOUT THIS MANUAL..............................................................................................................10

DISCLAIMER .............................................................................................................................................................10
TECHNICAL SUPPORT ...............................................................................................................................................10
When Calling Technical Support for Assistance .................................................................................................10
CHAPTER II INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................................11
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................................................................11
INSTALLING THE SYSTEM .........................................................................................................................................12
THE DATABASE ........................................................................................................................................................18
Creating a New Database....................................................................................................................................18
Converting a Genesis SQL Database ..................................................................................................................21
Changing the Password for the Database ...........................................................................................................25
Deleting a Database from the Database Server ..................................................................................................26
Backing Up the Database ....................................................................................................................................28
Restoring a Database ..........................................................................................................................................30
Attaching a Database ..........................................................................................................................................33
Detaching A Database.........................................................................................................................................34
HARDWARE KEYS ....................................................................................................................................................34
Main System Key .................................................................................................................................................35
Demo Key ............................................................................................................................................................35
CHAPTER III GETTING STARTED ...............................................................................................................37
STARTING GENESIS SQL AND LOGGING IN ..............................................................................................................37
Note on User Accounts ........................................................................................................................................37
Launching and Logging In to Genesis SQL.........................................................................................................37
Exiting the System................................................................................................................................................38
TIPS AND TECHNIQUES .............................................................................................................................................39
USING THE KEYBOARD .............................................................................................................................................39
Underlined Letters ...............................................................................................................................................39
Hot Keys ..............................................................................................................................................................40
Additional Keyboard Access................................................................................................................................40
HELP ........................................................................................................................................................................41
Access the Online Help Window..........................................................................................................................41
Use Help Contents ...............................................................................................................................................41
Use the Help Index ..............................................................................................................................................41
Use Help Search ..................................................................................................................................................42
Return to the Help Topics Window ......................................................................................................................42
Print a Help Topic ...............................................................................................................................................42
CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................................................43
Play Bell Tones....................................................................................................................................................43
Change Screen Background ................................................................................................................................43
Navigation Selection............................................................................................................................................44
CHAPTER IV CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................45
MAIN COMPANY.......................................................................................................................................................46
DIVISIONS.................................................................................................................................................................54
Configure Divisions.............................................................................................................................................54
Add a Division .....................................................................................................................................................55
Edit a Division .....................................................................................................................................................55
Delete a Division .................................................................................................................................................55

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 3

Genesis SQL Manual

CATEGORIES .............................................................................................................................................................57
Configure Categories...........................................................................................................................................58
Add a Category....................................................................................................................................................61
Edit a Category....................................................................................................................................................62
Delete a Category................................................................................................................................................62
ATTENDANCE CODES ...............................................................................................................................................63
Configure Attendance Codes ...............................................................................................................................63
Add an Attendance Code .....................................................................................................................................64
Edit an Attendance Code .....................................................................................................................................64
Delete an Attendance Code .................................................................................................................................65
POLICIES...................................................................................................................................................................66
Configure Policies ...............................................................................................................................................66
Add a Policy.........................................................................................................................................................81
Edit a Policy ........................................................................................................................................................82
Delete a Policy.....................................................................................................................................................82
ROUNDING................................................................................................................................................................83
Configure Rounding Rules...................................................................................................................................83
Add a Rounding Rule ...........................................................................................................................................88
Edit a Rounding Rule...........................................................................................................................................88
Delete a Rounding Rule .......................................................................................................................................88
SHIFTS ......................................................................................................................................................................90
Configure a Shift Group ......................................................................................................................................90
Add a Shift Group ................................................................................................................................................98
Edit a Shift Group................................................................................................................................................98
Delete a Shift Group ............................................................................................................................................99
Add a Shift ...........................................................................................................................................................99
Edit a Shift ...........................................................................................................................................................99
Delete a Shift .....................................................................................................................................................100
HOLIDAYS ..............................................................................................................................................................101
Configure Holidays............................................................................................................................................101
Add a Holiday....................................................................................................................................................102
Edit a Holiday....................................................................................................................................................102
Delete a Holiday................................................................................................................................................103
HOLIDAYS GROUPS ................................................................................................................................................103
Configure Holiday Groups ................................................................................................................................103
Add a Holiday Group.........................................................................................................................................104
Edit a Holiday....................................................................................................................................................104
Delete a Holidays Groups .................................................................................................................................105
GROUPS ..................................................................................................................................................................105
Configure Groups ..............................................................................................................................................105
Add a Group ......................................................................................................................................................106
Edit a Group ......................................................................................................................................................107
Delete a Group ..................................................................................................................................................107
JOB COSTING ..........................................................................................................................................................109
Departments.......................................................................................................................................................110
Jobs....................................................................................................................................................................115
Steps...................................................................................................................................................................120
Operations .........................................................................................................................................................125
Tasks ..................................................................................................................................................................130
BELL SCHEDULES ...................................................................................................................................................135
Configure Bell Schedules...................................................................................................................................135
Add a Bell Schedule ...........................................................................................................................................136
Edit a Bell Schedule...........................................................................................................................................137
Delete a Bell Schedule .......................................................................................................................................137
PROFILE LOCKOUTS ...............................................................................................................................................139
Configure Profile Lockouts................................................................................................................................139

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 4

Genesis SQL Manual

Add a Profile Lockout........................................................................................................................................141

Edit a Profile Lockout........................................................................................................................................142
Delete a Profile Lockout....................................................................................................................................142
REASONS ................................................................................................................................................................143
Configure Reasons.............................................................................................................................................143
Add a Reason .....................................................................................................................................................144
Edit a Reason.....................................................................................................................................................144
Delete a Reason .................................................................................................................................................144
SECURITY ...............................................................................................................................................................145
Configure Security Levels..................................................................................................................................145
Add a Security Level ..........................................................................................................................................157
Edit a Security Level..........................................................................................................................................157
Delete a Security Level ......................................................................................................................................158
User Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................158
Who's Logged In ................................................................................................................................................163
Change Password ..............................................................................................................................................163
BENEFIT ACCRUALS ...............................................................................................................................................164
Configure Benefit Accruals................................................................................................................................164
Configure Benefit Accumulators........................................................................................................................166
Add a Benefit Accruals Policy ...........................................................................................................................169
Edit a Benefit Accruals Policy ...........................................................................................................................171
Delete a Benefit Accruals policy........................................................................................................................171
Update to Current..............................................................................................................................................172
OCCURRENCE RATINGS ..........................................................................................................................................172
Configure Occurrence Ratings ..........................................................................................................................172
Add an Occurrence Rating ................................................................................................................................174
Edit an Occurrence Rating ................................................................................................................................175
Delete a Occurrence Rating ..............................................................................................................................175
Add Category and Attendance Infractions.........................................................................................................175
Edit a Category and Attendance Infraction .......................................................................................................177
Delete a Category and Attendance Infraction ...................................................................................................177
Add Attendance Notices.....................................................................................................................................177
Edit an Attendance Notice .................................................................................................................................179
Delete a Category and Attendance Infraction ...................................................................................................179
Printing and Viewing Attendance Notices .........................................................................................................179
CHAPTER V OPTIONAL MODULES .........................................................................................................182
JOB COSTING ..........................................................................................................................................................182
BELL SCHEDULES ...................................................................................................................................................182
PROFILE LOCKOUTS ...............................................................................................................................................183
BENEFIT ACCRUALS ...............................................................................................................................................183
OCCURRENCE RATINGS ..........................................................................................................................................183
WEBCLOCK ............................................................................................................................................................184
THIRD PARTY TERMINALS ......................................................................................................................................184
CHAPTER VI ADDITIONAL EMPLOYEE FEATURES............................................................................185
EMPLOYEE REVIEWER ............................................................................................................................................185
Accessing Employee Reviewer...........................................................................................................................185
Employee Timecard Tab ....................................................................................................................................186
Employee Schedules Tab ...................................................................................................................................190
EMPLOYEE TRANSACTIONS TAB ............................................................................................................................192
Description ........................................................................................................................................................192
Employee Benefits Tab ......................................................................................................................................194
EMPLOYEE TIMESHEETS .........................................................................................................................................195
Accessing Employee Timesheets........................................................................................................................195
Using Employee Timesheets ..............................................................................................................................195

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 5

Genesis SQL Manual

CHAPTER VII EMPLOYEE MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................198

CONFIGURE EMPLOYEE ..........................................................................................................................................198
EMPLOYEE LIST......................................................................................................................................................199
EMPLOYEE TIMECARD (DESCRIPTION) TAB ...........................................................................................................200
EMPLOYEE SCHEDULE TAB ....................................................................................................................................204
Configure Employee Schedules .........................................................................................................................204
Assign or Edit an Employee Schedule ...............................................................................................................206
Delete a Schedule ..............................................................................................................................................207
Create a Rotating Schedule ...............................................................................................................................208
Create an Employee Schedule Template............................................................................................................209
Copy an Employee Schedule Template ..............................................................................................................210
EMPLOYEE TRANSACTIONS TAB ............................................................................................................................212
Description ........................................................................................................................................................212
EMPLOYEE STATUS TAB .........................................................................................................................................213
Configure Employee Status................................................................................................................................213
Add Employee Status .........................................................................................................................................214
Edit Employee Status .........................................................................................................................................215
Delete Employee Status .....................................................................................................................................215
EMPLOYEE BENEFITS TAB ......................................................................................................................................216
Benefit Entitlement: Configure ..........................................................................................................................216
Benefit Entitlement: Employee Benefit Details..................................................................................................217
Benefit Entitlement: Grant Benefit Time............................................................................................................218
Benefit Entitlement: Delete a Detail..................................................................................................................218
Benefit Accruals: Configure ..............................................................................................................................219
Benefit Accruals: Update Employee Benefits ....................................................................................................220
Benefit Accruals: Employee Benefit Details ......................................................................................................220
Benefit Accruals: Manual Benefit Adjustment ...................................................................................................222
Benefits Accrual: Delete a Manual Adjustment.................................................................................................223
EMPLOYEE MESSAGES TAB ....................................................................................................................................223
Configure...........................................................................................................................................................223
Add a Message...................................................................................................................................................224
Edit a Message...................................................................................................................................................225
Delete a Message...............................................................................................................................................225
EMPLOYEE WAGES .................................................................................................................................................226
Configure Employee Wages...............................................................................................................................226
Add a Global Wage............................................................................................................................................228
Edit a Global Wage ...........................................................................................................................................228
Delete a Global Wage........................................................................................................................................228
Add an Employee Level Wage ...........................................................................................................................229
Edit an Employee Level Wage ...........................................................................................................................230
EMPLOYEE BADGES TAB ........................................................................................................................................231
Configure Employee Badges..............................................................................................................................231
Add a Badge.......................................................................................................................................................231
Edit a Badge ......................................................................................................................................................232
Delete a Badge...................................................................................................................................................232
EMPLOYEE PROFILES TAB ......................................................................................................................................232
Configure Employee Profiles.............................................................................................................................232
Add a Profile......................................................................................................................................................233
Edit a Profile .....................................................................................................................................................234
Delete a Profile..................................................................................................................................................235
EMPLOYEE CLOCKS TAB ........................................................................................................................................235
Configure Hand Readers ...................................................................................................................................235
Configure TA7000 .............................................................................................................................................236
EMPLOYEE DETAILS TAB .......................................................................................................................................237
Configure Employee Details..............................................................................................................................237

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 6

Genesis SQL Manual

Add an Employee ...............................................................................................................................................240

Edit an Employee...............................................................................................................................................241
Delete an Employee ...........................................................................................................................................242
CHAPTER VIII TIMECARD AND TRANSACTION MAINTENANCE.....................................................243
ONLINE TIMECARD .................................................................................................................................................243
Accessing the Online Timecard from the Configure Employee Screen .............................................................243
Accessing the Online Timecard from the Approval Editor ................................................................................244
NAVIGATING IN THE ONLINE TIMECARD TAB.........................................................................................................244
NAVIGATING IN THE TRANSACTIONS TAB...............................................................................................................245
ADDING AND EDITING TRANSACTIONS...................................................................................................................245
Add Transaction ................................................................................................................................................246
Add Miscellaneous Transaction.........................................................................................................................247
Edit a Transaction .............................................................................................................................................250
Edit/Add Start ....................................................................................................................................................250
Edit/Add Stop.....................................................................................................................................................251
Multiple Miscellaneous......................................................................................................................................251
From Schedule...................................................................................................................................................254
DELETE A TRANSACTION ........................................................................................................................................255
AUDIT TRAILS ........................................................................................................................................................255
Print the Audit Trails .........................................................................................................................................256
APPROVAL EDITOR .................................................................................................................................................258
STATUS BOARD ......................................................................................................................................................261
TASK ORGANIZER ..................................................................................................................................................262
CHAPTER IX GLOBAL COMMANDS .........................................................................................................264
SELECTING EMPLOYEES IN GLOBAL OPERATION DIALOG BOXES ..........................................................................264
Select Employees Individually ...........................................................................................................................264
Select Employees Globally ................................................................................................................................264
Select Employees by Group ...............................................................................................................................264
Select Employees by Division ............................................................................................................................265
GLOBAL MESSAGE ASSIGNMENT ...........................................................................................................................265
GLOBAL PROFILE ASSIGNMENT..............................................................................................................................266
GLOBAL SCHEDULE ONE DAY ASSIGNMENT ..........................................................................................................267
GLOBAL SCHEDULE COPY ......................................................................................................................................269
GLOBAL STATUS ASSIGNMENT ..............................................................................................................................270
MULTIPLE SCHEDULE ADJUSTER............................................................................................................................272
GLOBAL ADD TRANSACTION ..................................................................................................................................273
GLOBAL IP ACCESS ................................................................................................................................................274
CHAPTER X REPORTS ................................................................................................................................276
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON PRINTING REPORTS ................................................................................................276
Configure Printer ..............................................................................................................................................276
RUNNING A REPORT ...............................................................................................................................................277
Running a Report by Range...............................................................................................................................277
Running a Report by Individual.........................................................................................................................282
ON SCREEN REPORT PREVIEW................................................................................................................................287
EMAILING A REPORT ..............................................................................................................................................289
REPORT EDITOR .....................................................................................................................................................290
Report Maintenance...........................................................................................................................................291
Relocate a Report ..............................................................................................................................................291
Copy a Report....................................................................................................................................................292
Modify a Report .................................................................................................................................................294
Delete a Copied Report .....................................................................................................................................295
CHAPTER XI TERMINAL CONFIGURATION..........................................................................................296

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 7

Genesis SQL Manual

TYPES OF CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................296

TA500, TA600 AND TA7000 SERIES (TA520/530, TA620, TA7000) ...................................................................297
Configure a TA500/TA600/TA7000 Series Clock ..............................................................................................297
TA715, TA777 AND TA780 SERIES .......................................................................................................................313
Configure a TA715/TA777/TA780 Series Clock ................................................................................................313
PC CLOCK ..............................................................................................................................................................327
Configure a PC Clock........................................................................................................................................328
WEBCLOCK ............................................................................................................................................................335
Who Can Clock In and Out with WebClock?.....................................................................................................335
Configure a WebClock.......................................................................................................................................335
Configuring TimeSheet Submittal......................................................................................................................338
Accessing WebClock..........................................................................................................................................342
Clock Functions.................................................................................................................................................343
The Extras..........................................................................................................................................................349
Supervisor Functions .........................................................................................................................................358
ATS SERIES CLOCKS ..............................................................................................................................................361
Configure ATS Clocks........................................................................................................................................362
HAND READER CLOCKS .........................................................................................................................................367
Configure a Hand Reader Clock .......................................................................................................................367
CUSTOMIZING FUNCTION KEYS ..............................................................................................................................375
Pre-Defined Function Keys ...............................................................................................................................376
Available Functions ...........................................................................................................................................376
Available Classes...............................................................................................................................................377
Customize Function Keys ..................................................................................................................................380
ADD A CLOCK ........................................................................................................................................................384
EDIT A CLOCK ........................................................................................................................................................385
DELETE A CLOCK ...................................................................................................................................................385
VIDEX DATA COLLECTORS.....................................................................................................................................386
ADD A DATA COLLECTOR ......................................................................................................................................388
EDIT A DATA COLLECTOR ......................................................................................................................................389
DELETE A DATA COLLECTOR .................................................................................................................................390
SET DATE AND TIME ..............................................................................................................................................390
CHAPTER XII TERMINAL POLLING AND AUTOPROCESSING ..........................................................392
POLLING .................................................................................................................................................................392
Polling Time Clocks...........................................................................................................................................392
Polling Videx DuraTrax ....................................................................................................................................394
CONFIGURE AN AUTOPROCESS...............................................................................................................................396
Run as Service ...................................................................................................................................................397
Add an AutoProcess...........................................................................................................................................397
Edit an Auto Process .........................................................................................................................................402
Delete an AutoProcess.......................................................................................................................................403
Replicate an AutoProcess ..................................................................................................................................403
CHAPTER XIII UTILITIES ..............................................................................................................................405
IMPORTING .............................................................................................................................................................405
Advanced Import................................................................................................................................................405
Import Benefits ..................................................................................................................................................407
EXPORTING DATA ..................................................................................................................................................409
SYSTEM UTILITIES ..................................................................................................................................................411
Initialize Databases ...........................................................................................................................................411
Change Employee Number ................................................................................................................................412
Change Employee Number Width......................................................................................................................412
Print Barcodes...................................................................................................................................................413
Set Reprocess Date ............................................................................................................................................416
Fix Unassigned Badges .....................................................................................................................................416

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 8

Genesis SQL Manual

Restore Original Reports...................................................................................................................................417

Repost from R-Files ...........................................................................................................................................418
Purge R-Files.....................................................................................................................................................419
Post Historical Data ..........................................................................................................................................419
ADDITIONAL UTILITIES ..........................................................................................................................................421
Calculator..........................................................................................................................................................421
About..................................................................................................................................................................421
System Configuration.........................................................................................................................................422
Conversion Table...............................................................................................................................................422
Macros...............................................................................................................................................................424

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 9

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter I About this Manual

This section describes how to use this manual. In addition to providing you with step-by-
step knowledge for performing various procedures, this manual will help you get the most
out of Genesis SQL.

Disclaimer
Every attempt is made to keep this manual up-to-date. However, software enhancements do
occur, and the content of this manual is subject to change without notice. Before using this
manual, verify that the information contained in it is current. Proper installation, configuration, and
operation of the software are contingent upon reading and following the procedures contained in
the latest version of the manual.

Technical Support
If you encounter a problem or need technical support after reading this manual, please contact
your local Sales and Service Representative. Your local representative has received training in
the areas of software installation, configuration, operation, and advanced troubleshooting. They
are qualified to provide you with the highest level of technical support.
When Calling Technical Support for Assistance
If possible, contact your authorized local Sales and Service Representative while at the
computer experiencing the problem so you can quickly answer questions and implement the
solutions suggested by your representative.
Before calling, gather the following information. Your local Sales and Service Representative
will need this information to assist you.
• The version and serial number of your Genesis SQL software.
• The name and version of the Operating System. The type of network being used (if
applicable).
• The model number and EPROM revision of the data collection terminal(s) used with
the Genesis SQL software.
• The name of all software options and/or modules installed.
• The make and model of the host computer (PC).
• The operations being performed when the problem occurred.
• A printout of any error message that was displayed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 10

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter II Installation

This section describes how to install the Genesis SQL software, the Sentinel System
Driver, and attach the hardware key.

System Requirements
To use the Genesis SQL system, the following are the recommended minimum system
requirements must be present.
Genesis SQL Server Install (MS SQL Server 2000)
• Pentium III class processor or higher
• 512 MB of RAM or higher
• 1 GB of available Hard Disk space. Available drive space must reside on the installation
partition. The value may be less depending on which OS it is being installed on and which
system files already exist.
• Windows NT/2000/XP with current OS Service Packs applied.

Workstation Installation
• Pentium III class processor or higher
• 256 MB of RAM or higher
• 500 MB of available Hard Disk space. Available drive space must reside on the installation
partition. The value may be less depending on which OS it is being installed on and which
system files already exist.
• Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP with current OS Service Packs applied.

Additional Considerations
• Windows NT 4.0 Small Business Server is not supported for any product.
• Genesis SQL will run on a Novell network but you cannot install the database or any
applications on the Novell server.
• Genesis SQL can be deployed using Windows Terminal Server or Citrix.
• TCP/IP is required to run Genesis SQL in a network environment.
• Minimum LAN speed must be 10 Mb (faster preferred)
• Minimum WAN speed must be a consistent 256K connection (faster preferred).
• The database engine cannot be installed in conjunction with MSSQL 6.5, MSSQL 7.0 Server,
MSSQL 2000 Server, or ORACLE database Servers.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 11

Genesis SQL Manual

Installing the System

NOTE: Do not launch or run any other applications during the installation process.
NOTE: Do not plug in the Hardware key to the USB port until the Sentinel install is complete.
1. Insert the Genesis SQL Installation CD into the CD ROM drive of the
computer on which you wish to install the software. The InstallShield Wizard
should automatically appear.
2. If the InstallShield does not automatically run, you may start the installation
by navigating to My Computer and double-clicking the icon for GENESIS
SQL.

Figure 1: My Computer

3. The Genesis SQL Setup window will appear.

Figure 2: Genesis SQL Setup Wizard

4. Click the Next button to advance to the next screen. The License Agreement
screen will appear.

Figure 3: Genesis SQL License Agreement

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 12

Genesis SQL Manual

5. Click Yes to accept the License Agreement. The Choose Destination

Location screen will appear.

Figure 4: Choose Destination Location

6. Genesis SQL will be installed in the C:\GENSQL directory by default. If you

wish to install to a different directory, click the Browse and select the
directory to which you wish to install. Click the Next button when you are
ready to proceed. The Setup Type screen will appear.

Figure 5: Setup Type

7. Choose the type of installation you wish to perform.

a) “Full” will install both the software and the drivers needed for the
software on this computer. It will also launch DBGenesisSQL,
which allows you to create a database. (Typical)
b) If you wish to select a Workstation install you will first need to map
your network drive to a local workstation.
“Workstation” will install shortcuts on the machine, which point to
the server.

8. Click the Next button to continue with the installation. The Select Program
Folder screen will appear.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 13

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 6: Select Program Folder

9. The Genesis SQL folder will be created automatically. You may type a new
folder name if you wish. Click Next to continue. The installation will begin.

Figure 7: Genesis SQL Installation Progress

10. When the installation is finished, the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen
will appear. Click the Finish button to proceed.
11. If you selected "Full" in the Setup Type screen, the Sentinel System Driver
installation will begin automatically. If you selected "Workstation," the
installation will end at this point.

Figure 8: Sentinel Driver Installation

12. The Sentinel System Driver—InstallShield Wizard will appear. The Sentinel
System Driver is necessary for Genesis SQL to be able to access the
database files.

Figure 9: Sentinel InstallShield Wizard

13. Click the Next button to begin the Sentinel System Drive Installation. The
Setup Type screen will appear.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 14

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 10: Sentinel Driver Setup Type

14. Verify that Complete is selected and click Next to continue. The Ready to
Install screen will appear.

Figure 11: Ready to Install

15. Click Install to begin the installation.

Figure 12: Sentinel Drive Installation

16. When the installation is finished, the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen
will appear. Click the Finish button to proceed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 15

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 13: Installation Complete

17. This concludes the installation. The Installation Complete message will
appear.

Figure 14: FoxPro LIB Installation

18. The FoxPro LIB—InstallShield Wizard will appear. The FoxPro LIB is for the
Genesis SQL database files.

Figure 15: FoxPro InstallShield Wizard

19. Click the Next button to begin the FoxPro LIB installation. The Ready to
Install screen will appear.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 16

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 16: FoxPro LIB Installation

20. When the installation is finished, the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen
will appear. Click the Finish button to proceed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 17

Genesis SQL Manual

The Database
The database is the integral part of Genesis SQL. It stores vital information such as settings, employee
records, clock in and out times, benefit accrual information, etc. The stability, speed, and data integrity
offered by the Microsoft Data Engine gives Genesis SQL customers a high-performance database, but it
does require some extra steps during the initial setup (when compared to an FoxPro-style database).

In this chapter, you will learn how to utilize DBGenesisSQL to create (or convert) and manage your
databases.

The server allocates space for the data, handles queries, etc.
For smaller installs, the client and server portions can be installed onto the same machine.

DBGenesisSQL
DBGenesisSQL allows you to create a database on a SQL 2000 server.

When MS SQL 2000 is installed on the database server, you can use any client machine running
DBGenesisSQL to create a new database on the server.

Client PC Server PC

Genesis SQL 2000

Modules

DBGenesi
sSQL

Database

Creating a New Database

1. The Genesis SQL Server Administration screen will automatically appear after the installation
of the software is complete.

Figure 17: Genesis SQL Server Administration Dialog Box

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 18

Genesis SQL Manual

2. Click the Create New Database icon. The New Database Wizard Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 18: New Database Wizard Dialog Box

a. Enter the name you wish to use to refer to the database. Avoid using spaces in the
Database Name.
b. Enter the name of the computer on which the database will be located. You may use the
computer name, address or simply enter “(local)” (including the parentheses) to indicate
the local machine.
NOTE: If the Server is in another domain then click the ( ) button to select the correct
domain. This is not available in Windows 95/98.
c. Click Next.
If you would like to skip this step and not be prompted to do this again, check the box at the
bottom of the dialog box, which reads, “Do not prompt me again” and Click OK.
3. The path module will appear:

Figure 19: Path Module Dialog Box

a. Enter the path where the data files will be created.

By default the program points to C:\mssql7\Data\.
b. Click Next.
4. The Data Source Naming portion of the New Database Wizard Dialog Box will appear:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 19

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 20: Data Source Naming Dialog Box

At this point, you must decide whether you would like to create a Data Source Name.
Creating a Data Source Name will allow the computer you are currently working on to
access the database after it has been created.
1) Select Yes or No.
Ÿ If Yes: Click Next. The Data Source Naming portion of the New Database
Wizard Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 21: Data Source Naming Dialog Box

By default, the Data Source Name is called GenesisSQL and check

marked as the system DSN. The Data Source Name contains information
that your computer will use to refer to the actual database. Do not change
the Data Source Name.
Ÿ If No: then you will not be able to access the database from current
machine.
2) Click Finish. It may take several minutes to complete. Afterward, you may close
DBGenesisSQL.
You are done creating your database, unless the Database Wizard cannot gain
access to your database server, in which case the Database Server Login Dialog
Box will appear:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 20

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 22: Database Server Login

5. Enter Login ID and Password.

NOTE: If you are accessing a database on a computer, which already had the Database
Engine installed (not by Genesis SQL), you must enter the appropriate administrator Login ID
and Password. See your Database Administrator if you do not have appropriate information.
6. Click OK.
You may close DBGenesisSQL after the installation is complete.

Converting a Genesis SQL Database

Launch DBGenesisSQL. The Database Administration Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 23: Genesis SQL Server Administration Dialog Box

1. Click the Convert Genesis SQL Database icon. The Database Conversion Wizard Dialog
Box will appear:

Figure 24: Database Conversion Wizard Dialog Box

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 21

Genesis SQL Manual

2. Enter the location of the database you would like to convert. Or, you can click the ( ) button
to browse for the file.
NOTE: You must place the Genesis SQL Data Files on the machine that will run the new
database.
3. Click Next. The New Database portion of the Database Conversion Wizard Dialog Box will
appear:

Figure 25: New Database Dialog Box

4. Because a database does not already exist for you to place the converted data into, select
No.
5. Click Next. The New Database Wizard Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 26: Name and Location Dialog Box

6. Enter a name for the new database.

7. Select the computer on which you would like the database to reside.
NOTE: If the computer you would like to install the database on is not listed in the drop
down, type the computer name.

NOTE: The Data Engine should have been installed prior to this step. If it has not, please cancel
and install the Data Engine prior to continuing.

8. Click Next.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 22

Genesis SQL Manual

If you would like to skip this step and not be prompted to do this again, check the box at the
bottom of the dialog box, which reads, “Do not prompt me again” and Click OK.
9. The Enter the Path dialog box will appear.

Figure 27: Path Dialog Box

10. Enter the path for the new database.

11. Click Next.
12. The Creating a Data Source Name dialog box will appear.

Figure 28: Creating a Data Source Name Dialog Box

13. Verify that the option “Yes, the database will be accessed from this machine and a data
sources does not already exist.” is checked.
14. Click Next. The Data Source Naming portion of the New Database Wizard Dialog Box will
appear:

Figure 29: Creating a Data Source Name Dialog Box

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 23

Genesis SQL Manual

15. The Data Source Name, by default, is called GenesisSQL and the checked box indicates it is
a default, system DSN. The Data Source Name is the way in which your computer will
recognize the actual database.
16. Click Finish.
You are done converting your database, unless the Database Wizard cannot gain access to
your database server, in which case the Database Server Login Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 30: Database Server Login Dialog Box

17. Enter Login ID and Password.

a. If you are accessing a database on a computer, which already had the Database Engine
installed (not by Genesis SQL), you must enter the appropriate administrator Login ID and
Password. See the Database Administrator if you don’t have appropriate information.
18. Click OK.
The Database and DSN will be created at this point. You can close DBGenesisSQL if you
are done, and then run Genesis SQL to get started.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 24

Genesis SQL Manual

Changing the Password for the Database

Launch DBGenesisSQL. The Database Administration Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 31: Genesis SQL Server Administration Dialog Box

1. Click the Administration menu.

2. Select Change Password Database. The Change Password Wizard Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 32: Change Password Dialog Box

3. Type (or select from the drop down list) the name of the database server on which to change
the password on.
4. Enter the old password of the system administrator login of database server.
5. Enter the new password of the database server and confirm the new password.
6. Click OK.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 25

Genesis SQL Manual

Deleting a Database from the Database Server

Launch DBGenesisSQL. The Database Administration Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 33: Genesis SQL Server Administration

1. Click the Administration menu.

2. Select Delete Database. The Delete Database Wizard Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 34: Delete Database Wizard Dialog Box

3. Type (or select from the drop down list) the name of the computer on which the database you
would like to delete resides.
4. Click Next.
NOTE: If the database server’s system administrator’s account does not have a password
you will be prompted to enter a password for security purposes.
If you would like to skip this step and not be prompted to do this again, check the box at the
bottom of the dialog box, which reads, “Do not prompt me again” and Click OK.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 26

Genesis SQL Manual

The Select Database portion of the Delete Database Wizard will appear:

Figure 35: Delete Database Select Database Dialog Box

5. Select the name of the database you would like to delete from the drop down list.
6. Select the Delete button if you wish to delete the database.

Figure 36: Warning Dialog Box

7. Enter your password for sysop and click OK to continue with deletion of database.

Figure 37: SysOp Authentication Dialog Box

8. Click Finish. A confirmation dialog box will appear.

Click Delete if you are certain you would like to permanently delete the database you selected.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 27

Genesis SQL Manual

Backing Up the Database

Launch DBGenesisSQL. The Database Administration Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 38: Genesis SQL Server Administration

1. Click the Administration menu.

2. Select Backup Database. The Backup Database Wizard Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 39: Backup Database Wizard

3. Type (or select from the drop down list) the name of the database server on which the
database resides.
4. Click Next.
NOTE: If the database server’s system administrator’s account does not have a password
you will be prompted to enter a password for security purposes.
If you would like to skip this step and not be prompted to do this again, check the box at the
bottom of the dialog box, which reads, “Do not prompt me again” and Click OK.
The Backup Database Wizard for selecting the database will appear:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 28

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 40: Select the Database Dialog Box

5. Select the name of the database you would like to backup from the drop down list.
6. Click Next.

Figure 41: Backup Name Dialog Box

7. Enter a name and destination for the backup database.

8. Click Next.

Figure 42: Enter Description Dialog Box

9. Enter a description for this backup (Description is used as comments for scheduling tasks in
windows).
10. Click Next.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 29

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 43: Run Backup Dialog Box

11. Select to run backup now or launch windows task scheduler to schedule this backup.
NOTE: If you select window task scheduler please www.microsoft.com for more
documentation.
12. Click Finish.

Restoring a Database
Launch DBGenesisSQL. The Database Administration Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 44: Genesis SQL Server Administration Dialog Box

1. Click the Administration menu.

2. Select Restore Database. The Restore Database Wizard Dialog Box will appear:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 30

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 45: Restore Database Wizard Dialog Box

3. Type (or select from the drop down list) the name of the database server on which the
database resides.
4. Select either “Select my own backup file” or “Select backups for a database”
NOTE: If the database server’s system administrator’s account does not have a password
you will be prompted to enter a password for security purposes.
If you would like to skip this step and not be prompted to do this again, check the box at the
bottom of the dialog box, which reads, “Do not prompt me again” and Click OK.

Figure 46: Path Dialog Box

5. Click Next. The database name portion of the Restore Database Wizard will appear:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 31

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 47: Name and Location Dialog box

6. Enter the name of the database you would like to restore.

7. Click Next.

Figure 48: Verification Dialog Box

8. Verify Backup settings and Click Finish.

9. This step only applies if you are overriding an existing database.
Enter your password for sysop and click OK to continue with deletion of database.

Figure 49: SysOp Authentication

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 32

Genesis SQL Manual

Attaching a Database
Once you have copied the <DBName>Dat.mdf and <DBName>Log.ldf files to the new MSSQL7,
you must use DBGenesisSQL to attach the files.
Launch DBGenesisSQL. The Database Administration Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 50: Genesis SQL Server Administration Dialog Box

1. Click the Administration menu.

2. Select Attach Database File. The Attach Database File Wizard Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 51: Attach Database Wizard Dialog Box

3. Type (or select from the drop down list) the name of the database server on which the
database resides.
4. Click Next.
5. Enter the name of the database you are attaching and the location of the database you are
attaching the database from.
6. Click Finish.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 33

Genesis SQL Manual

Detaching A Database
Launch DBGenesisSQL. The Database Administration Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 52: Genesis SQL Server Administration Dialog Box

1. Click the Administration menu.

2. Select Detach Database. The Detach Database Wizard Dialog Box will appear:

Figure 53: Detach Database Dialog Box

3. Type (or select from the drop down list) the name of the database server on which the
database resides.
4. Click Next.
5. Type (or select from the drop down list) the name of the database you would like to detach
from database server.
6. Click Finish.

Hardware Keys
When the installation is complete, a hardware key must be attached to the computer’s USB port
in order to start and operate the Genesis SQL software. There are 2 types of hardware keys -
each designed for a specific purpose.
• Main System Key
• Demo Key

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 34

Genesis SQL Manual

Attach the hardware key to one of the computer’s USB ports. If you have both ports in use and
you do not have any free USB ports then you will need to purchase a USB hub

Figure 54: USB key

When the system is first launched, Genesis SQL searches for and verifies the presence of a
hardware key. If a key is not found, the system will not start.
Main System Key
The Main System Key is shipped with each new software package. One key per system is
required. The Main System Key allows you to start and operate the software as well as poll
your time clock(s). The Main System Key is identified by the code 0243A51214 on the outer
shell.

Demo Key
The Demo Key is an accessory for resellers of Genesis SQL systems. This key is identified
by the code 4EIWEH-B on the outer shell.
The following restrictions are present when Genesis SQL detects the Demo Key:
• The Genesis SQL software is limited to five employees and two users.
• NOT FOR RESALE is displayed on all screens.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 35

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter III Getting Started

This section explains how to launch the Genesis SQL system, including logging on and
off, using Help, using the keyboard instead of the mouse and customizing the Genesis
SQL environment.

Starting Genesis SQL and Logging In

Note on User Accounts
When starting Genesis SQL, you will be prompted for a User ID and password. The User ID
and password are used to determine who is able to login and what areas of the program are
accessible. These "User Accounts" are defined in the Security Access portion of Genesis
SQL, which will be covered later in this manual.

SYSOP
There is a built-in administrator account that grants full access to all parts of the
application. The User ID for this account is SYSOP and the initial password is
"password." (This password can and should be changed.) This account will be referred
to as SYSOP throughout this manual.
The first time you login, you must use the SYSOP account, as no other accounts exist.
You will also use this account to perform system maintenance, etc. The SYSOP account
can perform all functions within Genesis SQL, including certain database management
functions that no other account can access.

Launching and Logging In to Genesis SQL

The instructions in this section assume that you already know the User ID and password to
be used. Check with your system administrator if you are unsure of which User ID to use.

1. Click the Start, Programs, Genesis SQL, Genesis SQL, or double-click the
Genesis SQL Icon on the Desktop.
2. Genesis SQL will open and display the Login screen.

Figure 55: Genesis SQL Login Screen

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 37

Genesis SQL Manual

3. Type your User ID in the User ID field, then press either ENTER or the TAB
key to advance to the Password field.
4. Type your password in the Password field and press either ENTER or the
TAB key to access Genesis SQL.
5. The Main Window will open.

Exit
Help Task Organizer

Poll Terminals Automated Processes

Status Board Run Reports and Listings

Maintenance Approval Editor

Scheduling

Exiting the System

You can use any of the following methods to close or exit out of Genesis SQL.
• Click File, Exit on the menu bar.
• Click the Exit button on the toolbar.
• Click the Windows Close button (the X at the far right of the menu bar).
• Press ALT+ F4 on the keyboard.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 38

Genesis SQL Manual

Tips and Techniques

Genesis SQL is designed to be user-friendly, and as such there are common techniques to
making working in Genesis SQL easier. Some of these tips are listed below.

Setting Definition
Name vs. Number You will notice that most of the configuration
listing dialog boxes provide a list of the existing
items at the side of the screen. (For example,
the Divisions dialog box gives you a list of
Divisions.) These lists can be sorted
according to Name or Number, depending
upon your preference.
Show Inactives Check this button to show inactive items in
the list at the side of any dialog box.
Print You may click the Print button in any dialog
to print the report associated with the current
screen. For example, clicking the Print
button in the Configure Category dialog box
prints the Category Listing report.
Cancel You may click the Cancel button in any
dialog box to close the screen without saving
changes.

NOTE: The Employee Maintenance, Status Board and Multiple Schedule Adjuster sections will
resize themselves according to the monitor resolution.

Using the Keyboard

Genesis SQL system is designed so you can perform all operations from your keyboard as well
as with the mouse.

Hot Key
Underlined Letter

Underlined Letters
All menus, menu items, and buttons have an underlined letter, which allows keyboard access
to that item.
• To access a menu, press the ALT key in conjunction with the letter that is underlined.
• To access an item on the menu, first open the menu and then press the letter that is
underlined.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 39

Genesis SQL Manual

• To select a button, press the CTRL key in conjunction with the letter that is
underlined

Keyboard Usage Examples

To: Do This:

Select an item from the Main Press ALT and the underlined letter.
Window. For example, press ALT+F to open the
File menu.
Select a menu command. Press the underlined letter only. This is
true for submenus too.
For example, type S to select
Security.
Select a button. Press CTRL plus the underlined letter.
For example, press CTRL+E to choose
the Edit button.
Hot Keys
Some menus, such as the Help menu, are accessible using Hot Keys. These keys or key
combinations correspond to a menu item. Instead of typing the underlined letter in the
command, you can simply press the Hot Key. For example, to view your system
configuration, press F11. Also, all date fields have a calendar dropdown, to access right click
on the date.

Additional Keyboard Access

Other keys and key combinations are available in the system. They are explained below
To: Press:

Exit the current function or window without ESC

saving the data.
Display the Help topic associated with the F1
current window.
Display the Calculator. F2

Display the Calendar/Diary. F3

Display the Help > About menu window. F9

Display Conversion Table. F12

Activate the menu bar in the Main Window. F10 or ALT

Exit the Genesis SQL system. ALT+F4

Display Rounded Start and Stop times in the R

Online Timecard.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 40

Genesis SQL Manual

Help
Genesis SQL incorporates an Online Help system to answer questions about functions,
procedures, and commands.
You can access context-sensitive Help from anywhere in the application by pressing the F1
function key. You will automatically be taken to the Help topic appropriate for the screen that you
are in currently.
You may also access the Online Help feature through the Help menu, from which you can
perform searches and browse the Help topics. There are three ways you can look for information:
Browse the Contents, Search the Index, or do a text Find. There are three tabs across the top of
the Help Topics window to access each of these methods.

Access the Online Help Window

1. Click the Help menu, Help. The Help Topics window will open

Figure 56: Help Topics

Use Help Contents

1. In the Help Topics window, click the Contents tab.
2. Double-click the topic you wish to browse. This will expand the sub-topics
below it.
3. If necessary, double-click the sub-topic you wish to browse.
4. When you find the article you are interested in, double-click it to open the
article.

Use the Help Index

1. In the Help Topics window, click the Index tab.
2. Type in the topic you are looking for.
3. When you find the article you are interested in, double-click it to open the
article.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 41

Genesis SQL Manual

Use Help Search

1. In the Help Topics window, click the Search tab.
2. Type in the topic you are looking for.
3. If necessary, select a word from the list of suggestions.
4. When you find the article you are interested in, double-click it to open the
article.

Return to the Help Topics Window

After reading an article, you may return to the Help Topics window by clicking the Back
button on the toolbar.

Figure 57: Help Article

Print a Help Topic

You can print any help topic by clicking the Print button on the toolbar.

Figure 58: Help Article

1. Click the Print button on the Genesis SQL Help toolbar. The Print window
will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 42

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 59: Print

2. Select the printer to which you wish to print and click the Print button. The
topic will print.

Configuring the System Environment

Environmental settings control various display and functional characteristics of your system. The
default settings can be modified. Bell, Background and Large Toolbar are available
environment options. A check mark (9) in front of the option means that the option is activated.

Figure 60: Environment Menu

Play Bell Tones

You can customize Genesis SQL to play a tone at the end of a field when entering data.

1. Click the File menu, Environment, Bell. This will cause a bell tone to play
whenever you come to the end of a field when entering data.
NOTE: To remove follow Step 1.
Change Screen Background
You can customize the Genesis SQL background to display a graphic of your choice. The
graphic must be in bitmap (.bmp) format.

1. Click the File menu, Environment, Background. The Select Background

window will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 43

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 61: Select Background

2. Choose the graphics file you wish to use for your background.
• Click the directory or file to select it.
• Click the […] icon to go to a previous directory.
3. Click OK to accept the selected file.
4. Your graphic will appear on the background of Genesis SQL.
NOTE: To reset the background settings to the defaults:
‚ Click the File menu, Environment, Background. The Select
Background window will open.
‚ Click the Defaults button.

Gradient Background Option

You can activate the gradient background for all forms in Genesis SQL.

Navigation Selection
You can customize the main toolbar to display a small button toolbar, large button toolbar,
show center screen shortcut, side bar or zoom bar.

1. Click the File menu, Environment, Navigation Selection. Then select from
the list of options.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 44

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter IV Configuration

This section explains how to configure and customize Genesis SQL for your company's
requirements. To make this chapter easier to follow, the topics in this section are arranged
in the sequence that Time America recommends completing them. This also happens to
be the order in which they appear on the Configure menu in the Genesis SQL Main
Window. This order is:
• Main Company
• Divisions (optional)
• Categories
• Attendance
• Policies
• Rounding
• Shifts
• Holidays
• Holiday Groups (optional)
• Groups (optional)
• Job Costing
• Security
• Bell Schedules
• Profile Lockouts
• Benefit Accruals

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 45

Genesis SQL Manual

Main Company
The Main Company window is where you identify your company, define the overall configuration
of the system, and specify the payroll service to which time and attendance data will be exported.

1. Click the Configure menu, Company, Main Company. The Main Company
window will open and the General tab will be selected by default.

Figure 62: Main Company: General tab

2. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Name Enter your company's name. This field is
required and can contain up to 30 characters.
Address Enter the first line of your company's primary
address. This field can accept up to 30
characters.
NOTE: Divisions can be used to allow for
additional branch addresses.
Address Enter the second line of your company's
primary address (such as suite number.) This
field can accept up to 30 characters and may
be left blank.
City Enter your company's primary address City.
This field can accept up to 30 characters.
State Enter the two-character code for your
company's State. Genesis SQL automatically
capitalizes your entry.
Zip Enter your company's zip code. You may enter
the 5 or 9 digit zip code.
Phone Number Enter your company's primary phone number.

Fax Number Enter your company's primary fax number.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 46

Genesis SQL Manual

Logo The company logo will appear in this window.

NOTE: The bitmap file must be created and
saved as companylogo.bmp. The file is
located in the GENESIS SQL folder. This logo
can also be viewed in Reports. Locate the
ReportsLogo.exe file. Run the file and then
select the reports to include the logo.

3. When all settings are complete, click the Configure tab. The Configure
screen will appear.

Figure 63: Main Company: Configure tab

4. Fill in the settings as appropriate

Setting Definition
Daylight savings Check this box if your company is in a state
that observes daylight savings time. Typically
you will check this box.
Divisions Check this box to enable the Divisions feature.
A Division is a "subset" of the main company,
such as a branch, different location, or
subsidiary company.
TIP: Companies who submit multiple company
codes to their payroll service may want to use
Divisions.
Department Check this box to enable the Departments
feature. Departments reflect the business
units within your company and are the top
level of Job Costing.
NOTE: You will have the opportunity to
customize this nomenclature in the next
screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 47

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Job Check this box to enable the Job level. Jobs
are the second level of Job Costing.
NOTE: You will have the opportunity to
customize this nomenclature in the next
screen.
Step This option will only be available if you have
purchased the Job Costing Module.
Check this box to enable the Steps level of the
Job Costing feature. Steps are the third level
of Job Costing.
NOTE: You will have the opportunity to
customize this nomenclature in the next
screen.
Operation This option will only be available if you have
purchased the Job Costing Module.
Check this box to enable the Operation level
of the Job Costing feature. Operation is the
fourth level of Job Costing.
NOTE: You will have the opportunity to
customize this nomenclature in the next
screen.
Task This option will only be available if you have
purchased the Job Costing Module.
Check this box to enable the Task level of the
Job Costing feature. Task is the fifth level of
Job Costing.
NOTE: You will have the opportunity to
customize this nomenclature in the next
screen.
Use level wage "Level Wage" refers to the hourly rate
before default associated with a department, job, step,
assignment wage operation or task. The "default assignment
wage" refers to the wage associated with an
individual employee.
Check this box if you wish the Level Wage for
the department an employee works in to take
precedence over the Default Assignment
Wage when calculating an employee's
earnings.
Paid lunches and Check this box if paid lunches and breaks are
breaks do not not considered in calculating hours for
accrue toward overtime.
overtime

Tip reporting Check this box to enable tip reporting.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 48

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Wages Check this box to enable the wages features
throughout Genesis SQL. This makes it
possible to enter wage information in the
Employee Maintenance screen.
Overtime Level 2 Up to three levels of overtime may be defined
in Genesis SQL. One overtime level (OT1) is
always available. To use a second overtime
level (OT2), click the Overtime Level 2 check
box.
Overtime Level 3 To use a third overtime level (OT3) in the
system, click the Overtime Level 3 check
box. This level is not available unless
Overtime Level 2 is selected.
Use Swipe and Go Check this option to allow employees to swipe
the clock without punching any keys. The
system then determines whether the individual
punch was an In, Out, Out for Lunch, In from
Lunch, etc., based on the employee’s last
punch and the employee's schedule.
Use (am-pm) Format Check this option to have reports and the
online timecard use an AM/PM format instead
of 24-hour format (military time.)
Do not use Floater Check this option to suppress all floaters from
for shift selection each shift group.

Editable Pay This option controls the number of pay periods

Periods, plus days and days in which it is possible to edit
transactions in the Genesis SQL system. For
instance, Figure 1 specifies that two pay
periods of transactions can be modified.
Approval Editor Pay This option controls the number of pay periods
Periods Back in which it is possible to edit transactions from
the Approval Editor.
Use SMTP for E- This option allows you to define the e-mail
mail configuration per user in security.

Multiple poll This feature will allow you to poll multiple

clocks simultaneously.
INI Settings This option allows for custom features to be
turned on.
Auto logout- This option will define the number of minutes
minutes a user can be idle in Genesis SQL before it
automatically logs them out.
Auto logout-time This option will define a specific time all users
will automatically be logged out of Genesis
SQL.
Currency Name Enter the type of currency Genesis SQL
should use. The default is "Dollars."

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 49

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Date Format Select the manner in which dates should be
displayed. The options are American
(MM/DD/YYYY) and European
(DD/MM/YYYY).
Date Delimiter Enter the character with which to delimit
dates. The default is a slash (/).

5. When all settings are complete, click the Defaults tab to select it. The
Defaults screen will appear.

Figure 64: Main Company: Defaults Screen

6. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Employee Enter the term you would like to use to refer to
employees. (i.e., Employees, Associates,
Members, etc.) The default is "Employees."
Length Enter the maximum number of digits for the
Employee ID.
Type Choose the data type for the Employee ID. The
options are Numeric and Alphanumeric.
Department Enter the term you would like to use to refer to
the business units within your organization. (i.e.,
Departments, Business Unit, Cost Center, etc.)
The default is "Department."
Length Enter the maximum number of digits for the
Department ID.
Type Choose the data type for the Department ID.
The options are Numeric and Alphanumeric.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 50

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Job Enter the term you would like to use to refer to
the second level of job costing in your
organization. (i.e., Job, Project, Client, etc.) The
default is "Job."
Length Enter the maximum number of digits for the Job
ID.
Type Choose the data type for the Job ID. The
options are Numeric and Alphanumeric.
Step Enter the term you would like to use to refer to
the third level of job costing in your organization.
(i.e., Job, Project, Client, etc.) The default is
"Step."
NOTE: This option will only appear if you have
installed the Job Costing module.
Length Enter the maximum number of digits for the
Step ID.
Type Choose the data type for the Step ID. The
options are Numeric and Alphanumeric.
Operation Enter the term you would like to use to refer to
the fourth level of job costing in your
organization. (i.e., Job, Project, etc.) The default
is "Operation."
NOTE: This option will only appear if you have
installed the Job Costing module.
Length Enter the maximum number of digits for the
Operation ID.
Type Choose the data type for the Operation ID. The
options are Numeric and Alphanumeric.
Task Enter the term you would like to use to refer to
the fifth level of job costing in your organization.
(i.e., Project, Task, etc.) The default is "Task."
NOTE: This option will only appear if you have
installed the Job Costing module
Length Enter the maximum number of digits for the
Task ID.
Type Choose the data type for the Task ID. The
options are Numeric and Alphanumeric.
User Defined Fields Genesis SQL allows you to define up to six
user-defined fields. Enter the names of the
fields you would like to define (if any). If you do
not need any custom fields, you may leave
these blank. The default values are License,
Spouse, and License 2, but you may modify or
delete these as desired.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 51

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Badges Length Enter the number of characters (from 2 to 10)
that will be read from the employee badge. For
example, if the badge number is 10 characters
long but you want to read only the last five
characters, enter a 5 in this field. The number of
digits here must match the actual number of
digits on the physical badges given to
employees, and must also match the settings
programmed into the badge reader clocks.
Offset* Enter the number of digits from the left that the
clock should "offset" before reading the
* only available numbers. This tells the clock how many
when using characters to skip before starting to read the
TA620 terminals numbers. For example, if you have a badge
number that is 10 characters long (say
1234567890) and you want to read the last five
numbers only (67890), the offset would be 5.
Maximum Type the maximum number of characters (from
2 to 64) on an employee’s badge. Any badge
longer than this number will be rejected by the
time clock.
Type Choose the data type for the Badge number.
The options are Numeric and Alphanumeric.
Most – though not all – badges will be Numeric.
Badge Genesis SQL can assign badge numbers
Assignment automatically when adding a new employee.
You can manually change automatic
assignments later if necessary.
Choose No Automatic Assignment to bypass
the automatic assignment and be allowed to
enter the badge number manually.
Choose Next Numeric Available to have
Genesis SQL assign the next sequential
available badge number.
Choose Same as Employee Number to have
Genesis SQL assign a badge number that is
identical to the employee's ID number.
External Report If you will be using a third-party report
Writer editor/writer to create and/or modify Genesis
SQL reports, specify the path name (drive and
directory) of the report writer in this field.

7. When all settings are complete, click the Exports tab to select it. The Exports
screen will appear.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 52

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 65: Main Company: Exports Tab

8. Select the payroll provider to which you wish to export data. You may be
prompted for additional information specific to the payroll application
selected. For example, when ADP is selected, you are asked for the
Company Code of your main company.

NOTE: If the payroll provider you will be using does not appear in the list,
simply choose either “Generic Numeric” or “Generic Alpha” depending on
the Pay Code type your provider requires (contact your payroll provider
to obtain this information.)

9. When all settings are complete, click OK to save the changes and exit the
Main Company configuration dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 53

Genesis SQL Manual

Divisions
Divisions are subsets of the main company. For example, a division can be a remote office or
separate business unit. Divisions are not required and will only be available if the Divisions
option is selected in Main Company Configure screen.

Configure Divisions
From the divisions dialog box, you may add, edit and delete Divisions.
10. Click the Configure menu, Company, Divisions. The Configure Divisions
dialog box will open.

Figure 66: Divisions

11. The Divisions window includes the following information:

Setting Definition
Number This is a required field. Enter a 4-digit number
to identify the division.
NOTE: Do not use 0000 since this number is
assigned to the main company and cannot be
used for divisions.
Name This is a required field. Type the division name
(up to 30 characters) as you want it to appear
in the system and on reports.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
division is currently in use. Uncheck this box if
the division is not being used at this time.
Address Enter the first line address of the division. Up to
30 characters may be entered in each line.
Address Enter the second line address of the division (if
applicable). Up to 30 characters may be
entered in each line.
City Type the name of the city (up to 30 characters)
for the division.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 54

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
State Type the two-character state abbreviation.

Zip Enter the five or nine-digit postal zip code of the

division.
Phone Number Enter the telephone number for this division.

Fax Number Enter the fax number for this division.

Additional You may be prompted for additional information

Information based upon the payroll application selected in
the Export screen of the Main Company
configuration. For example, if ADP is selected
in the Export screen, you will be prompted for
the company number of this division.

Add a Division
12. Click the Configure menu, Company, Divisions. The Configure Divisions
dialog box will open.
13. Click the Add button. The General screen will become available for you to
add the new Division.
14. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Divisions section.
15. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Divisions
screen.
16. Click Close to exit the Configure Divisions window.

Edit a Division
17. Click the Configure menu, Company, Divisions. The Configure Divisions
dialog box will open.
18. Highlight the Division you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
19. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected division.
20. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Divisions section.
NOTE: The Division number cannot be changed.
21. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Divisions
screen.
22. Click Close to exit the Configure Divisions window.

Delete a Division
Divisions that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Configure menu, Company, Divisions. The Configure Divisions
dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the division you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 55

Genesis SQL Manual

3. Click the Delete button.

Figure 67: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Divisions window.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 56

Genesis SQL Manual

Categories
Categories are used to track and report types of time or money. The built-in categories are:
• Absent
• Adjustment
• Break
• Bereavement
• Holiday
• Jury Duty
• Lunch
• Military Leave
• Sick – NonPaid
• Other Paid Time
• Personal Day
• Per Diem #1
• Per Diem #2
• Sick – Paid
• Cash Tips
• Charge Tips
• Banquet Tips
• Other Tips
• Vacation
• Worked Time

You may edit and delete built-in categories (other than Work), as well as add custom categories
specific to your organization, such as Floating Holidays, Family Leave, etc.
Categories are used in entering time and monetary adjustments for employees.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 57

Genesis SQL Manual

Configure Categories
1. Click the Configure menu, Categories. The Configure Categories dialog box
will open.

Figure 68: Categories

2. The Configure Categories screen displays the following information:

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a code (up to 4
alphanumeric characters) to identify the category. Once
saved, this code cannot be changed.
Equals category When entering a Category into a Hand Reader, only a
number from numerical value can be entered. Use this field to assign a
hand reader. number representing the Category Code.

Name This is a required field. Enter the category name, as it will

appear in the system and on reports. The category name
can be up to 30 characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the category is
currently in use. Clear this check box if the category is
not being used at this time.
Do you wish to This indicates whether this category will be included in
export this the export information created for your payroll service.
category?
If this option is selected, the Export tab will become
available. You must configure the Export tab settings to
specify field mappings for your payroll export. (See Step
3.)
Hours/Dollars This is a required field. Select either Hours or Dollars to
indicate the category type. For example, the category
VACATION collects hour amounts, while the categories
TIP1 and TIP2 collect dollar amounts.
If Hours is selected, complete the remaining fields that
apply. If Dollars is selected, the remaining fields in this
dialog box are unavailable.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 58

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Miscellaneous Select this option to allow a Miscellaneous entry of this
entry category to override an absence. (Miscellaneous refers
overrides to an entry other than Work.)
absence?

Miscellaneous Allows time in this category to count toward the minimum

entry hours worked requirement for allocating paid holiday
overrides time. (Miscellaneous refers to an entry other than Work.)
holiday
minimum
hours?

Are Allows time in this category to be treated as “paid time.”

miscellaneou Select this option if employees will be paid when
s entries receiving a miscellaneous entry using this category.
paid? (Miscellaneous refers to an entry other than Work.)

Can this This option will only be available if miscellaneous entries

category be are paid. Select this option to accrue time in this category
overtime? towards overtime. Clearing this option causes the system
to prohibit overtime calculation on this category. If the
category can be overtime, it is also possible to default to
a specific level as well as enable it to accumulate
towards overtime.
Defaults Determines to which pay factor this category should
default. The options are Regular, OT1, OT2, and OT3.
Deducts from Enables you to select a benefit entitlement "bucket" from
which to deduct time posted to this category. For
example, you might have a category called Family Illness
that deducts from the Sick time entitlement. This enables
you to itemize the specific type of time taken, while still
tracking the time against a generic entitlement.
This option is mutually exclusive with the Post to benefit
entitlement (which causes the category to become its
own benefit entitlement entry.)
Factor This setting works with the Deducts from setting. Enter
the factor at which this category's time should be
deducted. (i.e., a factor of 1 would indicate that for every
one hour worked, one hour would be deducted. A factor
of 2 would indicate that for every one hour worked, two
hours would be deducted.)
Post to Select this option to post accrued time in this category to
benefit company benefits. Checking this option makes it possible
entitlement? to configure benefit entitlement and/or rules for this pay
type. Also, any time posted to this category will be
deducted from the available entitlement for this category.

3. The Export Codes tab will be available only if the Do you wish you to
export this category option is checked.

NOTE: These settings will be used to map data collected by Genesis SQL to

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 59

Genesis SQL Manual

the appropriate fields in your payroll application, and it is critical that they be
configured fully and accurately. The information in these fields must be
obtained from the payroll service specified in Company Setup. Contact your
payroll service representative or software manual for the information
requested, if necessary.

Figure 69: Export Codes tab

4. The Export Codes tab includes the following information:

Setting Definition
Differential: None This line of information will specify the codes
for hours that do not have differential
adjustments.
Differential: D1-D9 These lines of information will specify the
codes used by hours allocated to each Shift
Differential.
REG Regular Hours are hours paid at "straight
time." Enter the code your payroll application
uses to refer to Regular hours.
OT1 OT1 hours are hours paid at the factor defined
for OT1 in the Payroll Policy. Enter the code
your payroll application uses to refer to hours
paid at the OT1 factor.
OT2 OT2 hours are hours paid at the factor defined
for OT2 in the Payroll Policy. Enter the code
your payroll application uses to refer to hours
paid at the OT2 factor.
NOTE: This option will only appear if OT2 has
been selected on the Configure tab of the
Main Company configuration dialog box.
OT3 OT3 hours are hours paid at the factor defined
for OT3 in the Payroll Policy. Enter the code
your payroll application uses to refer to hours
paid at the OT3 factor.
NOTE: This option will only appear if OT3 has
been selected on the Configure tab of the
Main Company configuration dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 60

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Field Code Enter the code that indicates which field of
your payroll software this category will be
mapped to.
This code differentiates between categories of
time that use the same field number. For
example, regular (REG) hours for VACATION
and HOLIDAY may both use field number 16.
By assigning a field code V to the VACATION
category and H to the HOLIDAY category,
vacation hours are reported in field 16V, while
holiday hours are reported in 16H. If no field
code was assigned, you could not differentiate
between vacation and holiday hours.

Add a Category
1. Click the Configure menu, Categories. The Configure Categories dialog box
will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Category. The General tab will become
available.

Figure 70: Adding a new Category

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Categories section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Categories dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Categories window.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 61

Genesis SQL Manual

Edit a Category
1. Click the Configure menu, Categories. The Configure Categories dialog box
will open.
2. Highlight the Category you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected category.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Categories section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Categories
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Categories window.

Delete a Category
Categories that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Configure menu, Categories. The Configure Categories dialog box
will open.
2. Highlight the category you wish to delete from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 71: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Categories window.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 62

Genesis SQL Manual

Attendance Codes
Attendance codes are used to indicate time rounding and employee attendance on reports.
These codes are used in conjunction with the Rounding Rules. (See Rounding Rules, page 83.)
Some examples of attendance codes are:
• In Late (IL)
• In Early (IE)
• Break Long
• Lunch Short
• Out Early

Configure Attendance Codes

1. Click the Configure menu, Attendance. The Configure Attendance dialog
box will open.

Figure 72: Configure Attendance

2. The Configure Attendance dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Code This field is required. Enter a user-defined
attendance code up to 5 alphanumeric
characters in length. Once saved, this code
cannot be changed.
Name This field is required. Type the attendance
code name as you want it to appear in the
system and on reports. The attendance
description can be up to 30 characters long.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 63

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Active Click the Active check box to indicate an
active attendance code. Clear this check box
if the code is inactive. Rather than deleting an
attendance code from the system, simply
mark it inactive in the event you wish to use it
again at a later date.
Approval Check this box to cause attendance
infractions marked with this Attendance code
to appear in the Approval Editor. (The
Approval Editor permits a supervisor to review
and process attendance infractions prior to
producing time and attendance reports. For
more information on the Approval Editor, see
page 258.)

Add an Attendance Code

1. Click the Configure menu, Attendance. The Configure Attendance dialog
box will open.
2. Click the Add button. The General screen will become available for you to
add the new Attendance Code.

Figure 73: Add an Attendance Code

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Attendance Codes section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Attendance
screen.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Attendance window.
Edit an Attendance Code
1. Click the Configure menu, Attendance. The Configure Attendance dialog
box will open.
2. Highlight the Attendance code you wish to edit from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected code.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 64

Genesis SQL Manual

4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Attendance Codes section.

5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Attendance
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Attendance window.

Delete an Attendance Code

Attendance Codes that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Configure menu, Attendance. The Configure Attendance dialog
box will open.
2. Highlight the Attendance code you wish to delete from the list at the side of
the screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 74: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Attendance window.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 65

Genesis SQL Manual

Policies
Policies are used to store and apply the business or payroll rules governing overtime, holidays,
etc. It is possible to have more than one set of rules within an organization, so Genesis SQL
makes it possible to create many Policies. Each employee is assigned to the Policy that applies
for him or her.

Configure Policies
1. Click the Configure menu, Policies. The Configure Policies dialog box will
open.

Figure 75: Configure Policies

2. There are several tabs in the Configure Policies dialog box, each with its own
settings. The first tab, General tab defines general payroll policy parameters
and contains the following information:

Figure 76: Policies: General tab

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 66

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Code This field is required. Enter a code (up to 3
alphanumeric characters) to identify the policy.
Once saved, this code cannot be changed.
Name This field is required. Type the company policy
name, as it will appear in the system and on
reports. The policy name can be up to 30
characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
policy is currently in use. Clear this check box
if the policy is not being used at this time.
Pay Period Select the appropriate pay period information
for your company.
Weekly Check this option if wages are paid weekly.

Bi-weekly Check this option if wages are paid every other

week.
Semimonthly Check this option if wages are paid twice a
month.
Monthly Check this option if wages are paid once a
month.
Start Date Enter the starting date of the pay period (using
MM/DD/YYYY format). This is used for
calculations and represents the starting date of
an entire payroll period. The day of the week
(Sunday, Monday, etc.) that corresponds to the
starting date is used to determine when the
cycle begins.
NOTE: This date should be the first of a month
in the past that corresponds to the day of the
week that the pay period starts on.
Number of Days If the pay period is semimonthly, specify the
in semimonthly number of days in the first half of the policy’s
period semi-monthly period. Click the down arrow
next to the entry field to select a number from
1 to 28.
Process on Indicates how the employee’s time (for
lunches, breaks, time rounding, etc.) is
processed for this policy. The options are
Actual and Schedule. Typically you will choose
Schedule.
Actual: Time is processed under the shift rules
in effect when the employee actually punched
In.
Schedule: Time is processed under the rules
of the employee’s scheduled shift.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 67

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Auto close at pay Select this option to have over midnight hours
period end split between two pay periods.
(midnight)

Auto close at Select this option to have over midnight hours

overtime cycle end split between two overtime cycles.
(midnight)

Punch Defaults The settings in this section define how

punches are processed.
Ignore use of Enter the number of minutes (up to 59) during
duplicate which duplicate punches on the time clock are
function key ignored. When duplicate punches are made
punches within within this time frame, only the last punch is
used for calculations.
Ignore use of Enter the number of minutes (up to 59) in
opposing which opposing (i.e. sequential In/Out)
function key punches on the time clock are ignored. For
punches within example, if 3 minutes is entered here and an
employee accidentally punches Out instead of
In, the employee can enter the In punch within
3 minutes to correct the error and Genesis
SQL will ignore the Out punch entirely.
Missing Out Enter the number of hours (in HH.MM format)
punch limit that can pass after the In punch before the
system assumes the employee has forgotten
to punch out and flags the time and attendance
reports. For example, if 10.00 is entered in this
field, the system expects an Out punch to be
recorded no later than 10 hours after the shift’s
In punch. The default for this field is 18.00 or
18 hours.
Will default the Enter the time (in HH.MM format) to be
Work total to recorded when the employee is flagged with a
Missing Out Punch.
For example, assume an employee is
scheduled to work 8 hours and forgets to
punch Out. If 8.00 is entered in this field, the
system recognizes the missing Out punch yet
totals 8 hours for the employee. The default for
this field is 00.00 (indicating that no time will be
totaled for a Missing Out Punch).

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 68

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Maximum Out Enter the maximum time an employee who has
punch link back punched Out can punch back In and still have
to In punch the new time included in the previous total
when calculating daily overtime.
For example, assume that the Maximum Out
Punch Link-Back is defined as 2.00 and
overtime is paid after working 8 hours in a
single day. If an employee punches In at 8:00
A.M. and Out at 5:00 P.M. (with a one hour
unpaid lunch) then punches back In at 6:30
P.M. (within the 2-hour link-back) and Out
again at 9:30 P.M., the daily total shows 8
hours of regular time and 3 hours of overtime.
Do not link over Check this option if the out punch link back
day end should stop at the end of the day.

First Change Check this option if the first department and/or

Punch accrues job transfer after the In punch should be
to In punch retroactive to the In punch.

Stops After Enter the number of hours you want the above
rule to be effective.
Reset Swipe & This option allows you to accept either 12a, 1a,
Go 2a, 3a or 4a as a reset time.

3. The Holidays tab defines the rules for paying Holidays and contains the
following information:

Figure 77: Policies: Holidays tab

Setting Definition
Pay Holidays Check this option if you wish the program to
pay holidays. You will specify the dates of the
holidays in a separate dialog box. (See
Holidays, page 101.)
Holiday Eligibility These settings define the prerequisites for
being paid for the holiday.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 69

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Minimum days Enter the minimum number of days (up to 3
of employment digits) from the hire date for an employee to
to qualify qualify for non-worked holiday pay. The
default is 90 meaning 90 qualifying days are
required.
Required to Select an option to indicate which days the
work the employee must work to qualify for holiday pay.
scheduled day
Before and After. Employee must work the
scheduled day before and after the holiday to
receive holiday pay.
Before or After. Employee must work the
scheduled day before or after the holiday to
receive holiday pay.
None. There are no requirements for the
employee to qualify for holiday pay.
Minimum before Enter the number of hours that must be
worked on the day prior to the holiday in order
for that day to qualify as having been worked.
Minimum after Enter the number of hours that must be
worked on the day after the holiday in order
for that day to qualify as having been worked.
Holiday These settings define how the Holiday pay will
Parameters be allocated.

Apply Holiday Check this option if the holiday hours can be

when not given to an employee who is not scheduled to
scheduled to work on the holiday.
work

Apply the Check this option if you want overnight shift’s

Holiday on the holiday hours to apply the next day. This will
next day apply to ALL holidays entered into the
system.
Example: An employee’s punch is processed
on the out. And the holiday is July 4th. They
would come in on July 3rd at 11:00 and clock
out July 4th
Holiday hours Check this option if holiday hours and added
can accrue holiday time count toward overtime. For
toward overtime example, assume an employee works 44
hours during a week and one 8-hour holiday
occurs. If this option is checked, and overtime
is paid after 40 hours, the employee receives
40 hours regular pay and 12 hours overtime. If
this option is not checked, the employee
receives 48 hours regular pay and 4 hours
overtime.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 70

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Holiday hours Check this option if given holiday hours will
can not be never be overtime.
overtime

Apply Check this option if the employee should

differential receive differential for holiday pay not worked.
based on
scheduled start
time

Hours to add for Enter the number of hours (in HH.MM format)
each worked to be added to the employee’s time for each
holiday worked holiday. These hours are in addition to
actual time worked. For example, if 8.00 hours
are entered in this field, and an employee
works 8 holiday hours, 8 more hours are
added to the employee’s time. The default is
8.00.
Multiply Click this check box to multiply any worked
worked holiday holiday hours by a specified rate.
hours to apply
to HOL

Hours to add Enter the number of hours (in HH.MM format)

for each added to the employee’s time for each non-
unworked worked holiday. This entry is usually equal to
holiday the number of regular hours worked. The
default is 8.00.
Given Minimum Enter the minimum number of hours that an
employee is guaranteed to receive for holiday
pay, regardless of the number of hours
worked.
Given Maximum Enter the maximum number of hours that an
employee is guaranteed to receive for holiday
pay, regardless of the number of hours
worked.
Beginning pay Select a level to indicate the employee’s wage
rate if Holiday multiplier for a worked holiday.
is worked
Reg. Regular wages are paid for a worked
holiday.
OT1. The overtime rate specified in OT1 on
the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked
holiday.
OT2. The overtime rate specified in OT2 on
the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked
holiday.
OT3. The overtime rate specified in OT3 on
the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked
holiday.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 71

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Beginning pay Select a level to indicate the employee’s wage
rate if Holiday multiplier for a secondary worked holiday.
is worked
Reg. Regular wages are paid for a worked
(Secondary)
holiday.
OT1. The overtime rate specified in OT1 on
the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked
holiday.
OT2. The overtime rate specified in OT2 on
the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked
holiday.
OT3. The overtime rate specified in OT3 on
the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked
holiday.
Reset at end of Check this option to disable the holiday pay
day rate at midnight. Clear this check box to
continue using the holiday pay rate specified
until the employee punches Out.

4. The Overtime tab defines the rules for calculating overtime and contains the
following information:

Figure 78: Policies: Overtime tab

Setting Definition
Pay OT Check this option to pay overtime to
employees using this Policy.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 72

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Overtime Cycle This field is required. Enter the pay period that
you use to calculate overtime. For example, if
overtime is paid after 40 hours of work per
week, select the Weekly option.
This Overtime Cycle is independent of the Pay
Period specified in Policy Maintenance but
must not be greater than the policy pay
period. For example, if the policy Pay Period
is Biweekly, you may select an Overtime
Cycle of Weekly or Biweekly, but not
Semimonthly or Monthly since these cycles
are longer than the policy pay period.
Weekly. Overtime is calculated weekly.
Biweekly. Overtime is calculated every two
weeks.
Semimonthly. Overtime is calculated twice a
month.
Monthly. Overtime is calculated once a
month.
Overtime Definition These settings define when and how overtime
is calculated.
TIP: Begin by entering your first level of
overtime in OT1.If after 40 hours of work per
week, you pay time-and-a-half, enter 40.00 in
the Period Limit field and 1.5000 in the
Multiplier field.
If double-time is paid after 60 hours, enter
60.00 in the Period Limit field and 2.0000 in
the Multiplier field for OT2.
On Sundays and holidays, you may want to
pay double-time and one-half regardless of
hours worked. In this case, enter 99.99 in the
Period Limit field and 2.5000 in the Multiplier
field for OT3.
OT Level Up to three levels of overtime (OT1, OT2 and
OT3) may be defined per policy.
Period Limit Enter the number of hours (in HH.MM format)
that an employee must work to be eligible for
overtime. For example, in a weekly pay
period, the Period Limit is typically defined as
40.00; in a biweekly period, it is normally
defined as 80.00.
Multiplier Enter the multiplication factor used to compute
overtime pay. The normal pay rate is
multiplied by this number. For example, to pay
time-and-a-half, enter 1.50; to pay double-
time, enter 2.00.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 73

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Daily Overtime These settings allow paying daily overtime.
For example, many companies pay daily
overtime over eight hours per day. Another
example is paying double overtime on
Sundays, regardless of how many hours are
worked in the overtime cycle.
Day of the Week Select the day(s) of the week that are paid
daily overtime by checking the appropriate
checkbox.
Start at OT Level Select the applicable overtime level to be paid
(if any) at the start of the day. Choose
Regular if no overtime is paid (regular
wages), or OT1, OT2 or OT3 to pay the
overtime wages defined above.
Daily Qualifier Under OT1, OT2 and OT3, enter the number
of daily hours (in HH.MM format) that must be
worked before that overtime level will be
acknowledged by the system. For example, if
Sunday hours start at OT1, and OT2 begins
after 8 hours, enter 8.00 in Sunday’s OT2
Daily Qualifier. Only overtime levels above the
entry in Start at OT Level are available.
Reset at Day End Check this box to force any overtime hours
that roll into the next day (after midnight) to be
processed using the next day’s rules. Clear
the check box to process hours accumulated
past midnight using the OT rate from the
previous day.
Consecutive Days Check this box if overtime is paid
automatically after working a certain number
of consecutive days.
NOTE: Additional options appear when this
box is checked.
Num of Days Enter the number of consecutive days that
must be worked before overtime starts.
Minimum Daily Enter the minimum number of daily hours that
must be worked on each consecutive days to
qualify for overtime.
Hours Total Enter the minimum number of total hours that
must be worked for all of the consecutive days
to qualify for overtime.
OT Level Select the overtime level that applies when
the consecutive days criteria is met.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 74

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
On Days that Check this box to pay a second Overtime
Qualify Level if an employee works more than the
specified amount in the After field. Genesis
SQL will apply the settings in the After and
Overtime Level fields once the employee
qualifies for consecutive day overtime.
After (hrs) Enter the number of hours after which the
second OT level will apply on days qualifying
for consecutive day overtime.
For example, if the employee gets OT1 for the
first eight hours, and OT2 after eight hours
worked on the seventh consecutive day, you
would enter 8 in this field, and OT2 in the next
field.
OT Level Select the second OT level Genesis SQL will
pay when an employee meets the qualification
for the After field under "On days that qualify".
This setting works in conjunction with the
After column and indicates what overtime
level will be paid when the number of hours in
the After field has been met.
Reset Overtime at If checked, this option tells Genesis SQL to
Cycle End reset the Consecutive Days count after the
Overtime Cycle ends. This is used for Pay
Periods with more days than the Overtime
Cycle.
Force OT by Time of These settings allow you to force OT to be
Day calculated for hours worked during specific
times of day, regardless of the total number
hours worked.
Time worked Check this option to cause any hours outside
outside defined of the employee's scheduled work hours to be
shifts to OT level paid at the specified overtime level.
XX
A drop-down box from which to choose the
desired OT level will become available. Select
the OT level for time worked outside the
employee's schedule.
This option is only available if process on
schedule is chosen on the General tab of the
Configure Policy dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 75

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
In punches Check this option to cause any hours between
between XX and the specified times to be paid at the specified
XX to OT level overtime level.
REG
A drop-down box from which to choose the
desired OT level will become available. Select
the OT level for OT paid during these hours.
You must also choose whether All Hours or
Hours Between are eligible for the OT
If All Hours is selected, all the hours for the
shift whose In punch falls in the range
specified above will be paid at the specified
OT level. If Hours Between is selected, only
the hours that fall in the specified range will be
paid at OT.

5. The Service tab defines In and Out on Service parameters and contains the
following information:

Figure 79: Policies: Service tab

Setting Definition
Pay in and out on Check this box to enable In and Out on
service service.

In on Service In On Service gives the employee a minimum

number of hours regardless of how long the
employee works. For example, an employee
who is on call might get paid for 2 hours of
time for coming in for an emergency, even
though he/she only worked for 15 minutes.
Minimum Hours Enter the minimum number of hours (HH.MM)
the employee is paid to come in on service.
The default is 0.00.
Accrue given Check this box if the in on service hours
hours to OT (Minimum Hours) count toward overtime.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 76

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Level If Accrue Given Hrs to OT is selected,
choose the level of overtime to be paid while
in on service.
Change Work Choose the category to be assigned to the In
hours to On Service hours.

Out on Service Out On Service allows the program to pay an

additional number of hours for company
business accomplished after the employee
clocks out. For example, an employee might
clock out for the day and then travel to a client
location. The employee would be paid for the
time traveling as Out on Service.
Minimum Hours Enter the number of hours (HH.MM) added to
the employee’s time to go out on service. The
default is 0.00 or no hours added.
Accrue given Check this box if the out on service hours
hours to OT above (Add Hours) count toward overtime.

Level If Accrue Given Hrs to OT is selected,

choose the level of overtime to be paid for out
on service.

6. The Per Diem tab defines daily hour and/or pay adjustments and contains
the following information:

Figure 80: Policies: Per Diem tab

Setting Definition
Use per diem Check this option to grant the employee per
diem benefits. These benefits can be
additional paid hours or additional monetary
amounts. You may give up to two per diems
per day.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 77

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Day of week Check the box for each day on which you wish
to pay a Per Diem. The per diem will be paid
after the employee has worked the hours
indicated in the After box.
Leave the check box empty if you do not wish
to pay a per diem on that day.
After Enter the number of hours the employee must
work in order to qualify for the per diem. You
may leave it set to 0 to cause the per diem to
be paid regardless of how many hours the
employee works. The maximum value for this
field is 23:59.
NOTE: There are two settings for each day of
the week.
Pay This setting can be hours or money,
depending upon the category chosen. If
choosing a time category, enter the number of
hours. If choosing a dollar category, enter the
dollar amount to be given.
NOTE: There are two settings for each day of
the week.
Category Select the category for the per diem.

Accrue Check this box to have the hours accrue

towards overtime. This option only applies if
the category selected is a paid time category.
Apply at Holiday Check this box if per diem being paid on a
work rate when Holiday should follow Holiday work rate.
daily per diem
occurs on a holiday

Overtime Cycle Check this box to have an extra hourly or

monetary amount granted to an employee for
certain hours worked in an overtime cycle.
This could be used to pay a productivity bonus
for people who work lots of hours.
NOTE: This is separate from overtime.
After Enter the number of hours the employee must
work in the overtime cycle or pay period in
order to qualify for the per diem.
Pay Enter the number of hours to be paid for the
per diem.
Category Select the category for the per diem.

OT Level Select the OT level at which the hours for the

per diem should be given.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 78

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Pay Period Check this box to have an extra hourly or
monetary amount granted to employee for
certain hours worked in a pay period. This
could be used to pay a productivity bonus for
people who work lots of hours.
NOTE: This is separate from and in addition to
overtime.
After Enter the number of hours the employee must
work in the overtime cycle or pay period in
order to qualify for the per diem.
Pay Enter the number of hours to be paid for the
per diem.
Category Select the category for the per diem.

OT Level Select the OT level at which the hours for the

per diem should be given.

7. The Differential tab defines the codes and rates for up to nine levels of Shift
Differentials. A Shift Differential is a premium amount or factor paid in
addition to the employee's regular wage for certain hours worked during the
day. Shift Differentials work in conjunction with Shifts. The Differential tab
contains the following information:

Figure 81: Policies: Differential tab

Setting Definition
Use Differential Check this option to enable the shift
differentials.
Differential There are nine differential codes available.

Type Select the type of differential.

Addition. Select this option to add a specific
dollar amount to the employee’s regular wage.
Multiplier. Select this option to multiply the
employee’s regular wage by a multiplication
factor.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 79

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Amount Enter the amount of the differential. If the type
is Addition, enter the amount in dollars and
cents that should be paid above the
employee's regular wage for differential hours
(i.e. .30 for 30 cents per hour). If the type is
Multiplier, enter the percentage or factor to
multiply the employee's regular wage for
differential hours (i.e. 1.5 for time and a half).
You must work at Enter the minimum amount of hours an
least… employee must work before the differential is
activated.
Differential fixed to Check this option to pay an employee a
In differential premium only when he/she
punches In within the time frame(s) specified
in Shift Maintenance. Clear this check box to
pay an employee a differential premium if any
part of the hours falls within the time frame(s)
in Shift Maintenance.

8. The Exceptions tab defines rules for flagging hours worked exceptions and
contains the following information:

Figure 82: Policies: Exceptions tab

Setting Definition
Report Exceptions Check this box for Genesis SQL to report
employees that work above or below the
specified parameters.
Consecutive hours Enter the number of consecutive hours
worked worked (HH.MM) that, if exceeded by an
employee, will be reported on the
Consecutive Hours Exception report. For
example, if 14.00 is entered, employees
working over 14 consecutive hours are
flagged for the report.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 80

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Overtime hours Enter the number of overtime hours (HH.MM)
worked that, if exceeded by an employee, will be
reported on the Overtime Hours Exception
report. For example, if 20.00 is entered, any
employees working over 20 hours of overtime
are flagged for the report.
Daily hours worked An employee who works under or over this
number of hours (HH.MM) per day is reported
on the Daily Hours Exception report. For
example, if 6.00 is entered in the Under or
Over fields, an employee working under or
over 12 hours a day is flagged for the report.
Period hours An employee who works under or over this
worked number of hours (HH.MM) per day is reported
on the Period Hours Exception report. For
example, if 30.00 is entered in the Under or
Over fields, an employee working under or
over 60.00 hours in a pay period is flagged
for the report.

Add a Policy
1. Click the Configure menu, Policies. The Configure Policies dialog box will
open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Policy. The Default Policy Add dialog box
will become available.

Figure 83: Adding a new Policy

3. Enter a unique code for this policy.

4. Enter a unique name for this policy.
5. Click Yes to copy the existing policy, or click No to start from scratch.
6. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Policies section.
7. Click OK to commit the changes and close the General dialog box.
8. Click Close to exit the Configure Policies dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 81

Genesis SQL Manual

Edit a Policy
1. Click the Configure menu, Policies. The Configure Policies dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Policy you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Policy.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Policies section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Policies screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Policies dialog box.

Delete a Policy
1. Click the Configure menu, Policy. The Configure Policies dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Policy you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 84: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Policies dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 82

Genesis SQL Manual

Rounding
Rounding is used to round punches backwards or forwards according specific rules. Rounding
codes can also be used to round the total duration of a work period. Genesis SQL can round In,
Out, Lunch and Break punches, and can have different rules for each. The rounding rules defined
in this dialog box will be tied to Shifts in a separate dialog box.
As part of the Rounding configuration, you will specify which kind of transaction the rounding
applies to: In/Out, Lunch or Break. Several Rounding Rules are built in to Genesis SQL:
• Break 15 Minutes
• Break Minute to Minute
• In/Out Minute to Minute
• In/Out Shift Duration
• In/Out Standard Rounding
• Lunch 30 Minutes
• Lunch 60 Minutes
• Lunch Minute to Minute

Configure Rounding Rules

1. Click the Configure menu, Rounding. The Configure Rounding dialog box
will open.

Figure 85: Rounding

2. The Configure Rounding dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Code This field is required. Enter a unique rounding
code up to 5 characters in length. Once
saved, this code cannot be changed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 83

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Name This field is required. Type the time rounding
code name as you want it to appear in the
system and on reports. The rounding code
name can be up to 30 characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate an
active rounding code. Clear this check box if
the code is inactive. Rather than deleting a
rounding code from the system, simply mark it
inactive in the event you wish to use it again
at a later date.
Type Select the type of transaction to be rounded.
Available selections are In/Out (In or Out
punch), Lunch and Break.
Scheduled Start These settings define the rounding rules for
the period's start time. Depending upon the
type of transaction selected, this may be the
In, Start Lunch or Start Break punch.
From Identifies the number of minutes that are
rounded before the scheduled start time.
Scheduled time is considered 0.
A negative number is the number of minutes
before the period’s start time.
A positive number is the number of minutes
after the period’s start time.
To Identifies the number of minutes that are
rounded before the scheduled start time.
Scheduled time is considered 0.
A negative number is the number of minutes
before the period’s start time.
A positive number is the number of minutes
after the period’s start time.
Go to Indicates the rounding time (in minutes from
the scheduled time) for punches that occur
between the From and To entries. Enter 999
to use the settings in the Outside Round or
Go To = 999 box. Enter 0 to round the time to
the scheduled start time.
Code Select an attendance code to be applied to
the time transaction. (The attendance codes
were predefined in the Attendance, page 63,
dialog box.)
Scheduled Stop These settings define the rounding rules for
the period's end time. Depending upon the
type of transaction selected, this may be the
Out, End Lunch or End Break punch.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 84

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
From Identifies the number of minutes that are
rounded before the scheduled stop time.
Scheduled time is considered 0.
A negative number is the number of minutes
before the period’s stop time.
A positive number is the number of minutes
after the period’s stop time.
To Identifies the number of minutes that are
rounded before the scheduled stop time.
Scheduled time is considered 0.
A negative number is the number of minutes
before the period’s stop time.
A positive number is the number of minutes
after the period’s stop time.
Go to Indicates the rounding time (in minutes from
the scheduled time) for punches that occur
between the From and To entries. Enter 999
to use the settings in the Outside Round or
Go To = 999 box. Enter 0 to round the time to
the scheduled stop time.
Code Select an attendance code to be applied to
the time transaction. (The attendance codes
were predefined in the Attendance, page 63,
dialog box.)
Scheduled Duration These settings define rounding rules to round
Stop the duration of the work period (as opposed to
the start or end time.)
From Identifies the number of minutes that are
rounded before the scheduled duration time.
The end of the duration is considered to be 0.
A negative number is the number of minutes
before the period’s duration time.
A positive number is the number of minutes
after the period’s duration time.
To Identifies the number of minutes that are
rounded before the scheduled duration time.
The end of the duration is considered to be 0.
A negative number is the number of minutes
before the period’s duration time.
A positive number is the number of minutes
after the period’s duration time.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 85

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Go to Indicates the rounding time (in minutes from
the scheduled time) for punches that occur
between the From and To entries. Enter 999
to use the settings in the Outside Round or
Go To = 999 box. Enter 0 to round the time to
the scheduled duration time
Code Select an attendance code to be applied to
the time transaction. (The attendance codes
were predefined in the Attendance, page 63,
dialog box.)
Outside Round or Since it is impractical to enter all instances of
Go to -999 and 999 time rounding in the Scheduled Start,
Scheduled Stop and Scheduled Duration
boxes, the Outside Round (2) boxes are for
additional rounding rules not covered in the
ranges above. Each rounding category (Start,
Stop and Duration) has its own set of outside
rounding parameters. In addition, if -999 or
999 is entered in the Go to field, the rounding
rules in this box apply.
Start These settings refer to In, Start Lunch or Start
Break punches.
Every XX mins Rounding may be minute to minute (0) or in
set increments of 3, 6, 15, 30 or 60 minutes.
Click the arrow to display valid entries then
select the increment desired. For example,
entering 15 in this field means that for
punches occurring outside the Scheduled
Start time, round to the nearest 15 minutes
using the Round Back and Round Forward
rules specified below.
Round back This range indicates the period of time (in
minutes) during which the clock rounds back
to the last increment. You need only enter the
last minute of this range. The first minute is
always 0.
Round forward This range indicates the period of time (in
minutes) during which the clock rounds
forward to the next increment. These fields
are automatically calculated by the system
based on the rounding increment specified in
the round back field.
Stop These settings refer to Out, End Lunch or End
Break punches.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 86

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Every XX mins Rounding may be minute to minute (0) or in
set increments of 3, 6, 15, 30 or 60 minutes.
Click the arrow to display valid entries then
select the increment desired. For example,
entering 15 in this field means that for
punches occurring outside the Scheduled
Start time, round to the nearest 15 minutes
using the Round Back and Round Forward
rules specified below.
Round back This range indicates the period of time (in
minutes) during which the clock rounds back
to the last increment. You need only enter the
last minute of this range. The first minute is
always 0.
Round forward This range indicates the period of time (in
minutes) during which the clock rounds
forward to the next increment. These fields
are automatically calculated by the system
based on the rounding increment specified in
the round back field.
Duration These settings refer to work period durations.

Every XX mins Rounding may be minute to minute (0) or in

set increments of 3, 6, 15, 30 or 60 minutes.
Click the arrow to display valid entries then
select the increment desired. For example,
entering 15 in this field means that for
punches occurring outside the Scheduled
Start time, round to the nearest 15 minutes
using the Round Back and Round Forward
rules specified below.
Round back This range indicates the period of time (in
minutes) during which the clock rounds back
to the last increment. You need only enter the
last minute of this range. The first minute is
always 0.
Round forward This range indicates the period of time (in
minutes) during which the clock rounds
forward to the next increment. These fields
are automatically calculated by the system
based on the rounding increment specified in
the round back field.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 87

Genesis SQL Manual

Add a Rounding Rule

1. Click the Configure menu, Rounding. The Configure Rounding dialog box
will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Rounding rule. The General tab will
become available.

Figure 86: Adding a new Rounding rule

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Rounding section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Rounding dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Rounding dialog box.

Edit a Rounding Rule

1. Click the Configure menu, Rounding. The Configure Rounding dialog box
will open.
2. Highlight the Rounding rule you wish to edit from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Rounding Rule.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Rounding section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Rounding
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Rounding dialog box.

Delete a Rounding Rule

1. Click the Configure menu, Rounding. The Configure Rounding dialog box
will open.
2. Highlight the Rounding rule you wish to delete from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 88

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 87: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Rounding dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 89

Genesis SQL Manual

Shifts
Shifts define the work schedule for your employees. Shifts are created in Shift Groups, which
can include multiple Shifts. For example, you may have a Shift Group for the Day-Shift workers,
in which unique Shifts may start at 7am, 8am, and 9am. Rounding rules are applied to the Shift
Group to determine employee tardiness and rounding.
An employee assigned to a Shift Group can be assigned to any of the individual shifts within it.
The employee may also "float" between Shifts, which causes Genesis SQL to determine
tardiness and rounding according to the Shift the employee punched in closest to. For example,
an employee that clocks in at 7:45am would be considered to be on the 8am Shift that day,
simply because he/she clocked in closer to 8am than to 7am. The parameters for this "cut off" are
defined as part of the Shift.
You will first create the Shift Group (Days, Swing, Graveyard, etc.) and then will create the unique
Shifts within it.

Configure a Shift Group

A Shift Group is made up of individual Shifts that are unique but are related in some way. For
example, the Day Shift Group has Shifts that all take place during daylight hours, but has
unique starting & stopping times (7am-4pm, 8am-5pm, 9am-6pm, etc.)

1. Click the Configure menu, Shifts. The Configure Shifts dialog box will open.
The Configure Shifts dialog box contains three tabs, which are described
below.

Figure 88: Shifts

2. The Shift Groups tab defines the settings that apply to the Shift Group as a
whole and contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 90

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 89:Shifts: Shift Groups tab

Setting Definition
Code This field is required. Enter a unique shift
code up to 3 characters in length. Once
saved, this code cannot be changed.
Name This field is required. Type the shift group
name, as you want it to appear in the system
and on reports. The shift group name can be
up to 30 characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate an
active shift group. Clear this check box if the
group is inactive. Rather than deleting a shift
group from the system, simply mark it inactive
in the event you wish to use it again at a later
date.
Flex/Open Click the Flex/Open check box if the shift
group consists of flexible shifts. A flexible shift
does not have a designated start and stop
time. It only specifies the number of hours
that an employee must work to complete the
shift.
When Flex/Open is selected, you cannot set
the start and stop times for any individual shift
created in this group. You can only specify
the total duration of the shift. Also, the
Forecasted hours for floaters is
unavailable.
Forecasted hours Enter the number of hours that a floating
for floaters employee must work within a pay period. This
allows the system to forecast a number of
hours for floating employees when doing
forecast reporting. Unlike an employee
assigned to a fixed shift, a floating employee
may work varied shifts as long as he/she
works the total number of hours required for
the pay period.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 91

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Shift Details Displays the individual shifts that comprise
the shift group. Each row in the box is an
individual shift. If the Shift Details box is
blank, no individual shifts have been created
for this group.
Add/Edit/Delete These buttons allow you to maintain the
buttons Shifts within this Shift Group.

Rounding These settings determine which Rounding

Rules will apply to all the Shifts within this
Shift Group.
In/Out Click the arrow to select time rounding rules
for In and Out punches used by the shift
group.
NOTE: These rules apply to the entire group
and not to the individual shifts.
Lunch Click the arrow to select time rounding rules
for Lunch punches used by the shift group.
NOTE: These rules apply to the entire group
and not to the individual shifts.
Break Click the arrow to select time rounding rules
for Break punches used by the shift group.
NOTE: These rules apply to the entire group
and not to the individual shifts.

3. The Details tab is only available when you are adding or editing a Shift (as
opposed to the Shift Group). It defines the settings for a selected Shift within
the Shift Group, and contains the following information:

Figure 90:Shifts: Shift Details tab

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 92

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Graphic Use the graphic timeline to define the
individual start and stop time of a shift.
Shift Number Enter a unique number (up to 3 digits) to
identify the individual shift.
Start Type the individual shift’s starting time in
HH:MM. Times must be entered in military
format.
Cutoff Type the individual shift’s latest starting time
(cutoff) in HH:MM, before the individual would
“float” into the next schedule. Times must be
entered in military format. Cutoff times may
overlap with other start times in the same shift
group.
Stop Type the individual shift’s ending time in
HH:MM. Times must be entered in military
format.
Process On If the shift’s stop time rolls over to a new day,
do you want to process the hours on the day
the employee punched In or punched Out?
Select the In or Out option by clicking the
desired field.
Gross This field automatically displays the total
duration of the shift from clock in to clock out.
Lunch/Breaks This field automatically displays the total
number duration of lunches and breaks
(combined).
Totals This field automatically displays the total paid
hours for the day. It takes into account
whether or not breaks and lunches are paid.
Lunches These settings define how lunches are treated
during this shift.
Punched Check this box to indicate that employees
should clock out for and in from lunch.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 93

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Window Select this option if the shift’s lunch period
must be taken within a specified window of
time.
For example, an employee’s lunch period is
from 12:00 P.M. to 1:00 P.M. If the Punched
check box is not selected, this period is
deducted automatically (if lunch is unpaid). If
the Punched check box is selected, the
employee must punch Out for and In from
lunch within this time period. If the employee
punches Out at 11:30 A.M. and punches In at
12:30 P.M., 1½ hours is counted as lunch. If
the employee punches Out at 12:30 P.M. and
punches In at 1:00 P.M., one hour is counted
as lunch even though only ½ hour was taken.
Define the time frame in the Window Deduct
box below.
Elapsed Select this option if the shift’s lunch period is
automatically deducted after a number of
elapsed hours. If the Punched check box is
also selected, the punched time overrides the
elapsed time. In other words, if the employee
does not punch Out for and In from lunch, the
shift’s lunch period is automatically deducted
after the elapsed time. Define the elapsed
time in the Elapsed Deduct box below.
None If no restrictions apply to the shifts lunch
period, select this option. Typically, if the
employee has a paid lunch, clear the
Punched check box and select None. This
prohibits the employee’s lunch period from
being deducted from the shift’s total hours.
SG Max If Swipe and Go is in use, this tells Genesis
SQL what the maximum amount of time a
lunch or break can be. Enter time in military
format. Genesis SQL will then take all the
punches and measure the duration between
transactions. If the duration is longer than the
SG Max, it will move to the next option.
Breaks These settings define how breaks are treated
during this shift.
Punched Check this box to indicate that employees
should clock to and from break.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 94

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Window Select this option if the shift’s break must be
taken within a specified window of time.
For example, an employee’s break is from
10:00 A.M. to 10:30 A.M. If the Punched check
box is not selected, this period is deducted
automatically (if the break is unpaid). If the
Punched check box is selected, the employee
must punch Out for and In from break within
this time period. If the employee punches Out
at 9:45 A.M. and punches In at 10:15 A.M., 45
minutes is counted as break. If the employee
punches Out at 10:15 A.M. and punches In at
10:30 A.M., ½ hour is counted as break even
though only 15 minutes was taken.
Define the time frame in the Window Deduct
box below.
Elapsed Select this option if the shift’s break period is
automatically deducted after a number of
elapsed hours. If the Punched check box is
also selected, the punched time overrides the
elapsed time. In other words, if the employee
does not punch Out for and In from break, the
shift’s break period is automatically deducted
after the elapsed time. Define the elapsed
time in the Elapsed Deduct box below.
None If no restrictions apply to the shift’s break,
select this option. Typically, if the employee
has a paid break, clear the Punched check
box and select None. This prohibits the
employee’s break from being deducted from
the shift’s total hours.
SG Max If Swipe and Go is in use, this tells Genesis
SQL what the maximum amount of time a
lunch or break can be. Enter time in military
format. Genesis SQL will then take all the
punches and measure the duration between
transactions. If the duration is longer than the
SG Max, it will move to the next option.
Exceptions Enter the time frames for exception
transactions in this box. These are the time
frames in which employees are not supposed
to be punching. If a punch falls within these
time frames, it is reported on the Punch
Interval Exceptions report and to the Approval
Editor as an exception or violation that needs
supervisor approval.
Start Type the starting time of the exception in
HH:MM. Time must be entered in military
format.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 95

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Stop Type the ending time of the exception in
HH:MM. Time must be entered in military
format.
Punch Type Select In or Out to indicate that the exception
applies to an In or Out punch.
Type Click the down arrow to the right of the Type
field and select the type of period (Lunch,
Break or None) to be defined in this row. For
example, to define a windowed lunch period,
select Lunch as the Type.
Paid For windowed lunches or breaks, if the lunch
or break is paid, select the Paid check box.
Otherwise, clear this box to indicate an unpaid
lunch or break.
Window Deduct These settings define the parameters for
Window Lunches and Breaks. If Window is
selected in either the Lunch or Breaks
sections, you must configure this section.
Select the type of entry you are defining
(Lunch or Break) and enter the times for the
Out and In punches.
Out/In Enter the starting and ending times of the
lunch period or break in the Out and In fields.
Time must be entered in HH:MM in military
format.
Elapsed Deduct These settings define the parameters for
Elapsed Lunches and Breaks. If Elapsed is
selected in either the Lunch or Breaks
sections, you must configure this section.
Elapsed Enter the number of hours that need to elapse
before a Lunch or Break is automatically
deducted. For example, if three hours must
elapse, enter 03:00 in this field.
From Click the button to the left of the From field
and select whether the elapsed time starts
from the Actual In Punch or Shift Start
Time. The word Punch or Shift displays in this
field to indicate your selection.
Deduct Enter the time to be automatically deducted
for the Lunch or Break. For example, to
deduct one hour, enter 01:00.
Punched These settings define how long the employee
is allowed for lunch, and how payment should
be handled if the employee takes more time
than is allowed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 96

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Duration If the employee punches Out for and In from
lunches or breaks, enter the duration of the
lunch or break in this field. For example, to
specify a one-hour lunch period, enter 01:00.
Pay Outside If the employee punches Out for and In from
lunch, select the Pay Outside check box to
authorize payment for any time taken outside
the specified window of time.

4. The Differential tab defines a Shift Differential for this Shift Group (not for the
individual Shift) and contains the following information:

Figure 91:Shifts: Differential tab

Setting Definition
Differential List Displays the Start, Stop, and daily status of an
existing differential.
From Select the starting time for the pay differential.

To Select the ending time for the pay differential.

Day of the Week Select the differential premium code (D1-D9)

assigned to the shift each day of the week.
For example, a 10:00 P.M. to 6:00 A.M. shift
may receive a $5.00 per hour premium on
weekends, but only $2.50 per hour premium
Monday through Friday. If no differential
premium code applies to a particular day,
select "No Differential".

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 97

Genesis SQL Manual

Add a Shift Group

1. Click the Configure menu, Shift. The Configure Shift dialog box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Shift Group. The Groups tab will become
available.

Figure 92: Adding a new Shift Group

3. Fill in the Code, Name, Flex/Open, Forecasted hours for Floaters and select
the Rounding as describe in the Configure Shift Group section.
4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Configure Shift Group dialog
box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Shift Group dialog box.
NOTE: See Add A Shift to enter the specific shifts within this shift group.

Edit a Shift Group

1. Click the Configure menu, Shift. The Configure Shift Group dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Shift Group you wish to edit from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The Groups screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Shift Group.
4. Edit the Name, Flex/Open, Forecasted hours for Floaters and select the
Rounding as describe in the Configure Shift Group section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Shift Group
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Shift Group dialog box.
NOTE: See Edit a Shift to edit shift within this shift group.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 98

Genesis SQL Manual

Delete a Shift Group

1. Click the Configure menu, Shift. The Configure Shift Group dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Shift Group you wish to delete from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 93: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Shift Group dialog box.

Add a Shift
1. Click the Configure menu, Shift. The Configure Shift dialog box will open.
2. Click the Add button next to the Shift Details window to add a new Shift. The
Details tab will become available.
3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Shift section.
4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Shift dialog box.
5. Click on the Differential tab to add a shift differential.
6. Click the Add button.
7. Enter the From and To in HH:MM.
8. Select the Day and Differential number that will apply to this shift.
9. Click Close to exit the Configure Shift dialog box.

Edit a Shift
1. Click the Configure menu, Shift. The Configure Shift dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Shift you wish to edit from the list in the center of the Groups
screen.
3. Click the Edit button next to the Shift Details window. The Details screen will
become available for you to edit the selected Shift.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Shift section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Shift screen.
6. Click on the Differential tab to edit a shift differential.
7. Click the Edit button.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 99

Genesis SQL Manual

8. Edit the From, To, Day and Differential number.

9. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Shift Differential dialog box.
10. Click Close to exit the Configure Shift dialog box.

Delete a Shift
1. Click the Configure menu, Shift. The Configure Shift dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Shift you wish to from the list in the Center of the Groups
screen.
3. Click the Delete button next to the Shift Details window. You will be
prompted:

Figure 94: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Shift dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 100

Genesis SQL Manual

Holidays
The Holiday feature specifies which dates are considered company holidays. (How employees
are paid for the holidays is defined within Policies section.) Holidays must be defined in order to
post employee time toward a paid holiday rather than time worked, as well as to generate time
and attendance reports that reflect holidays.
It is necessary to define the holidays each year, as certain holidays fall on or are observed on
different dates each year.
Holiday Tips:
• It is not necessary to define all annual holidays: only enter those holidays that your
company recognizes.
• If a holiday falls on a Sunday, but your employees get Monday off, enter the holiday
using Monday’s date.
• If a holiday falls on a weekend, and your employees do not receive holiday hours for
that day, then don’t enter the holiday in the system.
• If your employees get two consecutive days off for a holiday, you must enter both
dates. For example, if Tuesday is the holiday and you wish to give both Monday and
Tuesday off with pay; enter the date for both days.
NOTE: No more than two consecutive holidays may be entered if employees must work the day
before and the day after the holiday.

Configure Holidays
1. Click the Configure menu, Holidays. The Configure Holidays window will
open.

Figure 95: Configure Holidays

2. The Configure Holidays dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Date Enter the date on which the holiday will be
observed. This is the date on which the Holiday
Policies (set in Policies) will apply.
Name Enter the name of the holiday.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 101

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Active Check the Active box to indicate that this
holiday will be observed.
Override Absent Check this box if paid time for this Holiday
Allowed should supersede a system-generated absence.

Apply Work Time Check this box if the holiday is paid at the
on this Holiday to secondary rate.
(Secondary) OT
Level

Holiday Groups Click the Include box for each group the Holiday
will be observed.

Add a Holiday
1. Click the Configure menu, Holiday. The Configure Holiday dialog box will
open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Holiday. The General tab will become
available.

Figure 96: Adding a new Holiday

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Holidays section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Holiday dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Holiday dialog box.

Edit a Holiday
1. Click the Configure menu, Holidays. The Configure Holidays dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Holiday you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Holiday.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Holiday section.
NOTE: The date cannot be modified.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Holiday screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Holiday dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 102

Genesis SQL Manual

Delete a Holiday
1. Click the Configure menu, Holidays. The Configure Holidays dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Holiday you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 97: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Holidays dialog box.

Holidays Groups
The Holidays Groups feature specifies which holidays are assigned to specific groups of
employees. Holidays Groups must be defined in order to post different holidays to specific
groups of employees. Some examples of holidays groups are:
• Executive
• Full-Time
• Union
Employees are assigned to a holiday group in the Employee Maintenance dialog box.

Configure Holiday Groups

1. Click the Configure menu, Holidays Groups. The Configure Holidays
Groups window will open.

Figure 98: Configure Holidays Groups

2. The Configure Holidays Groups dialog box contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 103

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a unique code (up
to two characters) to identify the holiday group.
Once saved, this code cannot be changed.
Name This is a required field. Enter the name of the
holiday group as you want it to appear in the
system. The holiday group name can be up to
30 characters long.
Active Check the Active box to indicate that this
holiday group will be observed.
Holiday Click the Include box for each Holiday the
Group will observe.

Add a Holiday Group

1. Click the Configure menu, Holidays Groups. The Configure Holidays
Groups dialog box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Holidays Groups. The General tab will
become available.

Figure 99: Adding a new Holidays Groups

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Holidays Groups section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Holidays Groups dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Holidays Groups dialog box.

Edit a Holiday
1. Click the Configure menu, Holidays Groups. The Configure Holidays
Groups dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Holidays Groups you wish to edit from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Holidays Groups.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Holidays Groups section.
NOTE: The code cannot be modified.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 104

Genesis SQL Manual

5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Holidays Groups
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Holidays Groups dialog box.
Delete a Holidays Groups
1. Click the Configure menu, Holidays Groups. The Configure Holidays
Groups dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Holidays Groups you wish to delete from the list at the side of
the screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 100: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Holidays Groups dialog box.

Groups
User-defined groups are optional but very useful. Groups are used to organize and sort
employees throughout Genesis SQL. They may be used to sort employees when generating
reports, and are also used with Security to control which employees managers are allowed to
edit. Some examples of employee groups are:
• Managers
• Union Employees
• Part-time Employees
Employees are assigned to a group in the Employee Maintenance dialog box.

Configure Groups
1. Click the Configure menu, Groups. The Configure Groups window will
open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 105

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 101: Configure Groups

2. The Configure Groups dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a unique code
(up to 10 characters) to identify the employee
group. Once saved, this code cannot be
changed.
Name This is a required field. Enter the group name,
as you want it to appear in the system and on
reports. The group name can be up to 30
characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
employee group is currently in use. Clear this
check box if the group is not being used at this
time.

Add a Group
1. Click the Configure menu, Groups. The Configure Groups dialog box will
open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Group. The General tab will become
available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 106

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 102: Adding a new Group

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Groups section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Group dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Groups dialog box.

Edit a Group
1. Click the Configure menu, Groups. The Configure Groups dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Group you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Group.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Groups section.
NOTE: The Group Code cannot be changed.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Groups screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Groups dialog box.

Delete a Group
1. Click the Configure menu, Groups. The Configure Groups dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Group you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 103: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 107

Genesis SQL Manual

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Groups dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 108

Genesis SQL Manual

Job Costing
Job Costing is used to track employee time and labor costs by department, job step, operation or
task both in terms of hours and money. Five levels of job costing are available: by default these
are called Department, Job, Step, Operation and Task. Departments are divided into Jobs, Jobs
are divided into Steps, Steps are divided into Operations, and Operations are further divided into
Tasks. You may use one or all of these levels, depending upon your needs. Each item can be
assigned an hourly wage and/or a piece rate, enabling accurate job cost reporting.
Departments, Jobs, Steps, Operations, and Tasks indicate the projects or tasks employees work
on, and are used to track where employees spend their time. Employees can track their time by
clocking into and/or transferring to a different Job Costing level. Wages and piece rates can be
associated with the department, job, step, operation or task and the employee, enabling accurate
job costing. Hours and wage budgets can be set for each level, enabling accurate budget vs.
actual reporting.
NOTE: Step, Operation and Task are a part of a separate and optional module.
The concepts and mechanisms are the same for Departments, Jobs, Steps, Operations, and
Tasks. The levels are optional and only available when the Department, Job, Step, Operation,
and Task Use Flags are checked on the Configure tab of the Main Company dialog box. Also, if
you changed the name used to refer to Departments, Jobs, Steps, Operations or Tasks (on the
Defaults tab of the Main Company dialog box), that name will be used in lieu of “Department”,
"Job", "Step", "Operation" or “Task”.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 109

Genesis SQL Manual

Departments
Departments are the top level in Job Costing. Departments indicate the business unit or
section of the company that employees work for, and are used to track where employees
spend their time. Departments serve many purposes in Genesis SQL. Employees can
track their time to a department by clocking into and/or transferring to the department.
Wages and piece rates can be associated with the department and employee, enabling
accurate department costing. Hours and wage budgets can be set for the department,
enabling accurate budget vs. actual reporting. Reports can be filtered and grouped by
department.
Departments are optional and only available when the Department Use Flag is checked
on the Configure tab of the Main Company dialog box. Also, if you changed the name
used to refer to Departments (on the Defaults tab of the Main Company dialog box), that
name will be used in lieu of "Department". For more information, see Main Company,
page 46.
Some examples of departments are:
• Accounting
• Administration
• Customer Service
• Research and Development
• Sales and Marketing
• Shipping

Configure Departments
1. Click the Configure menu, Department. The Configure Department window
will open.

Figure 104: Configure Departments

2. The Configure Department dialog box contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 110

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a code to
identify the department. The code’s length
and type (numeric or alphanumeric) is
determined in the Defaults dialog box in the
Main Company dialog box (see Main
Company, page 46.). Once saved, this code
cannot be changed.
Name This is a required field. Enter the department
name, as it will appear in the system and on
reports. The department name can be up to
30 characters long.
Active Check this box to indicate that the
department is currently in use. Clear this
check box if the department is not being used
at this time.
Validate Check this box to send a Validation to the
clocks. The clocks will then display this
Department's name for employee
confirmation when the employee enters its
Department Code.
NOTE: The Load Level Validation option
must also be selected under Polling (see
Polling, page 392) in order for this feature to
be fully functional.
Use Hourly Wage Check this box to pay all employees assigned
to this department a standard hourly wage
whenever they work in this department.
Checking this box will enable the Hourly
Wage field, in which you define the amount of
the wage.
NOTE: This Hourly Wage is also known as
the Level Wage. If this wage is different than
the employee's individual wage, the
employee's individual wage takes
precedence. To cause the Hourly Wage
(Level Wage) to take precedence, check the
Use Level Wage before default
assignment wage option on the Configure
tab of the Configure Main Company dialog
box.
Use Charge Rate Check this box to define the rate charged for
all employees assigned to this Department
whenever they work in this Department.
Checking this box will enable the Charge
Rate field, in which you define the amount of
the rate.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 111

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Use Piece Rate Check this box to pay employees according
to the quantity of goods they produce.
Checking this box will enable the Piece Work
Rate field, in which you define the rate per
item produced. Employees will enter the
number of pieces produced at the clock and
will be paid this rate for each piece. This
option may be used instead of or in
conjunction with the Use Hourly Wage.
NOTE: In order to make this option fully
functional, the clocks must be configured to
accept piece rate entries. For more
information, see Customizing Function
Keys, page 375.
Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of hours
Hours (HH.MM) that are budgeted for this entire
department per day in the pay period. This
information is used for Actual vs. Budgeted
reports only: it does not impact the
employee's ability to clock in. This field is
optional.
This number indicates the amount budgeted
per day in the pay period. Calculate this
number by multiplying the number of
employees working in the department by the
number of hours each employee is expected
to accumulate in the pay period. This number
is then divided by the total number of days in
the pay period.
Example
10 employees X 40 hours per pay period =
400 total hours
400 total hours / 7 days in the pay period =
57.14 budgeted total hours

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 112

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of dollars that
Dollars are budgeted for this entire department per
day in the pay period. This information is
used for Actual vs. Budgeted reports only: it
does not impact the employee's ability to
clock in. This field is optional.
This number indicates the dollars budgeted
per day in the pay period. Calculate this
number by multiplying the number of
employees working in the department by the
dollar amount each employee is expected to
accumulate in the pay period. This number is
then divided by the total number of days in
the pay period.
Example
10 employees X 600 dollars per pay period =
6000 total dollars
6000 total dollars / 7 days in the pay period =
857.14 budgeted total dollars.
Hourly Wage Enter the hourly wage paid to employees
working in this department.
The Use Hourly Wage check box must be
selected for this field to be available.
Charge Rate Enter the charge rate received for the
employees working in this department.
The Use Charge Rate check box must be
selected for this field to be available.
Piece Work Rate Enter the amount per item produced (piece)
paid to employees working in this
department. Employees will enter the number
of pieces produced at the clock and will be
paid this rate for each piece.
The Use Piece Rate check box must be
selected for this field to be available.

Add a Department
1. Click the Configure menu, Department. The Configure Department dialog
box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Department. The General tab will become
available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 113

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 105: Adding a new Department

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Departments section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Department dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Department dialog box.

Edit a Department
1. Click the Configure menu, Department. The Configure Department dialog
box will open.
2. Highlight the Department you wish to edit from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Department.
NOTE: The Code field cannot be edited.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Departments section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Department
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Department dialog box.

Delete a Department
Departments that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Configure menu, Department. The Configure Department dialog
box will open.
2. Highlight the Department you wish to delete from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 114

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 106: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Department dialog box.

Jobs
Jobs are the second level in Job Costing. Jobs are used to track employee’s time and
labor cost in terms of hours and dollars. Jobs serve many purposes in Genesis SQL.
Employees can track their time to a job by clocking into and/or transferring to the job.
Wages and piece rates can be associated with the job and employee. Hours and wage
budgets can be set for the job, enabling accurate budget vs. actual reporting.
Jobs are optional and only available when the Department and Job Use Flags are
checked on the Configure tab of the Main Company dialog box. Also, if you changed the
name used to refer to Jobs (on the Defaults tab of the Main Company dialog box), that
name will be used in lieu of "Jobs". For more information, see Main Company, page 46.
Some examples of Jobs might be:
• Welding
• Shipping
• Product Development
• Work Orders

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 115

Genesis SQL Manual

Configure Jobs
Jobs are the second level of the Job Costing feature (Departments are the top level.)
1. Click the Configure menu, then Job. The Configure Job window will open.

Figure 107: Configure Job

2. The Configure Job dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a code to
identify the Job. The code’s length and type
(numeric or alphanumeric) is determined in
the Defaults dialog box in the Main Company
dialog box (see page 46). Once saved, this
code cannot be changed.
Name This is a required field. Enter the Job name,
as it will appear in the system and on reports.
The Job name can be up to 30 characters
long.
Active Check this box to indicate that the Job is
currently in use. Clear this check box if the
Job is not being used at this time.
Validate Check this box to send a Validation to the
clocks. The clocks will then display this Job's
name for employee confirmation when the
employee enters its Job Code.
NOTE: The Load Level Validation option
must also be selected under Polling (see
Polling, page 392) in order for this feature to
be fully functional.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 116

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Use Hourly Wage Check this box to pay all employees assigned
to this Job a standard hourly wage whenever
they work in this Job. Checking this box will
enable the Hourly Wage field, in which you
define the amount of the wage.
NOTE: This Hourly Wage is also known as
the Level Wage. If this wage is different than
the employee's individual wage, the
employee's individual wage takes
precedence. To cause the Hourly Wage
(Level Wage) to take precedence, check the
Use Level Wage before default
assignment wage option on the Configure
tab of the Configure Main Company dialog
box.
Use Charge Rate Check this box to define the rate charged for
all employees assigned to this Job whenever
they work in this Job. Checking this box will
enable the Charge Rate field, in which you
define the amount of the rate.
Use Piece Rate Check this box to pay employees according
to the quantity of goods they produce.
Checking this box will enable the Piece Work
Rate field, in which you define the rate per
item produced. Employees will enter the
number of pieces produced at the clock and
will be paid this rate for each piece. This
option may be used instead of or in
conjunction with the Use Hourly Wage.
NOTE: In order to make this option fully
functional, the clocks must be configured to
accept piece rate entries. For more
information, see Customizing Function
Keys, page 375.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 117

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of hours
Hours (HH.MM) that are budgeted for this entire Job
per day in the pay period. This information is
used for Actual vs. Budgeted reports only: it
does not impact the employee's ability to
clock in. This field is optional.
This number indicates the amount budgeted
per day in the pay period. Calculate this
number by multiplying the number of
employees working in the Job by the number
of hours each employee is expected to
accumulate in the pay period. This number is
then divided by the total number of days in
the pay period.
Example
10 employees X 40 hours per pay period =
400 total hours
400 total hours / 7 days in the pay period =
57.14 budgeted total hours
Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of dollars that
Dollars are budgeted for this entire Job per day in the
pay period. This information is used for Actual
vs. Budgeted reports only: it does not impact
the employee's ability to clock in. This field is
optional.
This number indicates the dollars budgeted
per day in the pay period. Calculate this
number by multiplying the number of
employees working in the Job by the dollar
amount each employee is expected to
accumulate in the pay period. This number is
then divided by the total number of days in
the pay period.
Example
10 employees X 600 dollars per pay period =
6000 total dollars
6000 total dollars / 7 days in the pay period =
857.14 budgeted total dollars.
Hourly Wage Enter the hourly wage paid to employees
working in this Job.
The Use Hourly Wage check box must be
selected for this field to be available.
Charge Rate Enter the charge rate received for the
employees working in this job.
The Use Charge Rate check box must be
selected for this field to be available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 118

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Piece Work Rate Enter the amount per item produced (piece)
paid to employees working in this Job.
Employees will enter the number of pieces
produced at the clock and will be paid this
rate for each piece.
The Use Piece Rate check box must be
selected for this field to be available.

Add a Job
1. Click the Configure menu, then Job. The Configure Job dialog box will
open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Job. The General tab will become
available.

Figure 108: Adding a new Job

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Jobs section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Job dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Job dialog box.

Edit a Job
1. Click the Configure menu, then Job. The Configure Job dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Job you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Job.
NOTE: The Code field cannot be edited.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Jobs section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Job screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Job dialog box.

Delete a Job
Jobs that are in use cannot be deleted.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 119

Genesis SQL Manual

1. Click the Configure menu, then Job. The Configure Job dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Job you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 109: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Job dialog box.

Steps
Steps are the third level in Job Costing. Steps are used to track employee’s time and
labor cost in terms of hours and dollars. Steps serve many purposes in Genesis SQL.
Employees can track their time to a step by clocking into and/or transferring to the step.
Wages and piece rates can be associated with the step and employee. Hours and wage
budgets can be set for the step, enabling accurate budget vs. actual reporting.
Steps are optional and only available when the Department, Job and Step Use Flags are
checked on the Configure tab of the Main Company dialog box. Also, if you changed the
name used to refer to Steps (on the Defaults tab of the Main Company dialog box), that
name will be used in lieu of "Steps". For more information, see Main Company, page 46.

Configure Steps
Steps are the third level of the Job Costing feature (Departments and Jobs are above it.)
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Step. The Configure Step window
will open.

Figure 110: Configure Step

2. The Configure Step dialog box contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 120

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a code to
identify the Step. The code’s length and type
(numeric or alphanumeric) is determined in
the Defaults dialog box in the Main Company
dialog box (see page 46). Once saved, this
code cannot be changed.
Name This is a required field. Enter the Step name,
as it will appear in the system and on reports.
The Step name can be up to 30 characters
long.
Active Check this box to indicate that the Step is
currently in use. Clear this check box if the
Step is not being used at this time.
Validate Check this box to send a Validation to the
clocks. The clocks will then display this Step's
name for employee confirmation when the
employee enters its Step Code.
NOTE: The Load Level Validation option
must also be selected under Polling (see
Polling, page 392) in order for this feature to
be fully functional.
Use Hourly Wage Check this box to pay all employees assigned
to this Step a standard hourly wage whenever
they work in this Step. Checking this box will
enable the Hourly Wage field, in which you
define the amount of the wage.
NOTE: This Hourly Wage is also known as
the Level Wage. If this wage is different than
the employee's individual wage, the
employee's individual wage takes
precedence. To cause the Hourly Wage
(Level Wage) to take precedence, check the
Use Level Wage before default
assignment wage option on the Configure
tab of the Configure Main Company dialog
box.
Use Charge Rate Check this box to define the rate charged for
all employees assigned to this Step whenever
they work in this Step. Checking this box will
enable the Charge Rate field, in which you
define the amount of the rate.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 121

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Use Piece Rate Check this box to pay employees according
to the quantity of goods they produce.
Checking this box will enable the Piece Work
Rate field, in which you define the rate per
item produced. Employees will enter the
number of pieces produced at the clock and
will be paid this rate for each piece. This
option may be used instead of or in
conjunction with the Use Hourly Wage.
NOTE: In order to make this option fully
functional, the clocks must be configured to
accept piece rate entries. For more
information, see Customizing Function
Keys, page 375.
Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of hours
Hours (HH.MM) that are budgeted for this entire
Step per day in the pay period. This
information is used for Actual vs. Budgeted
reports only: it does not impact the
employee's ability to clock in. This field is
optional.
This number indicates the amount budgeted
per day in the pay period. Calculate this
number by multiplying the number of
employees working in the Step by the number
of hours each employee is expected to
accumulate in the pay period. This number is
then divided by the total number of days in
the pay period.
Example
10 employees X 40 hours per pay period =
400 total hours
400 total hours / 7 days in the pay period =
57.14 budgeted total hours

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 122

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of dollars that
Dollars are budgeted for this entire Step per day in
the pay period. This information is used for
Actual vs. Budgeted reports only: it does not
impact the employee's ability to clock in. This
field is optional.
This number indicates the dollars budgeted
per day in the pay period. Calculate this
number by multiplying the number of
employees working in the Step by the dollar
amount each employee is expected to
accumulate in the pay period. This number is
then divided by the total number of days in
the pay period.
Example
10 employees X 600 dollars per pay period =
6000 total dollars
6000 total dollars / 7 days in the pay period =
857.14 budgeted total dollars.
Hourly Wage Enter the hourly wage paid to employees
working in this Step.
The Use Hourly Wage check box must be
selected for this field to be available.
Charge Rate Enter the charge rate received for the
employees working in this step.
The Use Charge Rate check box must be
selected for this field to be available.
Piece Work Rate Enter the amount per item produced (piece)
paid to employees working in this Step.
Employees will enter the number of pieces
produced at the clock and will be paid this
rate for each piece.
The Use Piece Rate check box must be
selected for this field to be available.

Add a Step
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Step. The Configure Step dialog
box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Step. The General tab will become
available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 123

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 111: Adding a new Step

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Steps section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Step dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Step dialog box.

Edit a Step
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Step. The Configure Step dialog
box will open.
2. Highlight the Step you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Step.
NOTE: The Code field cannot be edited.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Steps section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Step screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Step dialog box.

Delete a Step
Steps that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Step. The Configure Step dialog
box will open.
2. Highlight the Step you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 112: Deletion Confirmation

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 124

Genesis SQL Manual

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Step dialog box.

Operations
Operations are the fourth level in Job Costing. Operations are used to track employee’s
time and labor cost in terms of hours and dollars. Operations serve many purposes in
Genesis SQL. Employees can track their time to an operation by clocking into and/or
transferring to the operation. Wages and piece rates can be associated with the operation
and employee. Hours and wage budgets can be set for the operation, enabling accurate
budget vs. actual reporting.
Operations are optional and only available when the Department, Job, Step and
Operation Use Flags are checked on the Configure tab of the Main Company dialog box.
Also, if you changed the name used to refer to Operations (on the Defaults tab of the
Main Company dialog box), that name will be used in lieu of "Operations". For more
information, see Main Company, page 46.

Configure Operations
Operations are the fourth level of the Job Costing feature (Departments, Jobs, Steps are
above it.)
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Operation. The Configure
Operation window will open.

Figure 113: Configure Operation

2. The Configure Operation dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a code to
identify the Operation. The code’s length and
type (numeric or alphanumeric) is determined
in the Defaults dialog box in the Main
Company dialog box (see page 46). Once
saved, this code cannot be changed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 125

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Name This is a required field. Enter the Operation
name, as it will appear in the system and on
reports. The Operation name can be up to 30
characters long.
Active Check this box to indicate that the Operation
is currently in use. Clear this check box if the
Operation is not being used at this time.
Validate Check this box to send a Validation to the
clocks. The clocks will then display this
Operation's name for employee confirmation
when the employee enters its Operation
Code.
NOTE: The Load Level Validation option
must also be selected under Polling (see
Polling, page 392) in order for this feature to
be fully functional.
Use Hourly Wage Check this box to pay all employees assigned
to this Operation a standard hourly wage
whenever they work in this Operation.
Checking this box will enable the Hourly
Wage field, in which you define the amount of
the wage.
NOTE: This Hourly Wage is also known as
the Level Wage. If this wage is different than
the employee's individual wage, the
employee's individual wage takes
precedence. To cause the Hourly Wage
(Level Wage) to take precedence, check the
Use Level Wage before default
assignment wage option on the Configure
tab of the Configure Main Company dialog
box.
Use Charge Rate Check this box to define the rate charged for
all employees assigned to this Operation
whenever they work in this Operation.
Checking this box will enable the Charge
Rate field, in which you define the amount of
the rate.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 126

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Use Piece Rate Check this box to pay employees according
to the quantity of goods they produce.
Checking this box will enable the Piece Work
Rate field, in which you define the rate per
item produced. Employees will enter the
number of pieces produced at the clock and
will be paid this rate for each piece. This
option may be used instead of or in
conjunction with the Use Hourly Wage.
NOTE: In order to make this option fully
functional, the clocks must be configured to
accept piece rate entries. For more
information, see Customizing Function
Keys, page 375.
Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of hours
Hours (HH.MM) that are budgeted for this entire
Operation per day in the pay period. This
information is used for Actual vs. Budgeted
reports only: it does not impact the
employee's ability to clock in. This field is
optional.
This number indicates the amount budgeted
per day in the pay period. Calculate this
number by multiplying the number of
employees working in the Operation by the
number of hours each employee is expected
to accumulate in the pay period. This number
is then divided by the total number of days in
the pay period.
Example
10 employees X 40 hours per pay period =
400 total hours
400 total hours / 7 days in the pay period =
57.14 budgeted total hours

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 127

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of dollars that
Dollars are budgeted for this entire Operation per day
in the pay period. This information is used for
Actual vs. Budgeted reports only: it does not
impact the employee's ability to clock in. This
field is optional.
This number indicates the dollars budgeted
per day in the pay period. Calculate this
number by multiplying the number of
employees working in the Operation by the
dollar amount each employee is expected to
accumulate in the pay period. This number is
then divided by the total number of days in
the pay period.
Example
10 employees X 600 dollars per pay period =
6000 total dollars
6000 total dollars / 7 days in the pay period =
857.14 budgeted total dollars.
Hourly Wage Enter the hourly wage paid to employees
working in this Operation.
The Use Hourly Wage check box must be
selected for this field to be available.
Charge Rate Enter the charge rate received for the
employees working in this operation.
The Use Charge Rate check box must be
selected for this field to be available.
Piece Work Rate Enter the amount per item produced (piece)
paid to employees working in this Operation.
Employees will enter the number of pieces
produced at the clock and will be paid this
rate for each piece.
The Use Piece Rate check box must be
selected for this field to be available.

Add an Operation
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Operation. The Configure
Operation dialog box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Operation. The General tab will become
available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 128

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 114: Adding a new Operation

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Operations section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Operation dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Operation dialog box.

Edit an Operation
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Operation. The Configure
Operation dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Operation you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Operation.
NOTE: The Code field cannot be edited.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Operations section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Operation
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Operation dialog box.

Delete an Operation
Operations that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Operation. The Configure
Operation dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Operation you wish to delete from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 129

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 115: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Operation dialog box.

Tasks
Tasks are the fifth level in Job Costing. Tasks are used to track employee’s time and
labor cost in terms of hours and dollars. Tasks serve many purposes in Genesis SQL.
Employees can track their time to a task by clocking into and/or transferring to the task.
Wages and piece rates can be associated with the task and employee. Hours and wage
budgets can be set for the task, enabling accurate budget vs. actual reporting.
Tasks are optional and only available when the Department, Job, Step, Operation and
Task Use Flags are checked on the Configure tab of the Main Company dialog box. Also,
if you changed the name used to refer to Tasks (on the Defaults tab of the Main
Company dialog box), that name will be used in lieu of "Tasks". For more information,
see Main Company, page 46.

Configure Tasks
Tasks are the fifth level of the Job Costing feature (Departments, Jobs, Steps, and
Operation are above it.)
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Task. The Configure Task window
will open.

Figure 116: Configure Task

2. The Configure Task dialog box contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 130

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a code to identify
the Task. The code’s length and type (numeric
or alphanumeric) is determined in the Defaults
dialog box in the Main Company dialog box
(see page 46). Once saved, this code cannot
be changed.
Name This is a required field. Enter the Task name,
as it will appear in the system and on reports.
The Task name can be up to 30 characters
long.
Active Check this box to indicate that the Task is
currently in use. Clear this check box if the
Task is not being used at this time.
Validate Check this box to send a Validation to the
clocks. The clocks will then display this Task's
name for employee confirmation when the
employee enters its Task Code.
NOTE: The Load Level Validation option
must also be selected under Polling (see
Polling, page 392) in order for this feature to
be fully functional.
Use Hourly Wage Check this box to pay all employees assigned
to this Task a standard hourly wage whenever
they work in this Task. Checking this box will
enable the Hourly Wage field, in which you
define the amount of the wage.
NOTE: This Hourly Wage is also known as the
Level Wage. If this wage is different than the
employee's individual wage, the employee's
individual wage takes precedence. To cause
the Hourly Wage (Level Wage) to take
precedence, check the Use Level Wage
before default assignment wage option on
the Configure tab of the Configure Main
Company dialog box.
Use Charge Rate Check this box to define the rate charged for
all employees assigned to this Task whenever
they work in this Task. Checking this box will
enable the Charge Rate field, in which you
define the amount of the rate.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 131

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Use Piece Rate Check this box to pay employees according to
the quantity of goods they produce. Checking
this box will enable the Piece Work Rate field,
in which you define the rate per item
produced. Employees will enter the number of
pieces produced at the clock and will be paid
this rate for each piece. This option may be
used instead of or in conjunction with the Use
Hourly Wage.
NOTE: In order to make this option fully
functional, the clocks must be configured to
accept piece rate entries. For more
information, see Customizing Function
Keys, page 375.
Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of hours (HH.MM)
Hours that are budgeted for this entire Task per day
in the pay period. This information is used for
Actual vs. Budgeted reports only: it does not
impact the employee's ability to clock in. This
field is optional.
This number indicates the amount budgeted
per day in the pay period. Calculate this
number by multiplying the number of
employees working in the Task by the number
of hours each employee is expected to
accumulate in the pay period. This number is
then divided by the total number of days in the
pay period.
Example
10 employees X 40 hours per pay period =
400 total hours
400 total hours / 7 days in the pay period =
57.14 budgeted total hours

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 132

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of dollars that are
Dollars budgeted for this entire Task per day in the
pay period. This information is used for Actual
vs. Budgeted reports only: it does not impact
the employee's ability to clock in. This field is
optional.
This number indicates the dollars budgeted
per day in the pay period. Calculate this
number by multiplying the number of
employees working in the Task by the dollar
amount each employee is expected to
accumulate in the pay period. This number is
then divided by the total number of days in the
pay period.
Example
10 employees X 600 dollars per pay period =
6000 total dollars
6000 total dollars / 7 days in the pay period =
857.14 budgeted total dollars.
Hourly Wage Enter the hourly wage paid to employees
working in this Task.
The Use Hourly Wage check box must be
selected for this field to be available.
Charge Rate Enter the charge rate received for the
employees working in this task.
The Use Charge Rate check box must be
selected for this field to be available.
Piece Work Rate Enter the amount per item produced (piece)
paid to employees working in this Task.
Employees will enter the number of pieces
produced at the clock and will be paid this rate
for each piece.
The Use Piece Rate check box must be
selected for this field to be available.

Add an Task
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Task. The Configure Task dialog
box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Task. The General tab will become
available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 133

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 117: Adding a new Operation

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Task section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Task dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Task dialog box.

Edit an Task
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Task. The Configure Task dialog
box will open.
2. Highlight the Task you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Task.
NOTE: The Code field cannot be edited.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Tasks section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Task screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Task dialog box.

Delete an Task
Tasks that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Configure menu, Job Costing, Task. The Configure Task dialog
box will open.
2. Highlight the Task you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 134

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 118: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Task dialog box.

Bell Schedules
The Bell Schedules module allows your Time clock to activate a bell at specified times of day. For
example, you might have a bell ring to announce the start of a shift, break or lunch, and the end
of the day. The bell schedule is defined by the day of the week, the time of day, and the duration
of the bell. The Bell Schedules module can ring up to 336 bells per Time clock per week.
Each Bell Schedule template can contain multiple bell details. Once the Bell Schedule has been
created, you will add the individual dates and times the bells will ring. The Bell Schedule is then
downloaded to the appropriate Time clocks.

Configure Bell Schedules

1. Click the Configure menu, Bell Schedules. The Configure Bells window will
open.

Figure 119: Configure Bells

2. The Configure Bells dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Number This is a required field. Enter a 4-digit number
to identify the bell schedule. Once saved, this
number cannot be changed.
Name This is a required field. The bell schedule
name can be up to 30 characters long.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 135

Genesis SQL Manual

Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the

Bell Schedule is currently in use. Uncheck this
box if the Schedule is not being used at this
time.
Schedules Lists the individual bell days and times
entered.
Number Indicates the order the bells will ring.

SMTWTFS Indicates the day(s) of the week the bell will

ring.
Time Indicates the time at which the bell will ring.

Duration Indicates how long the bell will ring.

Day of Week Indicates the day(s) of the week the bell

selected in the Schedules list will ring.
Time Indicates the time at which the bell selected in
the Schedules list will ring.
Duration Indicates how long the bell selected in the
Schedules list will ring.

Add a Bell Schedule

1. Click the Configure menu, Bell Schedules. The Configure Bell Schedule
dialog box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Bell Schedule. The General tab will
become available.

Figure 120: Adding a new Bell Schedule

3. Enter in the Number, Name and Active status.

NOTE: As soon as the Number is entered, the Add button in the center of
the screen will become available.
4. Click the Add button in the center of the screen to add the individual bell
details. The Bell Details window will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 136

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 121: Bell Schedules: Bell Details

5. Select the days of the week you want the bell to ring.
6. Enter the time (HH:MM) at which you want the bell to ring. This must be
entered in military time.
7. Enter the duration for the bell (how long the bell should ring). The default
value is 2.0 seconds.
8. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Bell Details dialog box.
9. Repeat Steps 4 through 8 to add all the Bell Details for this schedule.
10. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Bells screen.
11. Click Close to exit the Configure Bells dialog box.

Edit a Bell Schedule

1. Click the Configure menu, Bell Schedules. The Configure Bells dialog box
will open.
2. Highlight the Bell Schedule you wish to edit from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Bell Schedule.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Bell Schedule section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Bells screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Bells dialog box.

Delete a Bell Schedule

Bell Schedules that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Configure menu, Bell Schedules. The Configure Bells dialog box
will open.
2. Highlight the Bell Schedule you wish to delete using the list at the side of the
screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 137

Genesis SQL Manual

3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 122: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Bell Schedules dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 138

Genesis SQL Manual

Profile Lockouts
The Profile Lockouts module controls when an employee can punch at a Time clock. Employees
can be given a lockout or a warning message when trying to punch In or Out at times that are
restricted. Employees who are locked out are not permitted to complete their transaction but may
have a supervisor punch them in by overriding the lockout.
You can also use the Profile Lockouts to send messages at certain times. For example, if you
want to alert employees that they are clocking in too early, you could create a Profile Schedule
with a "Too Early" message that displays when the employee clocks during certain hours of the
day.
Lockout profiles are made up of Profile Schedules, which can contain up to 8 different time
frames, each with its lockout and/or message. Each Profile Schedule specifies the time frames
during which the lockout and/or message will display. There are 15 Profile Schedules available,
and 17 different lockout/messages available.
After the lockout profile is complete, it is downloaded to the time clocks at which the profile will
apply. Employees are assigned to the clocks and are assigned one profile schedule for each day
of the week.
Profile Lockouts Example
The company wants to make sure that employees:
• can't punch earlier than 6am or later than 7pm on weekdays.
• can't punch at all on weekends.
For this scenario, you would create a Profile Lockout that contains two Profile Schedules.
Schedule 1 would lockout employees between midnight and 6am and between 7pm and
11:59pm. Schedule 2 would lockout employees between midnight and 11:59pm (all day).
The Profile Lockout would be downloaded to the clocks. On the Profiles tab of the
Configure Employee dialog box for each employee, you would choose Schedule 1 for
Monday through Friday, and Schedule 2 for Saturday and Sunday.

Configure Profile Lockouts

1. Click the Configure menu, Profile Lockouts. The Configure Profiles window
will open.

2. The Configure Profiles dialog box contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 139

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Number This is a required field. Enter a unique 4-digit
number to identify the lockout profile. Once
saved, this number cannot be changed.
Name This is a required field. Type the lockout
profile name, as you want it to appear in the
system and on reports. The lockout profile
name can be up to 30 characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
Profile is currently in use. Uncheck this box if
the Profile is not being used at this time.
Schedules Each profile contains up to 15 different
lockout schedules. Each schedule may have
up to eight time frames specifying when an
employee can (and cannot) enter a punch.
Messages may also be associated with each
time frame.
Select the Schedule you wish to configure by
clicking on it in the Schedules list. Begin by
setting up Schedule 1 and continue
sequentially down the list using as many
schedules as necessary to define the profile.
Not all schedules must be used.
Start For each time frame in each schedule, type
the lockout starting time in HH:MM. Time
must be entered in military format. Up to
eight starts and stop times may be
established per schedule. 00:00 indicates
midnight.
Stop For each time frame in each schedule, type
the lockout stopping time in HH:MM. Time
must be entered in military format. Up to
eight starts and stop times may be
established per schedule. 00:00 indicates
midnight.
Message For each time frame in each schedule, select
the message number (from the Message box
to the right) that displays on the time clock
when an employee punches during the time
frame specified.
Num Indicates the unique code for this message.
This is the number entered in the Message
field.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 140

Genesis SQL Manual

Message Type the message text (up to 35 characters)

that displays when an employee punches.
You may leave this field blank, in which case
no message displays.
Examples:
• See supervisor.
• Punch accepted.
• Late-no punch.
Timeout Enter the length of time (duration) the
message displays on the time clock in
seconds and tenth of a second. For example,
2.0 means the message displays for two
seconds. The maximum message timeout is
9.9 seconds. If 0.0 is entered, no message
displays.
Tone The time clock has a distinct accept and
reject tone that can be sounded when the
message displays. Select from one of the
following options.
• Accept
• Reject
• None: Select this option if you do not
want a tone to sound.
Lockout Check this box to prevent the time clock from
accepting an employee’s punch during the
assigned time frame. Clear this check box to
allow a punch.
Super Check this box to allow a supervisor to
override a lockout by punching on behalf of
the employee with a supervisor badge. This
option is only available when the Lockout
check box is selected.

Add a Profile Lockout

1. Click the Configure menu, Profile Lockouts. The Configure Profiles dialog
box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Profile Lockout. The General tab will
become available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 141

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 123: Adding a new Profile Lockout

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Profile Lockouts section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Configure Profiles dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Profiles dialog box.

Edit a Profile Lockout

1. Click the Configure menu, Profile Lockouts. The Configure Profile
Lockouts dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Profile Lockout you wish to edit from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Profile Lockout.
NOTE: The Profile Number cannot be edited.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Profile Lockout section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Profile Lockout
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Profile Lockout dialog box.

Delete a Profile Lockout

Profile Lockouts that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Configure menu, Profile Lockouts. The Configure Profile
Lockouts dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Profile Lockout you wish to delete from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 142

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 124: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Profile Lockouts dialog box.

Reasons
Reason codes are added to an employee’s transaction through the Online Timecard. They are
used to denote a specific reason for the transaction.

Configure Reasons
1. Click the Configure menu, Reason. The Configure Reasons window will
open.

Figure 125: Configure Reasons

2. The Configure Reasons dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a unique code
(up to 10 characters) to identify the reason.
Once saved, this code cannot be changed.
Name This is a required field. Enter the reason, as
you want it to appear in the system. The
reason name can be up to 30 characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
reason is currently in use. Clear this check
box if the reason is not being used at this
time.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 143

Genesis SQL Manual

Add a Reason
1. Click the Configure menu, Reason. The Configure Reasons dialog box will
open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Reason. The General tab will become
available.

Figure 126: Adding a new Reason

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Reasons section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Reasons dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Reasons dialog box.

Edit a Reason
1. Click the Configure menu, Reasons. The Configure Reasons dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Reason you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Reason.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Reasons section.
NOTE: The Reason Code cannot be changed.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Reasons
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Reasons dialog box.

Delete a Reason
1. Click the Configure menu, Reasons. The Configure Reasons dialog box will
open.
2. Highlight the Reason you wish to delete from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 144

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 127: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Reasons dialog box.

Security
Security access determines who can log in to the Genesis SQL, which employees they are
allowed to manage and which areas of the program they are permitted to access.
Security is established in two steps.
1. Create the Security Levels that specify which program features are
accessible.
2. Add User accounts.
Users are given a login id and password, are assigned to a Security Level, and are granted
access to select groups of employees.
You may define an unlimited number of Security Levels and Users. The number of users logged
in at one time is limited by the number of User Licenses installed.
There are four commands within the Security menu, all of which are described in the following
sections.

Figure 128: Security Menu

Configure Security Levels

Security Levels define which areas of the program are accessible and what can be done
in them. Security Levels should be configured prior to adding Users. Examples of
Security Levels are:
• Branch Managers
• Line Supervisors
• Payroll/HR
Up to four options are available for each feature. As the function of these options is the
same for each feature, they are described once here for ease of use:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 145

Genesis SQL Manual

Option Definition
View Grants read-only access to items.

Add Allows the user to add new items.

Edit Allows the user to edit existing items.

Delete Allows the user to delete existing items.

1. Click the File menu, Security, Define Levels. The Configure Security Levels
window will open.

Figure 129: Configure Security Levels

2. The Configure Security Levels dialog box contains some general settings
and several tabs, all of which are described below.
Setting Definition
Code This field is required. Enter a unique code (up
to 10 characters) to identify the security level.
Once saved, this Code cannot be changed.
Name Enter a description of the security level in this
field. The description can be up to 30
characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
level is currently in use. Uncheck this box if
the level is not being used at this time.
Set Date and Time Check this box to allow the user to update the
date and time of the PC.
Print Lists Click the Print Lists check box to allow the
user to print all available listings reports

3. The File tab grants access to features under the File menu and contains the
following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 146

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 130: Security Levels: File tab

Setting Definition
Security This section defines the user's access rights
to the File, Security menu's features.
Users Defines the user's access rights to User
Maintenance settings. The options are View,
Add, Edit and/or Delete.
For more information on User Maintenance,
see page 158.
Define Levels Defines the user's access rights to Security
Levels settings. The option is View.
Who Is In Defines the user's access rights to the Who's
In screen. The option is View.
For more information on the Who's In screen,
see 163.
Utilities This section defines the user's access rights
to the File, Utilities menu's features.
NOTE: Typically these are reserved for the
system administrator.
Reindex, Repair, Allows the user to Repair, Reindex and
Update Update the Genesis SQL databases.
For more information on these features, see
the sections on Repairing (page Error!
Bookmark not defined.), Reindexing (page
Error! Bookmark not defined.) and
Updating (page Error! Bookmark not
defined.).
Set Reprocess Allows the user to Set employees' Reprocess
Date Date.
For more information on this feature, see Set
Reprocess Date, page 416.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 147

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Fix Unassigned Allows the user to use the Fix Unassigned
Badges Badges utility.
For more information on this feature, see Fix
Unassigned Badges, page 416.
Restore Original Allows the user to restore Genesis SQL
Reports original report definitions over modified
reports.
For more information on this feature, see
Restore Original Reports, page 417.
Repost from R- Allows the employee to repost R-files (polled
files clock data) to the Genesis SQL database.
For more information on this feature, see
Repost R-Files, page 418.
Purge R-files Allows the employee to delete old R-files
(polled clock data) from the Genesis SQL
directory.
For more information on this feature, see
Purge R-Files, page 419.
Archive and Allows the employee to Archive the Genesis
Restore SQL database and restore a previously
archived database.
For more information on these features, see
Archive, page Error! Bookmark not
defined..
Backup and Allows the employee to Backup the Genesis
Restore SQL database and restore databases from
backup.
For more information on these features, see
System Backup, page Error! Bookmark not
defined..
Other This section defines the user's access rights
to the other items in the File menu'.
Import Allows the employee to import data from
external files.
For more information on this feature, see
Importing, page 405.
Export Allows the employee to export data from
Genesis SQL to an external file.
For more information on this feature, see
Exporting, page 409.
Print Setup Allows the employee access to the print setup
information from the File menu. See page
276.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 148

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Print Barcode Allows the employee to Print Barcode list.
For more information on this feature, see
Print Barcode, page 413.
Check All This option will activate all available features
in the File window.
Uncheck All This option will inactivate all available features
in the File window.

4. The Edit tab grants access to features under the Edit menu and contains the
following information:

Figure 131: Security Levels: Edit tab

Setting Definition
Approval Editor Defines the user's access rights to the
Approval Editor. The options are View and
Edit.
For more information on this feature, see
Approval Editor, page 258.
Employee Defines the user's access rights to the
Configure Employee section. The options are
View, Add, Edit and/or Delete and will allow
the user access to employee records. If Add,
Edit and Delete are turned off the Detail Tab
is also off.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Maintenance, page 184.
Details (w/o Add, Defines the user’s access to the Details tab of
Edit, Delete) the Configure Employee section. This is a
view only feature, unless Add, Edit and Delete
have been activated in the above (Employee)
section.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 149

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Timecard Defines the user's access rights to the
Timecard tab of the Configure Employee
section. The options are View, Add, Edit
and/or Delete and will allow the user access
to employee time sheet data.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Timecard, page 199.
Approve Timecard Defines the user’s access to approve
timecards in the Timecard tab of the Configure
Employee section.
Schedule Defines the user's access rights to the
Schedule tab of the Configure Employee
section. The options are View, Edit, and
Delete and will allow the user access to the
employee's schedule.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Schedule, page 204.
Allow Schedule Defines the user’s access to create new shifts
Override as a shift override on the Schedule tab of the
Configure Employee section.
Transactions Defines the user's access rights to the
Transactions tab of the Configure Employee
section. The options are View, Add, Edit
and/or Delete and will allow the user access
to employee transaction (punch) data.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Transactions, page 212.
Status Defines the user's access rights to the Status
tab of the Configure Employee section. The
options are View, Add, Edit and/or Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Status, page 213.
Benefits Defines the user's access rights to the
Benefits tab of the Configure Employee
section. The options are View and Edit and
allow the user access to the employee's
benefits entitlement information.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Benefits, page 216.
Messages Defines the user's access rights to the
Messages tab of the Configure Employee
section. The options are View, Add, Edit
and/or Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Messages, page 223.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 150

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Wages Defines the user's access rights to the Wages
tab of the Configure Employee section. The
options are View and Edit and will allow the
user access to employee pay rate information.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Wages, page 226.
Badges Defines the user's access rights to the Badges
tab of the Configure Employee section. The
options are View, Add, Edit and/or Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Badges, page 231.
Profiles Defines the user's access rights to the Profiles
tab of the Configure Employee section. The
options are View, Add, Edit and/or Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Profiles, page 232.
Clocks Defines the user's access rights to the Clocks
tab of the Configure Employee section. The
options are View, Add, Edit and/or Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Employee Clocks, page 232.
Status Board Allows the user to view the Status Board
screen.
For more information on this feature, see
Status Board, page 260.
Task Organizer Allows the user to view the Task Organizer
screen.
For more information on this feature, see
Task Organizer, page 260.
Global Allows the user access to the File, Global
menu, from which he/she can perform global
functions.
For more information on this feature, see
Global Commands, page 264.
Benefits Accruals Allows the user to access the File, Benefits
Accruals menu. (Benefits Accruals are an
optional feature and therefore may not be
available here.) The options are View, Add,
Edit and/or Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Benefits Accruals, page 183.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 151

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Occurrence Allows the user access to the File,
Ratings Occurrence Ratings menu. (Occurrence
Ratings are an optional feature and therefore
may not be available here.) The options are
View, Add, Edit and/or Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Occurrence Ratings, page 183.
Check All This option will activate all available features
in the Edit window.
Uncheck All This option will inactivate all available features
in the Edit window.

5. The Reports tab grants access to features under the Reports menu and
contains the following information:

Figure 132: Security Levels: Reports tab

Setting Definition
Payroll Grants access to the reports in the Payroll
category.
Attendance Grants access to the reports in the
Attendance category.
Exceptions Grants access to the reports in the
Exceptions category.
Schedule Grants access to the reports in the Schedule
category.
Human Resources Grants access to the reports in the Human
Resource category.
Wage Grants access to the reports in the Wage
category.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 152

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Exports Grants access to the reports in the Exports
category.
NOTE: This is the category in which the payroll
exports live.
Job Costing Grants access to the reports in the Job
Costing category.
Access Grants access to the reports in the Access
category.
Listings Grants access to the reports in the Listings
category.
For more information see Listings, page
Report Editor Grants access to the Report Editor.

Check All This option will activate all available features in

the Edit window.
Uncheck All This option will inactivate all available features
in the Edit window.

6. The Configure tab grants access to features under the Configure menu and
contains the following information:

Figure 133: Security Levels: Configure tab

Setting Definition
Main Company Defines the user's access rights to the Main
Company settings. The only option is Edit.
For more information on this feature, see
Main Company, page 46.
Divisions Defines the user's access rights to Divisions
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit and
Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Divisions, page 54.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 153

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Categories Defines the user's access rights to Categories
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit and
Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Categories, page 57.
Attendance Defines the user's access rights to Attendance
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit and
Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Attendance Codes, page 63.
Policies Defines the user's access rights to Policies
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit and
Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Policies, page 66.
Rounding Defines the user's access rights to Rounding
rule settings. The options are View, Add, Edit
and Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Rounding, page 83.
Shifts Defines the user's access rights to Shifts
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit and
Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Shifts, page 90.
Holidays Defines the user's access rights to Holidays
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit and
Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Holidays, page 101.
Holiday Groups Defines the user's access rights to Holiday
Groups settings. The options are View, Add,
Edit and Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Holiday Groups, page 101.
Groups Defines the user's access rights to Groups
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit and
Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Groups, page 103.
Department Defines the user's access rights to
Department settings. The options are View,
Add, Edit and Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Departments, page 110.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 154

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Job Defines the user's access rights to Job
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit and
Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Configure Jobs, page 115.
Step Defines the user's access rights to Step
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit and
Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Configure Steps, page 120.
Operation Defines the user's access rights to Operation
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit and
Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Configure Operations, page 125.
Task Defines the user’s access rights to Task
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit
and Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Configure Tasks, page 130.
Profile Lockouts Defines the user's access rights to Profile
Lockouts settings. The options are View, Add,
Edit and Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Profile Lockouts, page 183.
Bell Schedules Defines the user's access rights to Bell
Schedule settings. The options are View,
Add, Edit and Delete.
For more information on this feature, see Bell
Schedules, page 182.
Reason Defines the user’s access rights to Reason
settings. The options are View, Add, Edit
and Delete.
Check All This option will activate all available features
in the Configure window.
Uncheck All This option will inactivate all available features
in the Configure window.

7. The Clocks tab grants access to features under the Clocks menu and
contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 155

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 134: Security Levels: Clocks tab

Setting Definition
Poll This section defines the user's access rights
to Poll hardware clocks.
Start Allows the user to start the process of polling
clocks.
For more information on this feature, see
Polling, page 392.
Change Allows the user to manually change the times
Selections at which the clocks poll.
For more information on this feature, see
Polling, page 392.
Options Allows the user to change the settings in the
Poll Clock Selection dialog box.
For more information on this feature, see
Polling, page 392.
AutoProcess This section defines the user's access rights
to configure Auto Processes.
For more information on this feature, see
Configure an AutoProcess, page 394.
Schedule Defines the user's access rights to Schedule
AutoProcess settings. The options are View,
Add, Edit and Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Configure an AutoProcess, page 394.
Start Allows the user to start a pre-defined
AutoProcess.
For more information on this feature, see
Configure an AutoProcess, page 394.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 156

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Configure Defines the user's access rights to clock
configuration settings. The options are View,
Add, Edit and Delete.
For more information on this feature, see
Terminal Configuration, page 296.
Set Date and Time Allows the user to set the date and time of the
clocks.
Check All This option will activate all available features
in the Clocks window.
Uncheck All This option will inactivate all available features
in the Clocks window.

Add a Security Level

1. Click the File menu, Security, Define Levels. The Configure Security Level
dialog box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Security Level. The tabs will become
available.

Figure 135: Adding a new Security Level

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configuring Security Levels section.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Security Level dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Configure Security Level dialog box.

Edit a Security Level

1. Click the File menu, Security, Define Levels. The Configure Security Levels
dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Security Level you wish to edit from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The tabs will become available for you to edit the
selected Security Level.
NOTE: You cannot edit the Code field.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 157

Genesis SQL Manual

4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Security Level section.

5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Security Level
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Security Level dialog box.

Delete a Security Level

1. Click the File menu, Security, Define Levels. The Configure Security Levels
dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Security Level you wish to delete from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 136: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Security Levels dialog box.

User Maintenance
User Maintenance defines the users that can log in to Genesis SQL, which employees
they can manage, and which areas of the program they can use. The user is given a
login Id and password, is assigned a Security Level, and granted permission to select
groups of employees.
NOTE: Define Levels must be completed before adding any users.

Configure Users
1. Click the File menu, Security, User Maintenance. The Configure Users
window will open.

Figure 137: Configure Users

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 158

Genesis SQL Manual

2. The Configure Users dialog box contains several tabs, each of which is
described below.
3. The Users tab contains the following information:

Figure 138: Configure Users: User tab

Setting Definition
Login This field is required. Enter a unique Login ID
for this user, up to 9 alphanumeric
characters. This code will be entered into the
User ID field in the login window when this
user logs in. Once saved, the Login name
cannot be changed.
When you press Tab or Enter after entering
this field, the Password entry dialog box will
appear automatically.
Password This field is required. Enter a password, up to
9 alphanumeric characters, to be used with
the User ID above. Type the password again
to confirm it.
Supervisor Badge Enter the badge number assigned to this
user. For audit purposes, this badge number
is recorded when this user adds or edits
transactions.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
Login ID is active. Uncheck this box if the
Login is not being used at this time.
Last Enter the last name of this User.

First Enter the first name of this User.

Security Level Select the pre-defined Security Level for this

user.
For more information on setting up Security
Levels, see Configure Security Levels,
page 145.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 159

Genesis SQL Manual

Startup This section determines the settings that

apply when Genesis SQL starts up.
Start In Select the screen that should open
automatically when Genesis SQL starts. The
options are Main Menu, Approval Editor,
Employee (Configure Employee) and Task
Organizer.
Color Quality Select the set of icons you want displayed in
Genesis Pro. The options are High Quality
and Low Quality. High Quality displays the
newest icons and Low Quality keeps the old
icons.
Email Profile Enter this user's email address. This can be
used to send Auto Processed reports to the
user whenever they're ready.
NOTE: This option will only be available if
you have activated the SMTP feature.
SMTP server Enter the SMTP server name.

Display Name Enter the display name.

E-mail Address Enter the e-mail address.

Outgoing Security Enter this information for email

authentication.
User Name
Enter the user name.
Password
Enter the password.

4. The Divisions tab specifies the Divisions to which this user can view and
contains the following information:

Figure 139: Configure Users: Divisions tab

Setting Definition

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 160

Genesis SQL Manual

Select Determines what options are available in the

bottom part of the screen. The options are
All, Range, and List.
All automatically grants access to all
Divisions.
Range allows you to choose a range of
Divisions for access.
List allows you to choose individual
Divisions for access.
List When List is selected, a list of all the
Divisions in your company will appear based
on what was selected above.
Add/Add All Add adds the currently selected Division to
the Selected list. Add All adds all of the
Divisions to the Selected list.
Remove/Remove Remove removes the currently selected
All Division from the Selected list. Remove All
removes all of the Divisions from the
Selected list.

5. The Groups tab specifies the Groups which this user can view and contains
the following information:

Figure 140: Configure Users: Groups tab

Setting Definition
Select Determines what options are available in the
bottom part of the screen. The options are
All, Range, and List.
All automatically grants access to all Groups.
Range allows you to choose a range of
Groups for access.
List allows you to choose individual Groups
for access.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 161

Genesis SQL Manual

List When List is selected, a list of all the Groups

in your company will appear based on what
was selected above.
Add/Add All Add adds the currently selected Group to the
Selected list. Add All adds all of the Groups
to the Selected list.
Remove/Remove Remove removes the currently selected
All Group from the Selected list. Remove All
removes all of the Groups from the Selected
list.

Add a User
1. Click the File menu, Security, User Maintenance. The Configure Users
dialog box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new User. The User tab will become available.

Figure 141: Adding a new User

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Users section.

4. Click on the Divisions tab.
5. Click on the Groups tab.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Close to exit the Configure Users dialog box.

Edit a User
1. Click the File menu, Security, User Maintenance. The Configure Users
dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the User you wish to edit from the list.
3. Click the Edit button. The tabs will become available for you to edit.
NOTE: The Login field cannot be edited.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure User section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure User screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 162

Genesis SQL Manual

6. Click Close to exit the Configure User dialog box.

Delete a User
1. Click the File menu, Security, User Maintenance. The Configure Users
dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the User you wish to delete from the list.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 142: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Users dialog box.

Who's Logged In
The Who's Logged In screen displays the Login and name of all the users currently
logged in to Genesis SQL. Refresh button is also available to update the screen.
1. Click the File menu, Security, Who's Logged In. The Who's Logged In
screen will open. You may also print login activity by clicking Print.

Figure 143: Who's Logged In

Change Password
The Change Password function changes the password of the user currently logged in.
1. Click the File menu, Security, Change Password. The Change Password
input box will open.
2. Enter your old password.
3. Enter your new password. Type the password again to confirm it.
4. Click OK to confirm the changes and exit the dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 163

Genesis SQL Manual

Benefit Accruals
Using Benefit Accruals, Genesis SQL can automatically calculate the available benefit time for
your employees. These calculations are based upon rules that can account for different benefit
types (vacation, sick, personal, etc.), different accrual methods, seniority rules and other factors.
Benefit time taken is automatically subtracted from the available benefits so that balances are
always accurate.
Genesis SQL allows for an unlimited number of policies so that you can accommodate different
situations within your company. Each policy contains accumulators that specify the category
amounts and rules for earning benefits.
After the policies are created, they are assigned to the appropriate employees within the
company.
NOTE: Benefit Accruals is an additional module added into Genesis SQL. If you did not purchase
Benefit Accruals, you will have Benefit Entitlement instead. See Benefit Entitlement: Configure,
page 216.
There are two commands within the Benefit Accruals menu. Both are described below.

Figure 144: Benefit Accruals menu

Configure Benefit Accruals

1. Click the Edit menu, Benefit Accruals, Configure. The Configure Benefit
Accrual window will open.

Figure 145: Benefit Accruals

2. The Configure Benefit Accrual dialog box contains the following information:
Setting Definition

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 164

Genesis SQL Manual

Code This is a required field. Enter the code or

number you wish to use to refer to this
Benefit Accrual policy. You may enter up to 3
characters.
Name This is a required field. Enter the name you
wish to use to refer to this Benefit Accrual
policy. You may enter up to 30 characters.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
policy is currently in use. Uncheck this box if
the policy is not being used at this time.
Accumulators Lists the accumulators that make up this
Benefit Accrual policy.
For more information on this feature see
Benefit Accruals, page 164.
Code Indicates the unique number assigned to the
selected accumulator.
Posting Basis Indicates the frequency with which benefits
are posted in this accumulator.
Start Date Indicates the date on which this policy
became effective.
NOTE: This is typically set to the start date
of the company. However, this date needs to
be no earlier than the start date of the
employee that has the most seniority in the
company.
Reference Date Indicates the date on which the yearly
benefits reset (previous balance zero out or
roll forward, and the employee starts earning
a new year's benefits.)
Categories to Sum Indicates the categories that will be
considered when calculating benefits based
on hours worked and/or paid. Click the
category to select it. A checkmark displays
next to categories when they are selected.
Code Displays the code for the Category.

Name Displays the name of the Category.

Regular Check this box to indicate that regular hours

of the selected category(s) should be
considered when calculating benefits.
Overtime Check this box to indicate that overtime
hours of the selected category(s) should be
considered when calculating benefits.
Overtime 2 Check this box to indicate that overtime 2
hours of the selected category(s) should be
considered when calculating benefits.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 165

Genesis SQL Manual

Overtime 3 Check this box to indicate that overtime 3

hours of the selected category(s) should be
considered when calculating benefits.

Configure Benefit Accumulators

Accumulators specify the categories that will be granted by the policy, as well as the
amounts granted and method of accrual. You can have multiple accumulators within one
policy.
1. While adding or editing a Benefit Accrual, click the Add or Edit button in the
center of the screen to display the Accumulators dialog box.

Figure 146: Adding a Benefit Accumulator

Figure 147: Benefit Accumulators

2. The Accumulators dialog box contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 166

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Accumulator Select the category for this rule. Only the
categories that have been selected for
benefit entitlement will display in this drop-
down box.
To select a category for benefit entitlement,
edit the Category in Configure, Categories
and check the Post to benefit entitlement
box. For more information, see Categories,
page 57.
Posting Basis Select how often you want benefits to be
posted. The options are:
• Weekly
• Biweekly
• Semimonthly
• Monthly
• Annually
• Daily
The benefits are posted at the end of the
posting period.
Start Date Pick the date for the policy to take effect.
Pick a date in the past so that the defined
rules can be met for all current employees.
Reference Date This date indicates the rollover or reset date
for employee benefits. The options are:
• Hire: this benefit resets on the
employee's individual hire date (set
in Employee Maintenance).
• Fiscal: this benefit resets on the
employee's individual fiscal date (set
in Employee Maintenance).
• Other: this benefit resets on this date
for all employees. For example,
January 1.
Give XX after X This setting enables you to grant a lump sum
months from hire benefit a certain number of months from the
employees hire date. For example, "Give 40
hours after 6 months from hire date" to
automatically give an employee a week's
vacation on his/her six-month anniversary.
Do not give hours if This setting will not grant employee hours if
Employee status is the employee status is inactive.
inactive

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 167

Genesis SQL Manual

Accumulator Details This section displays the details for

accumulating or accruing the category
selected. There can be multiple accumulator
details for one category.
The Accumulator section displays the rules
for details already added. To display the
entry screen for an Accumulator, click the
Add button.
Year This is a required field. Enter the number of
years of service after which this rule takes
effect. To have the rule start immediately,
select 0. Works in conjunction with the
months.
Month This is a required field. Enter the number of
months of service after which this rule takes
effect. To have the rule start immediately,
select 0. Works in conjunction with the
years.
One Time This setting allows you to grant a one-time
benefit of this category. This field is optional.
For example, you might want to give a
"length of service" bonus of 40 hours on the
employee's anniversary, in addition to their
regular accruals. This benefit occurs only
once: it does not recur each year.
Straight Given This setting allows you to enter a set number
Hours (at end) of hours granted at the end of the Posting
Basis period (weekly, biweekly, etc.) This
field is optional
For example, to grant 8 hours of time per
month, you would choose Monthly for the
Posting Basis and enter 8 in this box.
Hours from This setting allows you to enter the fraction of
Categories to benefits earned for hours worked and/or
sum X paid. Genesis SQL will calculate the number
of hours paid of the categories selected in
the Categories to Sum section of the Benefit
Accrual dialog box. It will multiply the number
of hours paid by the number entered here to
calculate the available benefits, as follows:
Category Hours X Factor = Accrued Benefit
Minimum Hours Enter the minimum hours required to be
Needed worked in the Posting Basis period for the
employee to be eligible for any benefits
accrual.
For example, this could be used to pay
benefits only if the employee works more
than 30 hours per week.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 168

Genesis SQL Manual

Maximum Hours Enter the maximum hours that can be

Allowed accumulated for this category during the
Posting Basis period.
This is used to keep employees who work
lots of hours from accruing more benefits
than they are entitled to.
Maximum Annual Enter the number of hours the employee can
Carry Over carry forward into the next benefit year (on
the Reference Date). For no carry over ("use
it or lose it"), enter 0.
Maximum Total Enter the maximum number of hours the
Benefit Hours employee is allowed to accrue during the
benefit year.
For example, this could be used to "cap"
accruals at a maximum amount.

Add a Benefit Accruals Policy

1. Click the Edit menu, Benefit Accruals, Configure. The Configure Benefit
Accrual dialog box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Benefit Accruals policy. The General tab
will become available.

Figure 148: Adding a new Benefit Accruals policy

3. Fill in the Code and Name fields as described in the Configuring Benefit
Accruals section.
4. Click the Add button to display the Accumulator dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 169

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 149: Adding a new Benefit Accrual Accumulator

5. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Benefit Accumulators

section.
6. Click the Add button to display the Accumulator Details dialog box.

Figure 150:Adding Accumulator Details

7. Fill in the Accumulator Detail settings as described in the Configure Benefit

Accumulators section.
8. Click OK to accept the details and return to the Accumulator screen.
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 for each unique accumulator details needed.
10. Click OK to accept the Accumulator and return to the Benefit Accruals
screen.
11. Repeat steps 4 through 10 for each unique Accumulator (Category) needed.
12. Click OK to commit the changes and close the Configure Benefit Accruals
dialog box.
13. Click Close to exit the Configure Benefit Accruals dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 170

Genesis SQL Manual

Edit a Benefit Accruals Policy

1. Click the Edit menu, Benefit Accruals, Configure. The Configure Benefit
Accrual dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Benefit Accrual policy you wish to edit from the list at the side of
the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Benefit Accrual policy.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Benefit Accruals section.
5. Once you are editing the Benefit Accrual, you can further edit the
Accumulator and Accumulator Details.

To edit the Accumulator, click the Edit button in the Accumulator section in
the center of the screen.

To edit the Accumulator Details, first click the Edit button on the Benefit
Accrual screen, then click the Edit button in the Accumulator screen.
6. Click OK as many times as necessary to commit the changes and return to
the Configure Benefit Accrual screen.
7. Click Close to exit the Configure Benefit Accrual dialog box.

Delete a Benefit Accruals policy

Benefit Accruals that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Edit menu, Benefit Accruals. The Configure Benefit Accruals
dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Benefit Accruals policy you wish to delete from the list at the
side of the screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 151: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Benefit Accruals dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 171

Genesis SQL Manual

Update to Current
This command causes Genesis SQL to calculate all employees' benefit accruals up to
the current date.

1. Click the Edit menu, Benefit Accruals, Update to Current. Genesis SQL
will automatically update employee benefits.

Figure 152: Benefit Accruals: Update to Current

Occurrence Ratings
Occurrence Ratings is an optional module that allows you to track an employee's attendance
infractions, report on them, and send disciplinary notices when a specified number of infractions
have been recorded. Occurrence Notices can also be generated when less than 0. Occurrence
Ratings are assigned to the employees that are affected by them.
It is possible to define which attendance codes count as infractions, how many infractions are
considered an occurrence, and how many occurrences may be recorded before the disciplinary
notice is generated.
There are two commands within the Occurrence Ratings menu, both of which are described
below.

Figure 153: Occurrence Ratings menu

Configure Occurrence Ratings

1. Click the Edit menu, Occurrence Ratings, Configure. The Configure
Occurrences window will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 172

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 154: Occurrence Ratings

2. The Configure Occurrences dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a code to
identify this Occurrence Rating. You may
enter up to 3 characters.
Name This is a required field. Enter the name for
this Occurrence Rating. You may enter up to
30 characters.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
rating is currently in use. Uncheck this box if
the rating is not being used at this time.
System Generated Enter the number of occurrences to record
absences count as for system-generated absences. System
X occurrences Generated Absences happen automatically
when an employee is scheduled to work but
does not punch, and no miscellaneous
entries are entered to override the absence.
Calculations are Enter the number of months in the
done on a rolling X occurrence tracking cycle.
month basis

Occurrence Start Effective start date of the policy.

Date

Category and This section displays the infractions that are

Attendance to be flagged as occurrences and their
Infractions details.

Code Displays the Category or Attendance code

for this infraction.
Name Displays the Category or Attendance name
for this infraction.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 173

Genesis SQL Manual

Type Displays a C for Category or an A for

Attendance.
Occurrence Displays the percentage of an occurrence
this infractions counts as.
Notices This section displays the titles of the notices
that are to be sent. Notices are sent when a
certain number of occurrences are met.
At Displays the number of occurrences after
which the notice should be sent.
Notice Displays the title of the notice.

Notices Text Allows you to customize the text of the

Attendance Notice.

Add an Occurrence Rating

1. Click the Edit menu, Occurrence Ratings, Configure. The Configure
Occurrences dialog box will open.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Occurrence Rating. The General tab will
become available.

Figure 155: Adding a new Occurrence Rating

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configuring Occurrence Ratings

section.
4. Click the Add button in the Category and Attendance Infractions section to
configure the rules as described in the Configure Category and Attendance
Infractions section.
5. Click the Add button in the Notices section to configure the notices as
described in the Configure Attendance Notices section.
6. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Occurrences
dialog box.
7. Click Close to exit the Configure Occurrences dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 174

Genesis SQL Manual

Edit an Occurrence Rating

1. Click the Edit menu, Occurrence Ratings, Configure. The Configure
Occurrences dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Occurrence Rating you wish to edit from the list at the side of
the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected Occurrence Rating.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Occurrence Rating, Configure
Category and Attendance Infractions, and Configure Attendance Notices
sections.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Occurrences
screen.
6. Click Close to exit the Configure Occurrences dialog box.

Delete a Occurrence Rating

Occurrence Ratings that are in use cannot be deleted.
1. Click the Edit menu, Occurrence Ratings, Configure. The Configure
Occurrences dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Occurrence Rating you wish to delete from the list at the side of
the screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 156: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Occurrences dialog box.

Add Category and Attendance Infractions

After adding an Occurrence Rating, you will define the Categories and Attendance
infractions that count toward the Attendance Notices.

1. From the Configure Occurrences dialog box, click the Add button in the
Category and Attendance Infractions section. The Infraction dialog box will
open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 175

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 157: Infraction selection

2. Select Category or Attendance.

3. Click OK to continue. The Infraction Details dialog box will open.

Figure 158: Infraction Details

4. The Infraction Details dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Each Select the Category or Attendance code for
which you are adding details. You will be
given different lists of pre-defined Categories
and Attendance codes based upon your
choice in the Infractions dialog box.
Occurrences Enter the number (or percentage) of
occurrences this infraction will count as.

5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Occurrences

screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 176

Genesis SQL Manual

Edit a Category and Attendance Infraction

1. Click the Edit menu, Occurrence Ratings, Configure. The Configure

Occurrences window will open.
2. Highlight the Occurrence Rating you wish to edit from the list at the side of
the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General tab will become available.
4. Click the Edit button in the Category and Attendance Infractions section. The
Infraction dialog box will open.
5. Edit the settings as described in the Add Category and Attendance
Infractions section.
6. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Occurrences
dialog box.
7. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Delete a Category and Attendance Infraction

1. Click the Edit menu, Occurrence Ratings, Configure. The Configure
Occurrences window will open.
2. Highlight the Occurrence Rating you wish to edit from the list at the side of
the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General tab will become available.
4. Click the Delete button in the Category and Attendance Infractions section.
You will be prompted:

Figure 159: Deletion Confirmation

5. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

6. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Add Attendance Notices

After adding an Occurrence Rating, you will define the Notices and when they should be
sent. The Attendance Notice prints a standard text, which can be customized. You also
have the option of printing the dates and circumstances of the applicable occurrences.

1. From the Configure Occurrences dialog box, click the Add button in the
Notices section. The Notice Details dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 177

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 160: Notice Details

2. The Notice Details dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Occurrences Enter the number of occurrences after which
this notice should be sent.
Notice Enter the title or name you wish to use to
refer to this notice. This will be printed at the
top of the Attendance Notice.

3. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Occurrences

screen.
4. To customize the text of the Notice, click Notices Text button. The Notices
Text window will open.

Figure 161: Notices Text

5. Modify the text of the notice as desired. Genesis SQL will automatically fill in
the current date in the underlined section when printing the notice.
6. Click Close to commit the changes and return to the Configure Occurrences
screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 178

Genesis SQL Manual

Edit an Attendance Notice

1. Click the Edit menu, Occurrence Ratings, Configure. The Configure
Occurrences window will open.
2. Highlight the Occurrence Rating you wish to edit from the list at the side of
the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General tab will become available.
4. Click the Edit button in the Notices section. The Notice Details dialog box will
open.
5. Edit the settings as described in the Add Attendance Notice section.
6. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Occurrences
dialog box.
7. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Delete a Category and Attendance Infraction

1. Click the Edit menu, Occurrence Ratings, Configure. The Configure
Occurrences window will open.
2. Highlight the Occurrence Rating you wish to edit from the list at the side of
the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General tab will become available.
4. Click the Delete button in the Notices section. You will be prompted:

Figure 162: Deletion Confirmation

5. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

6. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Printing and Viewing Attendance Notices

The Attendance Notice command allows you to preview and print Attendance Notices for
all employees that have outstanding infractions. There are two reports available with this
feature:
• Attendance Notice: prints the Notices text configured in the Configure
Occurrences dialog box.
• Attendance Detail: prints the infractions that led to the Attendance
Notice.
The employee list will appear automatically and will reflect those employees that are
assigned to the Occurrence Rating and have met or exceeded the Attendance Notice
limits.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 179

Genesis SQL Manual

1. Click the Edit menu, Occurrence Ratings, Attendance Notices. The

Attendance Notices dialog box will open.

Figure 163: Attendance Notices

2. The Attendance Notices dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Name Displays the name of the employee receiving
the notice.
Number Displays the Employee Number of the
employee receiving the notice.
Notice Stands for Print Notice and indicates that
the Attendance Notice report will preview and
print for the specific employees selected.
Detail Stands for Print Details and indicates that
the Attendance Details report will print for the
specific employees selected.
Attend Displays the number of Attendance
Infractions this employee has.
Category Displays the number of Category Infractions
this employee has.
Absent Displays the number of Absences this
employee has.
Total Displays the total number of Occurrences
this employee has.
Notice to Print Displays, which notice, will be printed.

Print Notice? This button works as a toggle. Click this

button to select Print Notice in the upper
screen. Click it again to deselect Print Notice.
Print All Notices? Click this button to select Print Notice in the
upper screen.
Print No Notices? Click this button to select Print Notice in the
upper screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 180

Genesis SQL Manual

Print Detail? This button works as a toggle. Click this

button to select Print Detail in the upper
screen. Click it again to deselect Print Detail.
Print All Detai? Click this button to select Print Detail in the
upper screen.
Print No Detail? Click this button to select Print Detail in the
upper screen.
Group Select this option to display a specific Group.

Division Select this option to display a specific

Division.
Screen Outputs the report to screen first.

Printer Sends the report directly to the printer.

File The report can be saved as a file.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 181

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter V Optional Modules

This section reviews the optional modules that are available with Genesis SQL. These
modules are purchased in addition to Genesis SQL and may require separate installations.
These modules are as follows:
• Job Costing
• Profile Lockouts
• Bell Schedules
• Benefits Accruals
• Occurrence Ratings
• PC Clock
• WebClock
• Videx DuraTrax
• Employee Reviewer
• Third Party Terminals

Job Costing
NOTE: The optional Job Costing Module includes Step, Operation and Task.
The Job Costing module is used to further track employee time and labor costs by job or project,
both in terms of hours and money. Five levels of job costing are available: by default these are
called Department, Job, Step, Operation, and Task. Departments are divided into Jobs, Jobs are
divided into Steps, Steps are divided into Operations, and Operations are further divided into
Tasks. You may use one or all of these levels, depending upon your needs. Each item can be
assigned an hourly wage and/or a piece rate. For more information, see Job Costing, page 109.
NOTE: You will not be able to use Job without Department, Step without Job, Operation without
Step, Task without Operation.

Bell Schedules
The Bell Schedules module allows your time clock to activate a bell at specified times of day. For
example, you might have a bell ring to announce the start of a shift, break or lunch, and the end
of the day. The bell schedule is defined by the day of the week, the time of day, and the duration
of the bell. The bell schedules module can ring up to 336 bells per Time clock per week.
Each bell schedule template can contain multiple bell details. Once the Bell Schedule has been
created, you will add the individual dates and times the bells will ring. The Bell Schedule is then
downloaded to the appropriate time clocks. For more information, see Bell Schedules, page
135.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 182

Genesis SQL Manual

Profile Lockouts
The Profile Lockouts module controls when an employee can punch at a time clock. Employees
can be given a lockout or a warning message when trying to punch In or Out at times that are
restricted. Employees who are locked out are not permitted to complete their transaction but may
have a supervisor punch them in by overriding the lockout.
You can also use the Profile Lockouts to send messages at certain times. For example, if you
want to alert employees that they are clocking in too early, you could create a Profile Schedule
with a "Too Early" message that displays when the employee clocks during certain hours of the
day.
Lockout profiles are made up of Profile Schedules, which can contain up to 8 different time
frames, each with its lockout and/or message. Each Profile Schedule specifies the time frames
during which the lockout and/or message will display. There are 15 Profile Schedules are
available, and 17 different lockout/messages are available.
After the lockout profile is complete, it is downloaded to the time clocks at which the profile will
apply. Employees are assigned to the clocks and are assigned a profile schedule for each day of
the week. For more information, see Profile Lockouts, page 139.

Benefit Accruals
Using Benefit Accruals, Genesis SQL can automatically calculate the available benefit time for
your employees. These calculations are based upon rules that can account for different benefit
types (vacation, sick, personal, etc.), different accrual methods, seniority rules and other factors.
Benefit time taken is automatically subtracted from the available benefits so that balances are
always accurate.
Genesis SQL allows for an unlimited number of policies so that you can accommodate different
situations within your company. Each policy contains Accumulators, which specify the Categories,
amounts and rules for earning benefits.
After the policies are created, they are assigned to appropriate employees within the company.
For more information, see Benefit Accruals, page 164.
NOTE: Benefit Accruals is an additional module added into Genesis SQL. If you did not purchase
Benefit Accruals, you will have Benefit Entitlement instead. See Benefit Entitlement: Configure,
page 216.

Occurrence Ratings
Occurrence Ratings is an optional module that allows you to track an employee's attendance
infractions, report on them, and send disciplinary notices when a specified number of infractions
have been recorded. Occurrence Ratings are assigned to the employees that are affected by
them.
It is possible to define which attendance codes count as infractions, how many infractions are
considered an occurrence, and how many occurrences may be recorded before the disciplinary
notice is generated. For more information, see Occurrence Rating, page 172.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 183

Genesis SQL Manual

WebClock
WebClock is an optional module that may be installed in addition to other hardware or as a stand-
alone solution. Employees may use WebClock like any other clock except it works without
badges thru a web browser. WebClock makes it easy to gather time from thousands of users in
every corner of your enterprise, either across the building or across the country.
NOTE: The TimeSheet Submittal portion of WebClock only permits up to 3 levels of Job Costing
to be entered or transferred.
For more information, see WebClock, page 335.

Third Party Terminals

Third Party Terminals is an optional module that allows the use of Biometric Hand Readers, ATS
series clocks, and biometric fingerprint readers. For more information see, Hand Readers, page
367, and see ATS, page 342.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 184

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter VI Additional Employee Features

This section reviews the additional Employee Features that are available with Genesis
SQL. This section includes the following:

• Employee Reviewer
• Time Sheets

Employee Reviewer
The Employee Reviewer is an optional module that allows the employees to view the timecard
tab, schedule tab, transactions tab and benefit tab. This is a view only module that will not allow
the employee to make any changes to their punch, schedule, or benefit information, however they
will be able to accept the timecard and change their password.

Accessing Employee Reviewer

1. Click the Start button on your PC.

2. Highlight Programs, then Genesis SQL, then click Employee Reviewer.
3. Enter your Login ID (employee number) and Password.
NOTE: The first time that you access the Employee Reviewer you will not
have a password to enter.

Figure 164: Employee Reviewer: Login Screen

4. Click OK.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 185

Genesis SQL Manual

Employee Timecard Tab

The Timecard tab displays the employee's timesheet information.

Figure 165: Employee Reviewer: Timecard tab

5. Navigate to the Employee Reviewer window. See Accessing Employee

Reviewer, page 185.
6. When you first enter the Employee Reviewer window, the Timecard tab is
selected automatically and contains the following information:
Setting Definition
Attendance Code This field is not labeled. It displays a code to
indicate an exception regarding the entry. The
options are:
• A: Indicates a system-generated
absence. This entry will display in
Red.
• M: Indicates a missing punch. This
entry will display in purple.
• I: Indicates a work period In Progress.
This entry will display in green.
• D: Indicates a default work entry was
added when the employee missed a
punch (as defined in the Policy
associated with this employee.)
• F: Indicates that the entry was created
when Genesis SQL forecasted the
employee's hours. Time forecasting
will display future time transactions
(based on the employee’s current
schedule) on screen and in reports.
• S: Indicates Genesis SQL has
automatically created a Holiday entry.
This entry will display in black.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 186

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Date Displays the date of the entry.

Day Displays a three-character code for the day of

the week of the entry.
Cat Displays the category associated with the
entry (i.e., Work, Lunch, Break, Vacation,
Sick, Absent, etc.)
Start Displays the start time of the entry (i.e., the
time at which the employee clocked in for the
day, started lunch, etc.).
Stop Displays the stop time of the entry (i.e., the
time at which the employee clocked out for the
day, ended lunch, etc.).
Department By default, this field displays the Department
the employee worked in. By clicking the
Department button in the field header, you
can choose to display the Job, Step,
Operation, or Task (if applicable). Each time
you click the button; it advances to the next
item in order (Department, Job, Step,
Operation, Task), eventually returning to
Department.
Reg Displays the number of hours at straight time
the employee will be paid for this entry. This
number is calculated using the Start and Stop
times, adjusted according to the Rounding,
Lunch and Break policies defined in the Shift
Group assigned to this employee.
OT1 Displays the number of hours at OT1 the
employee will be paid for this entry, if any.
This number is calculated using the Start and
Stop times, adjusted according to the
Rounding, Lunch and Break rules defined in
the Shift Group assigned to this employee, as
well as the Overtime rules defined in the
Policy assigned to this employee.
OT2 Displays the number of hours at OT2 the
employee will be paid for this entry, if any.
This number is calculated using the Start and
Stop times, adjusted according to the
Rounding, Lunch and Break rules defined in
the Shift Group assigned to this employee, as
well as the Overtime rules defined in the
Policy assigned to this employee

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 187

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
OT3 Displays the number of hours at OT3 the
employee will be paid for this entry, if any.
This number is calculated using the Start and
Stop times, adjusted according to the
Rounding, Lunch and Break rules defined in
the Shift Group assigned to this employee, as
well as the Overtime rules defined in the
Policy assigned to this employee
Unpaid Displays the number of unpaid hours for this
entry, if any. Unpaid lunches and breaks will
be reflected in this column, if appropriate.
Dollars Displays the amount earned for this entry.

S Indicates a supervisor performed an edit to

the transaction.
Accept Timecard Employees may click this feature to approve
their timecard.
Pay Periods back Click the scroll arrow and choose the number
of pay periods prior to the current one you
wish to view.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 188

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Key When cursor moves over this box it will
explain the attendance codes:
• A: Indicates a system-generated
absence. This entry will display in
Red.
• M: Indicates a missing punch. This
entry will display in purple.
• P: Indicates a prior day adjustment.
This entry will display in orange.
• I: Indicates a work period In Progress.
This entry will display in green.
• D: Indicates a default work entry was
added when the employee missed a
punch (as defined in the Policy
associated with this employee.) This
entry will display in pink.
• L: Indicates a leave request. This
entry will display in cyan.
• R: Indicates a rejected leave request.
This entry will display in maroon.
• F: Indicates that the entry was created
when Genesis SQL forecasted the
employee's hours. Time forecasting
will display future time transactions
(based on the employee’s current
schedule) on screen and in reports.
• A gray entry indicates a future entry.
Date Displays the highlighted day.

Daily Totals Column The Totals row displays the totals for the
currently selected day.
Totals Column The Totals row displays the totals for the
currently selected pay period.
Change Password Click this button to change the employee’s
password.
Print Click this button to print the Online Timecard,
Schedules, Transactions or Benefits.
Close Click this button to close the Employee
Reviewer.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 189

Genesis SQL Manual

Employee Schedules Tab

The Schedule tab displays the employee's schedule.

Figure 166: Employee Reviewer: Schedules tab

7. Navigate to the Employee Reviewer window. See Accessing Employee

Reviewer, page 185.
8. Click the Schedule tab to select. The tab contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Calendar The calendar will display three weeks at a
time.
The Schedule calendar can display either
work Shift information, or Job Costing
information (which Job, Step, Operation, and
Task the employee is scheduled to work).
NOTE: For more information see Display shift
and department information or Display all
other Job Cost information in this section.
Date Displays the date.

Shift Displays the Shift selected for that particular

day.
Department Displays the Department number for that
particular day.
Job Displays the Job number for that particular
day.
Work Displays if the employee is scheduled to work
on that day and how many paid hours are
forecasted.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 190

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Override Enter the start and stop schedule change time
for rounding rule purposes only.
Change Password Click this button to change the employee’s
password.
Print Click this button to print the Online Timecard,
Schedules, Transactions or Benefits.
Close Click this button to close the Employee
Reviewer.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 191

Genesis SQL Manual

Employee Transactions Tab

The Transaction tab displays the individual punches for the employee
NOTE: Tasks associated with the Transactions tab, such as editing and adding punches, are
covered in their own section. See Timecard and Transaction Maintenance, page 243.

Description
9. Navigate to the Employee Reviewer window. See Accessing Employee
Reviewer, page 185.
10. Click the Transactions tab to select. The tab contains the following
information:

Figure 167: Configure Employee: Transaction tab

Setting Definition
Day Displays the day of the transaction.

Date Displays the date of the transaction.

Time Displays the actual time of the transaction.

Key Displays the time clock function key pressed

to generate the transaction. (i.e., * for Clock
In for day, etc.)
Prompt Displays the function prompt for the
transaction.
Clock Displays the number of the clock at which
the transaction was recorded.
NOTE: No clock number will display if the
transaction was entered by a supervisor
through the Genesis SQL software.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 192

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Badge Displays the employee's badge number
used for this transaction.
Reason Displays the reason code associated with
the corresponding transaction.
Supervisor This field shows audit trail information, and
displays the name and number of the
supervisor who edited this transaction, if
any.
Prompt Displays the function prompt for the
transaction.
Input Displays any additional data entered with
the transaction, such as a Department
number, the number of pieces produced,
etc.
Add/Edit/Delete For more information on adding, editing and
deleting transactions, see Adding and
Editing Transactions, page 245, and
Deleting Transactions, page 255.
Print Click this button to print the Online
Timecard, Schedules, Transactions or
Benefits.
Close Click this button to close the Employee
Reviewer.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 193

Genesis SQL Manual

Employee Benefits Tab

The Benefits tab reflects the employee's current benefit balances.

Figure 168: Employee Reviewer: Benefits tab

11. Navigate to the Employee Reviewer window. See Accessing Employee

Reviewer, page 185.
12. Click the Benefits tab to display the following information:
Setting Definition
Code Displays the category code of the benefit (i.e.,
VAC, SICK, etc.).
Name Displays the category name of the benefit (i.e.,
Vacation, Sick, etc.)
Allowed Displays the number of hours the employee
has either been granted or earned. This
number is based on the Benefit Accrual
settings (if applicable).
Taken Displays the number of hours of the benefit the
employee has already taken. This number is
calculated from the Miscellaneous entries on
the employee’s time card.
Pending Displays the number of hours of the benefit the
employee will take in the future (within the
current pay period).
Left Displays the number of hours left. This is
calculated by subtracting the Taken and
Pending amounts from the Allowed, as
follows:
Left = Allowed – (Taken + Pending)

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 194

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Count Displays the number of individual days on
which the benefit time was taken or is pending.
Carry Date Displays the date on which the benefits will roll
over, also known as the Reference Date or
Reset Date.
Change Password Click this button to change the employee’s
password.
Print Click this button to print the Online Timecard,
Schedules, Transactions or Benefits.
Close Click this button to close the Employee
Reviewer.

Employee Timesheets
The feature of the Employee Timesheets allows salaried employees only to edit and submit their
own timesheets.

Accessing Employee Timesheets

1. Access the GenSQL directory and right click on the Timeshet.exe icon.
2. Select create shortcut.
3. Drag shortcut onto your desktop.
4. Double click on the Timeshet icon.

Figure 169: Timesheets Login Screen

5. Enter the ID (employee number) and Password.

NOTE: The first time that you access the Employee Reviewer you will not
have a password to enter.
6. Click OK.
Using Employee Timesheets

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 195

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 170: Employee Timesheets

7. Navigate to the Timesheets window. See Accessing Employee

Timesheets, page 195.
8. The Timesheets window contains the following information:
Setting Definition
Number This is the employee’s number.

Name This is the employee’s name.

Week Ending Displays the last date of the week for this
timecard.
Date Worked Displays the Day, Date, and a check mark for
the days that the employee is scheduled to
work.
In Displays the time the employee is recording for
their start time.
Out Displays the time the employee is recording for
going Out for lunch.
In Displays the time the employee is recording for
coming back In from lunch.
Out Displays the time the employee is recording for
leaving for the day.
Override Auto Check this option to ignore auto lunch and
Deduct break deductions.

Worked Hours Displays the total number of hours that the

employee has recorded for the day, based on
the “In and Out” entries.
Miscellaneous Enter all transaction that are not regular worked
Information transactions.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 196

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Category Select the Category for this miscellaneous
transaction (i.e. vacation, sick, holiday etc.).
Time Enter the start time for this transaction.

Hours Enter the number of hours that applies to this

transaction.
Total Hours Displays the total number of hours for regular
worked hours and miscellaneous hours.
Total Displays the total number of worked hours,
miscellaneous hours, total hours.
Change Password Click this button to change the employee’s
password.
Print Click this button to print the submitted Time
Sheet.
Submit Click this button to submit the timesheets. You
can also submit daily by using the arrows to the
right side of the screen.
NOTE: Once the timesheet has been submitted
the employee can no longer make any changes
in it.
Close Click this button to exit the timesheet window.

NOTE: Employees will only be able to edit the current week, one-week prior,
and one week ahead.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 197

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter VII Employee Maintenance

This section covers the concepts and tasks for managing employee information. It
includes information on adding employees, editing employee information, and managing
employee schedules and assignments. It also contains links to the Timecard editing
sections of this manual.

Configure Employee
The Configure Employee window contains all information relating to your employees, including
contact, schedule, and time sheet data. All of the tabs in the window are described in this chapter,
however, some of the tabs (such as the Timecard and Transactions) have additional tasks
associated with them and have been given their own sections in this manual.
There are two ways to access the Configure Employee window: by menu or by tool button. Both
methods are described below.

1. Click the Edit menu, Employee or click the Maintenance button on

the toolbar. The Configure Employee window will open.

Figure 171: Configure Employee

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 198

Genesis SQL Manual

Employee List
The Employee List window contains a list of the employees in the database. Sorting options are
also available as described below:

Figure 172: Employee List

Setting Definition
Selected Employee Displays the employee name and number of the
selected employee.

Filters Show Division Selection: Select a Division to only

view employees assigned to that Division.
Show Group Selection: Select a Group to only view
employees assigned to that Group.
Show Salary Selection: Select ALL, YES or NO to
view employees assigned to that option.
Show Fulltime Selection: Select ALL, YES or NO to
view employees assigned to that option.
Show Permanent Selection: Select ALL, YES or NO
to view employees assigned to that option.
Previous button Press this button to go to an individual who is
previous on the list.
Find button Press this button to search for a name by code, last
name or badge number
Enter in the appropriate name, code or badge number
when the dialog box appears.
Next button Press this button to go to an individual who is next on
the list.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 199

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Number Select this option to have the employees sort by
employee number.
Name Select this option to have the employees sort by
employee name.
Show Inactives Select this option to have inactive employees
viewable in the Employee List

Employee Timecard (Description) Tab

The Timecard tab displays the employee's timesheet information.
NOTE: Tasks associated with the Timecard, such as editing and adding punches, are covered in
their own chapter. See Timecard and Transaction Maintenance, page 243.
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window.
2. When you first enter the Configure Employee window, the Timecard tab is
selected automatically and contains the following information:

Figure 173: Configure Employee: Timecard tab

Setting Definition

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 200

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Exception Code This field is not labeled. It displays a code to
indicate an exception regarding the entry. The
options are:
• A: Indicates a system-generated absence.
This entry will display in red.
• M: Indicates a missing punch. This entry
will display in purple.
• I: Indicates a work period In Progress. This
entry will display in green.
• D: Indicates a default work entry was
added when the employee missed a
punch (as defined in the Policy associated
with this employee.)
• F: Indicates that the entry was created
when Genesis SQL forecasted the
employee's hours. Time forecasting will
display future time transactions (based on
the employee’s current schedule) on
screen and in reports.
Date Displays the date of the entry.

Day Displays a three-character code for the day of the

week of the entry.
Cat Displays the category associated with the entry
(i.e., Work, Lunch, Break, Vacation, Sick, Absent,
etc.)
Start Displays the start time of the entry (i.e., the time at
which the employee clocked in for the day, started
lunch, etc.).
Stop Displays the stop time of the entry (i.e., the time at
which the employee clocked out for the day, ended
lunch, etc.).
Department By default, this field displays the Department the
employee worked in. By clicking the Department
button in the field header, you can choose to
display the Job, Step, Operation, or Task (if
applicable). Each time you click the button; it
advances to the next item in order (Department,
Job, Step, Operation, Task), eventually returning
to Department.
Reg. Displays the number of hours at straight time the
employee will be paid for this entry. This number is
calculated using the Start and Stop times,
adjusted according to the Rounding, Lunch and
Break policies defined in the Shift Group assigned
to this employee.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 201

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
OT1 Displays the number of hours at OT1 the
employee will be paid for this entry, if any. This
number is calculated using the Start and Stop
times, adjusted according to the Rounding, Lunch
and Break rules defined in the Shift Group
assigned to this employee, as well as the Overtime
rules defined in the Policy assigned to this
employee.
OT2 Displays the number of hours at OT2 the
employee will be paid for this entry, if any. This
number is calculated using the Start and Stop
times, adjusted according to the Rounding, Lunch
and Break rules defined in the Shift Group
assigned to this employee, as well as the Overtime
rules defined in the Policy assigned to this
employee
OT3 Displays the number of hours at OT3 the
employee will be paid for this entry, if any. This
number is calculated using the Start and Stop
times, adjusted according to the Rounding, Lunch
and Break rules defined in the Shift Group
assigned to this employee, as well as the Overtime
rules defined in the Policy assigned to this
employee
Unpaid Displays the number of unpaid hours for this entry,
if any. Unpaid lunches and breaks will be reflected
in this column, if appropriate.
Dollars Displays the amount earned for this entry.

S Displays a dot if a Supervisor has gone in to edit

the punch.
Auto Processing Depress this button to automatically process time
button transactions whenever they are added or edited.
Processing posts new and changed transactions to
the database and allows them to be displayed on
all reports. If this box is clear, you must click the
Reprocess button each time you want to update
employee transactions.
Show Schedule Depress this button to display the employee’s
button scheduled start and stop times on screen. This can
be used to help with editing when there is an
absence or missing punch.
Forecasting button Depress this button to generate projected time
transactions. Time forecasting will display future
time transactions (based on the employee’s
current schedule) on screen and in reports.
Approve / Depress this button to approve or unapprove the
Unapprove button selected pay period for the selected employee.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 202

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Pay Periods back Click the scroll arrow and choose the number of
pay periods prior to the current one you wish to
view.
NOTE: Although you may view prior pay periods,
only editable pay periods may be changed. This is
determined by the Number of Editable Pay
Periods in Configure Main Company dialog box,
and the Block Prior Pay Periods setting for the
current user.
Pay Period Displays the starting date and the ending date of
the currently selected pay period.
Date Column Displays totals for each day in the pay period.

Totals The Totals column displays the totals for the

currently selected pay period.
Reprocess Click this button to update employee transactions.
Processing posts new and changed transactions to
the database and allows them to be displayed on
all reports.
NOTE: If Auto Processing is checked, you will
not need to use this button each time a transaction
is changed.
Add Trans Click this button to add a transaction (punch) for
the employee. For more information on this
feature, see Adding and Editing Transactions,
page 245.
Edit/Add Start Click this button to add or edit a Starting
transaction (such as a Clock In for day or Start
Lunch) for the employee. For more information on
this feature, see Edit/Add Start, page 250.
Edit/Add Stop Click this button to add or edit an Ending
transaction (such as a Clock Out for day or End
Lunch) for the employee. For more information on
this feature, see Edit/Add Stop, page 251.
Multiple Misc. Click this button to add multiple or duplicated
Miscellaneous transactions. This can be used to
enter a vacation that lasts several days, etc. For
more information on this feature, see Multiple
Miscellaneous, page 251.
From Schedule Click this button to auto-fill a work day based on
the employee's schedule. For more information on
this feature, see From Schedule, page 254.
Delete Click this button to delete a transaction. For more
information on this feature, see Delete a
Transaction, page 255.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 203

Genesis SQL Manual

Employee Schedule Tab

The Schedule tab displays and allows you to edit the employee's schedule.
NOTE: Employees are not required to have a specific schedule, but without a schedule the
following items will not work in the system:
• Rounding Rules
• Automatic Lunch and Break Deductions
• Attendance Codes
• Exceptions
Configure Employee Schedules
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Schedule tab to select. The tab contains the following information:

Figure 174: Configure Employee: Schedule tab

Setting Definition
Calendar The calendar will display three weeks at a
time. The currently selected week will display
in white, the previous and following week
display in yellow. The current week will also
have a field where you can edit the entire
week. For more information on this feature,
see the Edit Entire Week section.
The Schedule calendar can display either
work Shift information, or Job Costing
information (which Job, Step, Operation, and
Task the employee is scheduled to work).
You can switch back and forth easily. For
more information on this feature, see the
Schedule Details section.
Date Displays the date.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 204

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Shift Displays the Shift selected for that particular
day.
NOTE: Before a shift is assigned the system
will default the shift assignment to a floater
shift.
Department Displays the Department number for that
particular day.
Job Displays the Job number for that particular
day.
Work Check this box to indicates whether or not the
employee is scheduled to work that day, and
how many paid hours are forecasted.
Override Displays the start and stop schedule change
time for rounding rule purposes only.
Display Shift Select this option to view the Shift,
Information Department and Job information on the
schedule calendar.
Display Job Cost Select this option to view the Step, Operation,
Information and Task information on the schedule
calendar.
Template Check this box to make this employee's
schedule a template. This will enable you to
copy this employee's schedule for other
employees. For more information on this
feature, see Create an Employee Schedule
Template, page 209.

Update Back Check this box to update previous weeks'

schedule data. Also enter the date to which
you wish to update. For more information on
this feature, see Assign or Edit an
Employee Schedule, page 206.
Update Forward Check this box to update following weeks'
schedule data. Also enter the date to which
you wish to update. For more information on
this feature, see Assign or Edit an
Employee Schedule, page 206.
Rotate Button Click this button define a rotating schedule for
this employee. For more information on this
feature, see Create a Rotating Schedule,
page 208.
Multiple Misc. Click this button to add multiple or duplicated
Button Miscellaneous transactions. This can be
used to enter a vacation that lasts several
days, see Multiple Miscellaneous, page
251.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 205

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Delete This option opens the Delete Assignments
screen. Here you can remove assignments,
All Before a Date or All After a Date.

Assign or Edit an Employee Schedule

The processes for assigning a schedule for the first time and for editing the schedule assignment
are the same. As part of this process, you will select a Shift, Department, Job, Step, Operation,
and Task (as appropriate) for the employee.

1. Navigate to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee window. See

Configure Employee Schedules, page 204.
2. Navigate to the week you wish the schedule to start by using the scroll bar on
the right side of the screen.
3. Click Edit Entire Week and/or Shift area on Sunday of the selected week.

Edit Entire Week

Shift area
Figure 175: Adding/Editing a Schedule Shift

4. If you clicked Edit Entire Week, the Schedules Detail for the Week dialog box
will open.
5. If you clicked in the Shift area, the Schedule Details dialog box will open.

Figure 176: Schedule Details for the Week and Schedule Details

6. Highlight from the settings as appropriate:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 206

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Shift Select a pre-defined Shift for this employee.

Start/Stop Override Enter the start and stop schedule change

time for rounding rule purposes only.
Graphic Override Use the graphic timeline to define the start
and stop schedule change time for rounding
rule purposes only.
Work Check this box to indicate whether or not
the employee is scheduled to work that day,
and how many paid hours are forecasted.
Department Select a pre-defined Department for this
employee. (Optional)
Job Select a pre-defined Job for this employee.
(Optional)
Step Select a pre-defined Step for this employee.
(Optional)
Operation Select a pre-defined Operation for this
employee. (Optional)
Task Select a pre-defined Task for this employee.
(Optional)
Update Rest of Week Check this box to update the rest of the
current week with these settings.
(Recommended)

7. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Schedule screen. The Shift
and Department information selected will display.
NOTE: Genesis SQL automatically keeps the schedule current for three
months into the future, so you needn't update manually unless you are
making a change that should apply to dates that have already been updated.
8. Check the “Work” box of each day of the week the employee is scheduled to
work.
9. If you are editing the schedule and wish these changes to apply into the
future, click the Update Forward box or Update Back box.
10. Click Apply to save the changes and update Forward (if selected for editing).

Delete a Schedule
1. Navigate to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Schedules, page 204.
2. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 207

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 177: Deletion Confirmation

3. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
All Before Date Select this option to delete schedules
leading up to a certain date.
All After Date Select this option to delete schedules
occurring after a certain date.
Date Enter the date to consider when deleting
the schedules.

4. Click OK. You will be prompted again:

5. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

Create a Rotating Schedule

Rotating schedules allow you to accommodate employees who work schedules that have a
pattern other than a weekly cycle. You can specify the number of days in the rotation and
what time period the rotation begins.

Rotating Schedule Example

Jane Doe works every other Saturday. She happens to work this coming Saturday, and
will be off the next Saturday.
To configure this you would modify her schedule so that Work is checked for this
Saturday, but not the next Saturday. The Start Date for the Rotation would be the
beginning of the current week, and the number of days in the cycle would be 14.

1. Navigate to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee window. See

Configure Employee Schedules, page 204.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 208

Genesis SQL Manual

2. Click the Rotate button. The Apply Rotating Schedule dialog box will open.

Figure 178: Apply Rotating Schedule

3. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Activate a rotating Check this box to enable a rotating
schedule for this schedule for the selected employee.
Employee
TIP: You can "remove" a rotating schedule
that has already been set simply by un-
checking this box.
Define Rotation These settings define the pattern for
rotation
Start Date Enter the date Genesis SQL should start
with to determine the rotation pattern.
Days in Rotation Enter the number of days in the rotation
pattern.
Apply Rotation These settings determine when the
rotating schedule will take effect.
Start Date Enter the date on which the rotating
schedule should take effect.
Include Job Cost Check this box if Genesis SQL should
Information automatically copy the Job, Step,
Operation, and Task assignments along
with the working times.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Schedule screen.

Create an Employee Schedule Template
An employee's schedule can be saved as template so that it can be copied to other
employees. This is a convenient way of duplicating an unusual work pattern or rotation so
that you don't have to reinvent the wheel each time.
NOTE: However, any changes that are made to the schedule that was copied will apply
to all schedules that are base on that template.
The Copy Schedule feature allows you to copy a previously defined Template. This step
is the first step in copying a schedule.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 209

Genesis SQL Manual

1. Navigate to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee window. See

Configure Employee Schedules, page 204.
2. Check the Template box. The Define Template dialog box will open.

Figure 179: Employee Schedule Template

3. Check the Use Employee as template box.

4. Enter a name for this template. Try to make it as descriptive as possible and
avoid using employee names, as it may be difficult to remember what type of
schedule the employee has.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Schedule screen.

Copy an Employee Schedule Template

The Copy Schedule feature allows you to copy a previously defined Employee Schedule
Template. See Create an Employee Schedule Template.
1. Navigate to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Schedules, page 204.
2. Click the Copy button. The Schedule Copy Details dialog box will open.

Figure 180: Copy Schedule Details

3. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Code Displays the code of the available
Template.
Template Name Displays the name of the available
Template.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 210

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Display Click this button to display the details of the
selected Template.
What to Copy These settings define what will be copied.

Shift Info Check this box to copy scheduled starting

and stopping times.
Work Check this box to copy which days are
selected for Work.
Department Check this box to copy the Department
assignments.
Job Check this box to copy the Job
assignments.
Step Check this box to copy the Step
assignments.
Operation Check this box to copy the Operation
assignments.
Task Check this box to copy the Task
assignments.
Define Copy These settings define when the template
will be copied.
Copy From These settings define the date range that
will be copied from.
Starting On Enter the date from which you wish to copy
forward.
Copy forever Select this option to copy the selected
template from the Starting on point forward
forever.
Stop On Select the option to copy only up to a
certain date. Enter the date in the space
provided.
Copy to These settings define the date range that
will be copied to.
Starting on hire Select this option to "paste" the copied
date schedule starting from the employee's hire
date forward.
Starting on date Select this option to "paste" the copied
schedule from a user-defined date forward.
Enter the date in the space provided.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Schedule screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 211

Genesis SQL Manual

Employee Transactions Tab

The Transaction tab displays the individual punches for the employee
NOTE: Tasks associated with the Transactions tab, such as editing and adding punches, are
covered in their own section. See Timecard and Transaction Maintenance, page 243.

Description
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Transactions tab to display the following information:

Figure 181: Configure Employee: Transaction tab

Setting Definition
Day Displays the day of the transaction.

Date Displays the date of the transaction.

Time Displays the actual time of the transaction.

Key Displays the time clock function key pressed

to generate the transaction. (i.e., * for Clock
In for day, etc.)
Prompt Displays the function prompt for the
transaction.
Clock Displays the number of the clock at which
the transaction was recorded.
NOTE: No clock number will display if the
transaction was entered by a supervisor
through the Genesis SQL software.
Badge Displays the employee's badge number
used for this transaction.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 212

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Supervisor This field shows audit trail information, and
displays the name and number of the
supervisor who edited this transaction, if
any.
Prompt Displays the function prompt for the
transaction.
Input Displays any additional data entered with
the transaction, such as a Department
number, the number of pieces produced,
etc.
Add/Edit/Delete For more information on adding, editing and
deleting transactions, see Adding and
Editing Transactions, page 245, and
Deleting Transactions, page 255.

Employee Status Tab

The Status tab displays the employee's current work status with the company

Configure Employee Status

1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Status tab to display the following information:

Figure 182: Configure Employee: Status tab

Setting Definition
Date Enter the effective date of the status.

Policies Select the Policy to be assigned to this employee.

Active Select whether the employee is Active or

Inactive as of the effective date.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 213

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Fulltime Select whether the employee is Full Time or Part
Time as of the effective date.
Permanent Select whether the employee is a Permanent or
Temporary employee as of the effective date.

Add Employee Status

When an employee changes Status, it is recommended that you add a new Status entry
rather than editing the existing Status. This enables you to keep a history of Status
changes throughout the employee's work history.
1. Navigate to the Status tab of the Configure Employee window.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Status. The Status Maintenance dialog
box will open:

Figure 183: Adding a new Status

3. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Date Enter the date that this Status change
becomes effective.
Active/Inactive Choose whether the employee is Active or
Inactive as of the selected date.
Active indicates that the employee is
currently working for the company.
Inactive indicates that the employee is not
currently working for the company, perhaps
because of a leave of absence or termination.
Full Time/Part Time Choose whether the employee is Full Time
or Part Time as of the selected date.
Permanent/Temporary Choose whether the employee is Permanent
or Temporary as of the selected date.
Policies Select the Policy that will apply to this
employee as of the effective date.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Status screen. The new
Status will be added to the list.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 214

Genesis SQL Manual

Edit Employee Status

If you choose to edit the Employee's Status, the changes will be retroactive to the
effective date of the original status entry. Because of this, when an employee changes
Status, it is recommended that you add a new Status entry rather than editing the existing
Status. This enables you to keep a history of Status changes throughout the employee's
work history.
1. Navigate to the Status tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Status, page 213.
2. Highlight the Status entry you wish to edit.
3. Click the Edit button. The Status Maintenance screen will become available
for you to edit.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Add Employee Status section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Status screen.

Delete Employee Status

You may wish to delete a Status entry that has been added in error. One Status entry
must always exist, thus you will not be able to delete if there is only one Status entry.
1. Navigate to the Status tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Status, page 213.
2. Highlight the Status you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 184: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion and return to the Status screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 215

Genesis SQL Manual

Employee Benefits Tab

The Benefits tab reflects the selected employee's current benefit balances. The information and
options on this tab will be slightly different if you have purchased Benefit Accruals than with
Benefit Entitlement. Both options are described below: Benefit Entitlement is first, followed by
Benefit Accruals.

Benefit Entitlement: Configure

1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Benefits tab to display the following information:

Figure 185: Configure Employee: Benefits tab

Setting Definition
Fiscal Date Displays the employee's Fiscal Date (set on
the Detail tab), for information purposes.
Hire Date Displays the employee's Hire Date (set on the
Detail tab), for information purposes.
Days of Service Displays the number of Days of Service the
employee has, for information purposes.
Code Displays the category code of the benefit (i.e.,
VAC, SICK, etc.).
Description Displays the category name of the benefit
(i.e., Vacation, Sick, etc.)
Given Displays the number of hours the employee
has been granted through Benefit Entitlement.
Taken Displays the number of hours of the benefit
the employee has already taken. This number
is calculated from the Miscellaneous entries
on the employee's time card.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 216

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Pending Displays the number of hours of the benefit
the employee will take in the future (within the
current pay period).
Left Displays the number of hours left. This is
calculated by subtracting the Taken and
Pending amounts from the Allowed, as
follows:
Left = Given - (Taken + Pending)
Count Displays the number of individual days on
which the benefit time was taken or is
pending.
Details button Click this button to display the individual
entitlement transactions for this employee.

Benefit Entitlement: Employee Benefit Details

1. Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window.
2. Highlight the benefit Category you wish to view.
3. Click the Details button. The Benefit Details screen for the selected Category
will open.

Figure 186: Benefit Entitlement Details

4. The Benefit Details dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Day Displays the day on which the time was
taken.
Date Displays the date on which the time was
taken.
Time Displays the time at which the time was
taken.
Amount Displays the number of hours taken.

Archived Indicates whether these transactions are in a

data set that has already been archived.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 217

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Category Displays the category of time taken.

Benefit Entitlement: Grant Benefit Time

With Benefit Entitlement, you manually enter the amount of hours given for each Benefit
Category. This is a one-time entry.
1. Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window.
2. Highlight the benefit Category you wish to grant.
3. Click the Details button. The Benefit Details screen for the selected Category
will open.

Figure 187: Benefit Details

4. Enter the amount of time you wish to grant in the Amount Allowed box.
5. Click OK to commit the change and return to the Benefits screen.

Benefit Entitlement: Delete a Detail

1. Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window.
2. Click the Details button. The Benefit Details screen will display.
3. Highlight the item you wish to delete.
4. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 188: Deletion Confirmation

5. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

6. Click OK to confirm the Archive message.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 218

Genesis SQL Manual

7. Click Close to return to the Benefits screen.

Benefit Accruals: Configure

1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Benefits tab to display the following information:

Figure 189: Configure Employee: Benefits tab

Setting Definition
Fiscal Date Displays the employee's Fiscal Date (set on
the Detail tab), for information purposes.
Hire Date Displays the employee's Hire Date (set on the
Detail tab), for information purposes.
Days of Service Displays the number of Days of Service the
employee has, for information purposes.
Code Displays the category code of the benefit (i.e.,
VAC, SICK, etc.).
Description Displays the category name of the benefit (i.e.,
Vacation, Sick, etc.)
Allowed Displays the number of hours the employee
has either been granted or earned. This
number is based on the Benefit Accrual
settings (if applicable) or can be manually
edited to grant Benefit Entitlement.
Taken Displays the number of hours of the benefit the
employee has already taken. This number is
calculated from the Miscellaneous entries on
the employee's time card.
Pending Displays the number of hours of the benefit the
employee will take in the future (within the
current pay period).

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 219

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Left Displays the number of hours left. This is
calculated by subtracting the Taken and
Pending amounts from the Allowed, as
follows:
Left = Allowed - (Taken + Pending)
Count Displays the number of individual days on
which the benefit time was taken or is pending.
Carry Date Displays the date on which the benefits will roll
over, also known as the Reference Date or
Reset Date.
Update button Click this button to update the benefit
calculations to the current day for this
employee.
Details button Click this button to display the individual
accrual or entitlement transactions for this
employee. For more information, see Benefit
Accruals, page 164.

Benefit Accruals: Update Employee Benefits

Genesis SQL will automatically update employee benefit accruals to the current day.
However, if you make a change the Benefit Accrual rule assigned to the employee, or
change the settings of the rule, you may wish to "force" Genesis SQL to update.
1. Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window. See Benefit
Accruals: Configure, page 219.
2. Click the Update button. This employee's benefits will update and the screen
will refresh.

Benefit Accruals: Employee Benefit Details

It is possible to view a detailed schedule of how much benefit time the employee has
earned and when it was posted.

1. Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window. See Benefit
Accruals: Configure, page 219.
2. Click the Details button. The Benefit Details screen will display.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 220

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 190: Benefit Details

3. The Benefit Details dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Day Displays the day on which the time was posted
or taken.
Date Displays the date on which the time was
posted or taken.
Time Displays the time at which the time was posted
or taken.
Amount Displays the number of hours posted or taken.

Balance Displays the running balance after the

transaction.
Category Displays the Category of the benefit time.

Type Displays what type of benefit transaction it

was.
Bonus Hours indicates time earned or
accrued.
Misc. Entry Indicates time taken.
Hours Adj. Indicates a manual adjustment.
Balance Adj. Indicates a Balance Adjustment
Archived Indicates whether these transactions are in a
data set that has already been archived. (For
more information on Archiving, see Archive,
page Error! Bookmark not defined.).
Show Accrued Check this box to display the adjustments that
Adjustments have been made to accrued Benefits.

Manual Adj. Button Click this button to make a manual adjustment.

For more information see Manual Benefit
Adjustment, page 222.

4. Click OK to close the Benefit Details screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 221

Genesis SQL Manual

Benefit Accruals: Manual Benefit Adjustment

It is possible to make manual adjustments to an employee's Benefit Entitlement. These
adjustments can be additions or deductions to the employee's available benefits. You can
also use this feature to zero out the employee's balance, called a balance adjustment.
1. Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window. See Benefit
Accruals: Configure, page 219.
2. Click the Details button. The Benefit Details screen will display.
3. Click the Manual Adj. Button. The Manual Adjustment dialog box will open.

Figure 191: Manual Benefit Adjustment

4. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Date Enter the Date on which the adjustment
should be posted.
Time Enter the time at which the adjustment should
be posted.
Type Select the type of adjustment to be made.
Given: Grants the employee the number of
hours entered in the Amount field.
Balance: Adjusts the employee's Allowed field
value to cause the current Left balance to
reflect the number of hours entered in the
Amount field. For example, if the Employee
had taken 40 hours already and you wanted
their balance to reflect 40 hours left, Genesis
SQL would adjust the Allowed to 80 (80
Allowed – 40 Taken = 40 Left).
Amount Enter the amount of the adjustment. This
number can be positive (for an addition) or
negative (for a deduction).

5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Benefit Details screen.
6. Click Close to return to the Benefits screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 222

Genesis SQL Manual

Benefits Accrual: Delete a Manual Adjustment

1. Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window. See Benefit
Accruals: Configure, page 219.
2. Click the Details button. The Benefit Details screen will display.
3. Highlight the Adjustment you wish to delete.
4. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 192: Deletion Confirmation

5. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

6. Click Close to return to the Benefits screen.

Employee Messages Tab

The Messages tab allows you to create a customized message that will display when this
employee punches at the clock

Configure
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Messages tab to display the following information:

Figure 193: Configure Employee: Messages tab

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 223

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Clock Id Displays the number of the clock at which
this message will display.
Message Displays the message. The message can
be up to 16 characters and the default is
the employee's first initial and last name.
All Clocks Button This opens the All Clocks dialog box.
Here you can create a message, and
assign it to all available clocks.

Add a Message
You can send a message to each clock individually, or to all clocks that the employee
uses.
To a Single Clock
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Add button to add a new message to send to an individual clock.
The Message Assignment dialog box will open.

Figure 194: Adding a new Message

3. Select the clock to which this message should be sent.

4. Enter the message you wish to send. Up to 16 characters may be entered.
Or check the Default message to Employee name to send the employee's
First Initial and Last Name.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Messages screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 224

Genesis SQL Manual

To All Clocks
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the All Clocks button to add a new message to all clocks this
employee uses. The Message Assignment dialog box will open.

Figure 195: Add a Message to All Clocks

3. Enter the message you wish to send. Up to 16 characters may be entered.

Or check the Default message to Employee name to send the employee's
First Initial and Last Name.
4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Messages screen.

Edit a Message
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Highlight the Message you wish to edit.
3. Click the Edit button.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Add a Message section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Messages screen.

Delete a Message
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Highlight the Message you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 196: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 225

Genesis SQL Manual

Employee Wages
The Wages tab specifies the FLSA status (exempt or non-exempt) and pay rate(s) for the
employee. For non-exempt employees, wages can either be Global or associated with the
Department, Job, Step, Operation or Task on which the employee works. All options are
described in the following sections.

Configure Employee Wages

1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Wages tab to display the following information:

Figure 197: Configure Employee: Wages tab

Setting Definition
Non-Exempt Check this option to indicate that the employee is
Non-Exempt.
Use Globa/ Wage Check this option to assign the employee a fixed
standard wage regardless of which department,
job, step, operation or task he/she works for. If un-
checked the employee will earn a different wage
based on the department, job, step, operation, or
task they work in.
For more information see the Department, Job,
Step, Operation, or Task buttons in this section.
Department Click this button to set a wage that applies
whenever the employee works for a particular
Department. This can be used to pay different
rates when the employee performs different
functions.
Job Click this button to set a wage that applies
whenever the employee works for a particular Job.
This can be used to pay different rates when the
employee performs different functions.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 226

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Step Click this button to set a wage that applies
whenever the employee works for a particular
Step. This can be used to pay different rates when
the employee performs different functions.
Operation Click this button to set a wage that applies
whenever the employee works for a particular
Operation. This can be used to pay different rates
when the employee performs different functions.
Task Click this button to set a wage that applies
whenever the employee works for a particular
Task. This can be used to pay different rates when
the employee performs different functions.
Exempt Check this option to indicate the employee is
Exempt.
Report Hours Genesis SQL can report exempt employees' hours
From either from actual punches or from their schedule,
regardless of their punches.
Check Actual to have Genesis SQL report the
hours as they are punched at the clock.
Check Schedule to have Genesis SQL report
hours from the employee's schedule. The
Attendance Clocking settings will become
available when this option is checked and need to
be configured
Attendance These settings become available when the Report
Clocking Hours From Schedule option is checked.
Check Paired Punching to indicate that the
employee should punch In and Out, but Genesis
SQL will ignore the actual times of the punches
and report the scheduled times and duration.
Check In Only to indicate that the employee only
needs to punch In each day and Genesis SQL will
report the scheduled times and duration.
Check None to indicate that Genesis SQL should
automatically report the scheduled times and
duration without the employee having to punch at
all.
Pay Overtime Check this option to make the employee eligible
for overtime, based on the Policy to which the
employee is assigned.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 227

Genesis SQL Manual

Add a Global Wage

1. Navigate to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Wages, page 226.
2. Select the Non-Exempt option.
3. Check the Use Global Wage option.
4. Click the Add button to add a new Global Wage. The Wage Details dialog
box will open.

Figure 198: Adding a new Holiday

5. Enter the date on which this wage takes effect.

6. Enter the amount of the hourly wage.
7. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Wages screen.

Edit a Global Wage

1. Navigate to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Wages, page 226.
2. Highlight the wage you wish to edit
3. Click the Edit button. The Wage Details dialog box will open.
4. Enter the amount of the hourly wage.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Wages screen.

Delete a Global Wage

1. Navigate to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Wages, page 226.
2. Highlight the wage you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 199: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 228

Genesis SQL Manual

Add an Employee Level Wage

Employee Level Wages specify the wage the employee makes when working for a
specific Department, Job, Step, Operation or Task. In this section, Level refers to the
Department, Job, Step, Operation, or Task, as appropriate. The procedure is the same
regardless of which level you are defining, thus they are all described together.

1. Navigate to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee window. See

Configure Employee Wages, page 226.
2. Select the Non-Exempt option.
3. Click the Department, Job, Step, Operation, or Task button, depending
upon choice. The Level Wage Details dialog box will open.

Hourly Wage

Piece Rate

Figure 200: Adding a new Level Wage

4. The Level Wage Details dialog box contains the following information:
Setting Definition
Item This field will be pre-populated with the
Departments, Jobs, Steps, Operations and
Tasks defined in the system. Select the item
you wish to configure.
Use Hourly Wage The value for this option is defined in the
Configure Department, Job, Step, Operation, or
Task dialog box. It will be checked and will
reflect the pre-defined wage if the Use Hourly
Wage setting is checked in the Department,
Job, Step, Operation, or Task dialog box for this
item.
Use Piece Rate The value for this option is defined in the
Configure Department, Job, Step, Operation, or
Task dialog box. It will be checked and will
reflect the pre-defined wage if the Use Piece
Rate setting is checked in the Department, Job,
Step, Operation, or Task dialog box for this
item.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 229

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Calendar The calendar is used both to enter the wage
amount and to indicate the effective date of the
wage. Wages will auto fill from the date entered
forward. Always enter the wage on the date,
which you wish it to take effect.
Hourly Wage The Hourly amount field is the top field in the
calendar. Enter the wage on the date, which it
becomes effective.
Piece Rate The Piece Rate amount field is the lower field in
Wage the calendar. Enter the wage on the date on
which it becomes effective.

5. Click Close to commit the changes and return to the Wages screen.

Edit an Employee Level Wage

1. Navigate to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Wages, page 226.
2. Select the Non-Exempt option.
3. Click the Department, Job, Step, Operation, or Task button, depending
upon choice. The Level Wage Details dialog box will open.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Add an Employee Level Wage section.
5. Click Close to commit the changes and return to the Wages screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 230

Genesis SQL Manual

Employee Badges Tab

The Badges dialog box is used to assign the employee's badge number.
Configure Employee Badges
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Badges tab to display the following information:

Figure 201: Employee Maintenance: Badges tab

Setting Definition
Number Displays the badge number assigned to the
employee.
Valid Indicates whether or not the badge is valid and can
be used by this employee. When an employee is
assigned another badge, make the original badge
invalid so that this employee cannot use it any
longer.

Add a Badge
1. Navigate to the Badges tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Badges, page 231.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Badge. The Assign Badge dialog box will
open.

Figure 202: Adding a new Badge

3. Enter the Badge number you wish to assign to this employee and press Tab.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 231

Genesis SQL Manual

4. Check the Valid box to indicate this badge is in use.

5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Badges screen.

Edit a Badge
It is possible to edit a Badge in order to make it Invalid for this employee (cannot be used
by this employee to punch). The badge number cannot be changed. If you need to
change a badge number, it is best to make the old badge number inactive or delete it,
and add a new one.

1. Navigate to the Badges tab of the Configure Employee window. See

Configure Employee Badges, page 231.
2. Click the Edit button. The Assign Badge dialog box will open.
3. Uncheck the Valid box to make the Badge invalid.
4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Badges screen.

Delete a Badge
1. Navigate to the Badges tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Badges, page 231.
2. Highlight the Badge you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 203: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion and return to the Badges screen.

Employee Profiles Tab

The Profiles tab is used to assign Profile Lockouts and clock access to the employee. The Profile
Lockout is first assigned to the clock, and the clock is then assigned to the employee. This makes
the clock's profile available to the employee. You are then able to choose which Profile
Schedules apply for each day of the week.

Configure Employee Profiles

1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Profiles tab to display the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 232

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 204: Configure Employee: Profiles tab

Setting Definition
Clock ID Displays the clock(s) assigned to this employee.

Access Indicates whether the employee can use this clock.

Day of Week Indicates the Profile Schedule selected for each day
of the week.

Add a Profile
An employee can have different profile configurations at different clocks. You can add the
profile for each clock individually, or to all clocks that the employee uses at once.

To a Single Clock
1. Navigate to the Profiles tab of the Configure Employee dialog box. See
Configure Employee Profiles, page 232.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Profile assignment. The Profile
Assignment Detail dialog box will open.

Figure 205: Profile Assignment Detail

3. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 233

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Clock ID Select the clock this employee will use.

Profile in Use Displays the profile assigned to the clock

selected. This field cannot be edited.
Valid Access Check this box to make this clock accessible to
the employee.
Day of Week Select the Profile Schedule desired for each day
of the week.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Profiles screen.

To All Clocks
1. Navigate to the Profiles tab of the Configure Employee dialog box. See
Configure Employee Profiles, page 232.
2. Click the All Clocks button. The All Clocks Profile Assignment Detail dialog
box will open.

Figure 206: All Clocks Profile Assignment

3. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Valid Access Check this box to make this clock
accessible to the employee.
Day of Week Select the Profile Schedule desired for
each day of the week.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Profiles screen.

Edit a Profile
1. Navigate to the Profiles tab of the Configure Employee dialog box. See
Configure Employee Profiles, page 232.
2. Highlight the profile you wish to edit.
3. Click the Edit button. The Profile Assignment Detail dialog box will open.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Add a Profile section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Profiles screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 234

Genesis SQL Manual

Delete a Profile
1. Navigate to the Profiles tab of the Configure Employee window. See
Configure Employee Profiles, page 232.
2. Highlight the Profile you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 207: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion and return to the Badges screen.

Employee Clocks Tab

The Clocks tab is used to assign Hand Readers and TA7000 clocks to employees. This is
necessary because the Hand Reader clocks take measurements of an employee’s hand and the
TA7000 clocks can be used as fingerprint clocks. Each time the employee punches, the clocks
compare the employee’s hand and/or fingerprint to the existing template. Employee information,
hand templates and fingerprints are stored in the clocks. For this reason, employees must be
assigned to a clock so their name and template will be downloaded to the correct clock.
Configure Hand Readers
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Clocks tab, then click the Hand Reader tab to display the following
information:

Figure 208: Configure Employee: Clocks tab

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 235

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Clock ID Displays the Clock ID assigned to each reader.

Badge Displays employee badge number.

Time Zone Select the Time Zone (defined on the previous

tab) that applies to this employee.
Reject The reject threshold indicates how closely the
hand has to match the original scanned hand
template. The lower the number, the more exact
the match needs to be.
Authority The Authority Level defines which clock menus
employee can view or use at the clock. 0 is the
lowest (employee) and default, 5 is the highest
and allows complete at-the-clock setup
(supervisor).
Templates on file for Displays if the employee has a hand template
Badge Numbers saved.

Retrieve Templates Enter the specific hand reader for individual

From employee template retrieval.

All Clocks This opens the All Clocks dialog box. Here you
can assign an employee to all hand readers.
Add Click this button to select hand readers
individually.
Edit Edit the settings assigned to the employee.

Delete Delete the employee hand reader assignment.

Configure TA7000
1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Clocks tab, then click the TA7000 tab to display the following
information:

Figure 209: Configure Employee: Clocks tab

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 236

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Clock ID Displays the Clock ID assigned to each clock.

Badge Displays employee badge number.

Verification Displays the verification level, which defines the

false read threshold.
Authority Displays the Authority Level, which defines the
clock menus employees can view or use at the
clock. The following options are available:
Employee, Supervisor or Configuration.
Templates on file for Displays if the employee has a fingerprint
Badge Numbers template saved.

Retrieve Templates Enter the specific clock for individual employee

From fingerprint template retrieval.

All Clocks This opens the All Clocks dialog box. Here you
can assign an employee to all TA7000 clocks.
Add Click this button to select TA7000 clocks
individually.
Edit Edit the settings assigned to the employee.

Delete Delete the employee hand reader assignment.

Employee Details Tab

The Details tab manages the employee's personnel settings. New employees are also added
from this tab.

Configure Employee Details

1. Navigate to the Configure Employee window. See Configure Employee,
page 198.
2. Click the Details tab to display the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 237

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 210: Configure Employee: Details tab

Setting Definition
Number This is a required field. Enter a code (from 2 to 10
characters in length) to identify the employee. The
code’s maximum length and type (numeric or
alphanumeric) are defined in the System Defaults
dialog box in Company Setup. Numeric fields are
zero filled.
NOTE: Once saved, the employee code cannot be
modified, except through Utilities.
Social Security Enter the employee’s social security number.

Birth date Enter the employee's birth date (if desired).

Last Name Enter the employee's last name.

First Name Enter the employee's first name.

Middle Initial Enter the employee’s middle initial.

Address Enter the employee's address. Two lines are

available.
City Enter the employee's City.

Zip Enter the employee's Zip code.

State Enter the employee's State.

Phone Enter the employee's phone number.

Email Address Enter the employee’s email address

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 238

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Hire Date Enter the employee's hire date.

Accrue this month Check this box if benefits should accrue during the
first month of employment.
Fiscal Date Enter the date on which this employee's or your
company's fiscal year starts. This date can be
used as the Reference Date on which benefits
carry over.
Use Alternative Hire Use this date to override the Hire Date field as the
Date for benefits date an employee’s benefits should begin.

User-Defined fields There are six user-defined fields. Enter information

as desired.
For more information see Configure Main
Company, page 46.
Division Select the pre-defined Division to which the
employee belongs.
Group Select the pre-defined Group to which the
employee belongs.
Accrual Rule Select the pre-defined Benefits Accrual rule that
applies to this employee.
Occurrence Select the pre-defined Occurrence Rating that
applies to this employee.
Web time zone Select the time zone the employee will be clocking
in and out of when using the WebClock.
NOTE: This is only available if the Use WebClock
option is selected.
Allow Remote/Web Allow access to the selected employee for
Access Remote/Web Access.

IP Access List Enter an IP address to give access to employees

punching on the Webclock. Wildcards are okay.

NOTE: The WebClock module must be

purchased.
Allow Remote/Web Allow access to the selected employee for
Access Remote/Web Access.

NOTE: The WebClock module must be

purchased.
Use WebClock Allow access to the selected employee for Web
Clock
View Benefits Allow the selected employee to view their benefit
balances.
View Schedule Allow the selected employee to view their
schedule.
View Timecard Allow the selected employee to view their
timecard.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 239

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
View Status Board Allow the selected employee to view the Status
Board.
Submit Time Sheet Allow the selected employee to submit work and
non-work time.
Picture Browse Genesis SQL allows you to display the employee's
button picture. Click the Browse button to select a picture.
NOTE: The picture must be in Bitmap (.bmp)
format and stored in the Images folder under the
GENESIS install directory.
NOTE: 150 x 150 pixels
Clear Password By default an employee’s password is blank.
button
If the employee forgets their password the
administrator may clear their password by pressing
this button.
Comments button Click on this button to enter text comments for the
selected employee.

Add an Employee
Genesis SQL uses an Add Employee wizard to walk you through the steps of adding a
new employee. Once you have completed the Detail screen, additional screens will open,
one after another, until all the settings for the employee are complete.

1. Navigate to the Detail tab of the Configure Employee window. See

Configure Employee Details, page 237.
2. Click the Add button to add a new Employee. The Detail tab will become
available.
3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Employees Details section.
4. Click OK to commit the changes and continue to the next screen.
5. The Status dialog box will open. See Employee Status, page 213.
6. When all settings are complete, click Close to continue to the next screen.
7. The Assignment Start Date dialog box will open. Choose the date on which
you want the employee's schedule to start.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 240

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 211: Assignment Start Date

8. When all settings are complete, click the Continue button to advance to the
next screen.
9. The Schedule dialog box will open. See Employee Schedule, page 204.
10. When all settings are complete, click the OK button to advance to the next
screen.
11. The Message Assignment dialog box will open. See Employee Messages,
page 223.
12. When all settings are complete, click the Close button to advance to the next
screen.
13. The Wage Assignment dialog box will open. See Employee Wages, page
226.
14. When all settings are complete, click the OK button to advance to the next
screen.
15. The Badge Assignment dialog box will open. See Employee Badges, page
231.
16. When all settings are complete, click the Close button to advance to the next
screen.
17. The Profile Assignment dialog box will open. See Employee Profiles, page
232.
18. When all settings are complete, click the OK button to advance to the next
screen.
19. The Clocks dialog box will open. See Employee Clocks, page 231.
20. When all settings are complete, click the OK button to advance to the next
screen.
21. You will be returned to the Detail tab of the Configure Employee window.
22. Click Close to exit the Configure Employee dialog box.
Edit an Employee
1. Navigate to the Detail tab of the Configure Employee window.
2. Highlight the Employee you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The Detail screen will become available for you to edit
the selected Employee.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Employee section.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Employee
screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 241

Genesis SQL Manual

6. Click Close to exit the Configure Employee dialog box.

Delete an Employee
Deleting an employee deletes all of the data relating to that employee throughout the
database, including time records.
NOTE: This can cause inaccurate reporting. You cannot undo a delete.
1. Navigate to the Detail tab of the Configure Employee window.
2. Highlight the Employee you wish to delete from the list at the side of the
screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 212: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Employees dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 242

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter VIII Timecard and Transaction Maintenance

This section describes the concepts and tasks associated with managing employee time
records, including editing and adding time entries.

Online Timecard
The Online Timecard allows you to view, add, edit and delete employee time entries. The
Timecard can be accessed from two locations: the Configure Employee dialog box and the
Approval Editor.
NOTE: There are slight differences between the Online Timecard tab of the Configure Employee
screen and the Online Timecard screen accessed from the Approval Editor. The Online Timecard
from the Approval Editor:
• Displays the Attendance Code flags next to the punches.
• Does not provide a way to switch to the Transactions screen.
• Does not offer a Multiple Miscellaneous button.
• Does not print exceptions in different colors.

Accessing the Online Timecard from the Configure Employee Screen

1. Click the Edit menu, Employee. The Configure Employee dialog box will
open.
2. The Timecard tab will be selected automatically.

Figure 213: Online Timecard tab (Configure Employee)

The Online Timecard week view at bottom of page now indicates holidays (italics), current date
(blue highlight) and days scheduled to work (underline date). Also a double click or right click in
the Job Costing field will display all job costing information for that slice of time. Blue
backgrounds have been added in the employee screen for easier visibility of an active feature.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 243

Genesis SQL Manual

Accessing the Online Timecard from the Approval Editor

1. Click the Edit menu, Approval Editor or click on the . The Approval
Editor dialog box will open.
2. Double-click an employee's name to open to the Online Timecard window.

Figure 214: Online Timecard (Approval Editor)

Navigating in the Online Timecard Tab

By default, the Online Timecard screen displays the current pay period's data. There are two
easy techniques for navigating to other pay periods.
NOTE: It may not be possible to edit data in previous pay periods, depending upon your security
permissions and the number of editable pay periods settings. For more information, see Main
Company, page 46, and Configure Users, page 158.

Navigation
buttons

Pay Period
selector

Figure 215: Online Timecard

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 244

Genesis SQL Manual

• Navigation buttons: Click the Navigation buttons to scroll to previous and next pay
periods. The navigation button at the top of the scroll bar takes you to the previous
pay period; the button at the bottom takes you to the next pay period.
• Pay Period selector: Use the spin button in the Pay Periods Back box to scroll to a
pay period a specified number of periods in the past.

Navigating in the Transactions tab

By default, the Transactions screen displays the current month's data. There is an easy technique
for navigating to other months.
NOTE: It may not be possible to edit data in previous months, depending upon your security
permissions and the number of editable pay period settings. For more information, see Main
Company, page 46, and Configure Users, page 158.

Navigation
buttons

Figure 216: Transactions screen

• Navigation buttons: Click the Navigation buttons to scroll to previous and next
months. The navigation button at the top of the scroll bar takes you to the previous
month; the button at the bottom takes you to the next month.

Adding and Editing Transactions

Adding a transaction enables you to record a time entry on behalf of an employee. For example,
you might need to add a missed Clock Out, add a lunch or break, or enter a vacation day.
Examples of transactions are:
Clocked In Punching In for the day.
Clocked Out Punching Out for the day.
Swipe and Go Swipe and go transaction.
Out For Lunch Punching Out for lunch.
In From Lunch Punching In from lunch.
Out On Break Punching Out for break.
In From Break Punching In from break.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 245

Genesis SQL Manual

Enter Department Transferring departments.

Enter Tips Entering tips.
Miscellaneous Miscellaneous transactions are used to add or subtract dollars or
hours, including vacation and other categories of time, as well as per
diem, tips and other categories of dollars.

There are several ways to add transactions. All accomplish the same end, but some are easier to
use in certain instances. All are described below.

Add Transaction
Transactions can be added from the Online Timecard or from the Transactions tab of the
Configure Employee dialog box. The method is the same in both locations.
This option for adding a transaction works best when you are going to manually enter all
elements of the transaction.
NOTE: A popup window is available to add/edit Start and Stop entries. The popup window can
be accessed by double clicking or a right click in the Start and Stop fields.

1. Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit. See
Online Timecard, page 243.

Or navigate to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box

and select the employee for whom you wish to add a transaction. See
Employee Transactions, page 212.
2. Click the Add Trans (Online Timecard) or Add (Transactions) button. The
Transaction Detail dialog box will open.

Figure 217: Transaction Detail

3. The Transaction Detail dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Date Enter the date for this transaction.

Time Enter the time for the transaction. HH:MM:SS. Enter

this in military time.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 246

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Function Select the type for this transaction. The standard
options are:
• Clocked In
• Clocked Out
• Out for Lunch
• In from Lunch
• Enter Department
• Enter Category
• Approve Overtime
• Swipe & Go
• Miscellaneous (used for entering absences,
vacation, tips and other categories of time
and dollars). See Add Miscellaneous
Transaction.
Additional options may appear, depending upon your
company and clock configuration.
Clock Select the clock to which the transaction should be
attributed.
Override Check this option to have Genesis SQL ignore the
Rounding rounding rules for this transaction.

Override Check this option to have Genesis SQL ignore the

Attendance Attendance flags for this transaction.

4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Online Timecard.

Add Miscellaneous Transaction

Transactions can be added from the Online Timecard or from the Transactions tab of the
Configure Employee dialog box. The method is the same in both locations.
This option for adding a transaction works best when you are going to manually enter all
elements of the transaction.
1. Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit. See
Online Timecard, page 243.

Or navigate to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box

and select the employee for whom you wish to add a transaction. See
Employee Transactions, page 212.
2. Click the Add Trans (Online Timecard) or Add (Transactions) button. The
Transaction Detail dialog box will open.
3. Select Miscellaneous from the function drop down menu, additional
information will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 247

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 218: Transaction Detail

4. The Transaction Detail dialog box contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Date Enter the date for this transaction.

Time Enter the time for the transaction. HH:MM:SS. Enter

this in military time.
Function Select Miscellaneous for this transaction. The
Miscellaneous function is used for entering absences,
vacation, tips and other categories of time and dollars.

Clock Select the clock to which the transaction should be

attributed.
Override Rounding Check this option to have Genesis SQL ignore the
rounding rules for this transaction.
Override Attendance Check this option to have Genesis SQL ignore the
Attendance flags for this transaction.
Override Automatic Check this option to cancel all automatic lunches and
Lunches and Breaks breaks assigned to a specific day. The edit must be
initiated from the start time.
Miscellaneous This section will only become available when the
Information Miscellaneous function is selected.

Category Select the category for this transaction.

Add/Subtract Select Add to add the number of hours or dollars in

the next field. Select Subtract to deduct the number
of hours or dollars in the next field.
HH:MM If an Hours category was selected, this field will
become available. Enter the number of hours for this
transaction in decimal format.
Amount If a Dollars category was selected, this field will
become available. Enter the amount of dollars for this
transaction.
If an Hours category was selected, this field will
automatically fill in when enter the HH:MM in the
previous field.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 248

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
REG/OT1/OT2/OT3 Select the rate at which the Miscellaneous time should
be paid.
Accrue towards Check this box to cause the Miscellaneous entry to
Overtime count toward overtime (daily and weekly).

Differential Select the differential at which the Miscellaneous time

should be paid.
Level Check this option to have Genesis SQL override the
Job Costing level(s).
Prompt This section will become available if a function
requiring additional input is selected (for example,
Enter a Department).
Input Enter the additional input (for example, the
Department number).

5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Online Timecard.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 249

Genesis SQL Manual

Edit a Transaction
This section describes how to use the Edit button in the Transaction tab. You can edit
transactions from either the Online Timecard or the Transactions tab of the Configure
Employee dialog box. The Online Timecard provides two buttons: Edit/Add Start and
Edit/Add Stop, which are described in the next two sections.

1. Navigate to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box and
select the employee whose time you wish to edit. See Employee
Transactions, page 212.
2. Navigate to and select the transaction you wish to edit.
3. Click the Edit button. The Transaction Detail dialog box will open.

Figure 219: Edit Transaction

4. Fill in the settings as described in the Add Transaction section.

5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Transactions screen.

Edit/Add Start
Edit/Add Start is available from the Online Timecard. The Edit/Add Start button opens
the Transaction Detail dialog box and automatically fills in certain fields.
• The Date fills in with the date selected in the Timecard.
• The Time fills in with the employee's scheduled Clock In time for the
selected date.
• The Function fills in with Clocked In.
This option is easiest when you are adding a Clock In for the day that matches or is close
to the employee's scheduled In time.

1. Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit. See
Online Timecard, page 243.
2. Click the Edit/Add Start button. The Transaction Detail dialog box will open.
3. Fill in the settings as described in the Add Transaction section.
4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Online Timecard.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 250

Genesis SQL Manual

Edit/Add Stop
Edit/Add Stop is available from the Online Timecard. The Edit/Add Stop button opens
the Transaction Detail dialog box and automatically fills in certain fields.
• The Date fills in with the date selected in the Timecard.
• The Time fills in with the employee's scheduled Clock Out time for the
selected date.
• The Function fills in with Clocked Out.
• The Override Punch Link-Back Time is now an override feature, this
option will ignore all punch link-back time associated with a policy. This
edit must be initiated from the stop time.
This option is easiest when you are adding a Clock Out for the day that matches or is
close to the employee's scheduled Out time.

1. Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit. See
Online Timecard, page 243.
2. Click the Edit/Add Stop button. The Transaction Detail dialog box will open.
3. Fill in the settings as described in the Add Transaction section.
4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Online Timecard.

Multiple Miscellaneous
The Multiple Miscellaneous button appears in the Online Time Card and allows you to
add Miscellaneous transactions on multiple days. This option is easiest when you are
adding several days of the same category, for example, for a weeklong vacation or per-
diems for a business trip.

1. Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit. See
Online Timecard, page 243.
2. Click the Multiple Misc. button. The Multiple Miscellaneous Transaction
dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 251

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 220: Multiple Miscellaneous

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 252

Genesis SQL Manual

3. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Time Enter the start time for this miscellaneous transaction. If
AM/PM are activated from Main Company will require
selection.
Category Select the category for this transaction.

Add/Subtract Select Add to add the number of hours or dollars in the

next field. Select Subtract to deduct the number of hours
or dollars in the next field.
HH:MM If an Hours category was selected, this field will become
available. Enter the number of hours for this transaction
in decimal format.
Amount If a Dollars category was selected, this field will become
available. Enter the amount of dollars for this transaction.
If an Hours category was selected, this field will
automatically fill in when enter the HH:MM in the previous
field.
REG/OT1/OT2/OT3 Select the rate at which the Miscellaneous time should be
paid.
Accrue towards Check this box to cause the Miscellaneous entry to count
Overtime toward overtime (daily and weekly).

Differential Select the differential at which the Miscellaneous time

should be paid.
Reason Select the reason code associated with this transaction.

Job Cost Level Check this option to have Genesis SQL override the Job
Override Costing level(s).

Calendar Using the drop-down boxes at the top of the dialog box,
select the Month and Year that contains the days for
which you wish to add the Miscellaneous transactions.
Click the dates on the calendar for which you wish to add
the transactions. The dates selected will appear to be
indented.

4. Click the Apply button. The Category code will appear on the days selected.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 253

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 221: Multiple Miscellaneous

5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Online Timecard.

From Schedule
From Schedule adds a Clock In for the day and a Clock Out for the day punch, taking the
times from the employee's schedule. This is useful when the employee did not punch in
or out for the day, but worked the scheduled times.
TIP: You can check the Show Schedule option at the bottom of the Online Timecard in
order to verify the scheduled Start and Stop times prior to using this feature.

1. Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit. See
Online Timecard, page 243.
2. Click the From Schedule button. Genesis SQL will automatically fill in the
Start and Stop fields with the employee's Scheduled Start and Stop times
for the day.

Figure 222: Start and Stop filled in From Schedule

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 254

Genesis SQL Manual

Delete a Transaction
You may need to delete a transaction that has been made in error. Delete carefully, as there is no
way to retrieve deleted data.

1. Navigate to the Online Timecard (see Online Timecard, page 243) or the
Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box (see Employee
Transactions, page 212) and select the employee you wish to edit.
2. Navigate to the transaction you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted with one of the following,
depending upon what you are deleting:

This dialog box will appear if you

are deleting a line in the Timecard
that has both a Start and a Stop.

This dialog box will appear if you

are deleting a single Start or Stop,
from either the Timecard or the
Transactions.

Audit Trails
Genesis SQL keeps track of the changes that are made to time entries. This feature is known as
an "Audit Trail." The Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box displays the changes
made to a transaction, the date the change was made, and the name and number of the person
who made the change. This information can be printed for reporting purposes.

1. Navigate to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee window and

select the employee you wish to view.
2. Highlight the transaction for which you wish to see the Audit Trail.
3. The Audit Trail section of the screen contains the following:

Figure 223: Audit Trail

Setting Definition
Supervisor Displays the name and number of the supervisor
who edited this transaction.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 255

Genesis SQL Manual

Supervisor Badge Displays the badge number associated with the

Supervisor who made the edit.
Date Displays the Date on which the edit was made.

Time Displays the Time at which the edit was made.

Print the Audit Trails

Genesis SQL tracks all changes that are made to time entries. You may print this Audit
Trail history.

1. Navigate to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee window and

select the employee you wish to view.
2. Highlight the transaction for which you wish to see the Audit Trail.
3. Click the Print button. A drop-down list of Reports associated with this
screen will appear.

Figure 224: Printing Audit Trails

4. Select Transactions, By Employee or By Date. The Print Transaction

Listing dialog box will open.

Figure 225: Print Transaction Listing

5. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 256

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Start Enter the starting date for the report.

At Enter the starting time for the report.

Stop Enter the ending date for the report.

At Enter the ending time for the report

Output to Select the type of report output you wish.

Screen: The report will preview on screen.
You are then able to print from the preview.
Printer: The report will be sent directly to the
printer.
File: The report will be sent to a FoxPro
report file.
Email: The report will be sent via email. (See
Emailing a Report, page 289).
Options Select which Audit Trail items you wish to
print along with the Transaction details.
Deleted: The report will display deleted
entries.
Changed: The report will display the editing
history of the transaction.
Supervisor: The report will display
transactions edited by supervisors at the
clock.
Employees Select which employees for whom you wish
to print Transactions.
Add: Adds the selected employee to the list
of employees for the report.
Add All: Adds all employees to the list of
employees for the report.
Remove: Removes the selected employee
from the list of employees for the report.
Remove All: Removes all employees from
the list of employees for the report.

6. Click OK to commit the changes and run the report.

7. After previewing and/or printing, close the report (if necessary).
NOTE: The transaction report is color coded with red representing deleted
items and blue representing changes.
8. Click the Close button to exit the Report Settings dialog box and return to the
Transactions screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 257

Genesis SQL Manual

Approval Editor
The Approval Editor is an extremely useful tool that displays employee transactions that need
approval or editing by a supervisor. These items display in the Approval Editor by default:
• System-Generated Absences
• Missing Punches
You can choose to have attendance infractions appear in the Approval Editor as well. See
Configure Attendance Codes, page 63. Some examples of additional items you may wish to
have display are:
• In Late
• Out Early
• Long or Short Lunches or Breaks
It is also possible to edit transactions directly from the Approval Editor. Double-clicking a
transaction from the Approval Editor opens the Online Timecard, from which you can add, edit
and delete transactions normally.

1. Click the Edit menu, Approval Editor, or by clicking on the . The

Approval Editor screen will open.

Figure 226: Approval Editor

2. The Approval Editor contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Absences Select this option to show only Absent Exceptions needing
approval.
Missing Select this option to show only Missing Punch Exceptions
needing approval.
Attendance Select this option to show only Attendance Infractions
needing approval (such as In Late or Out Early).
Requests Select this option to show only pending Leave Request.

All Select this option to show all Absences, Missing Punches,

Attendance Infractions, Leave Requests and all other
Exceptions.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 258

Genesis SQL Manual

Name Displays the employee's name.

Number Displays the employee's number.

Dow Displays the day of the week on which the item needing
approval occurred.
Date Displays the date on which the item needing approval
occurred.
Time Displays the time at which the item needing approval
occurred.
Code Displays the Attendance Code for any infractions. (i.e., IL for
In Late, OG for Out Graced, etc.).
Reason Displays the reason in color why the transaction is displayed
in the Approval Editor
Show Count Displays the number of infractions next to the label.
Totals

Active Select this option to show only Active employees.

Inactive Select this option to show only Inactive employees.

All Employees Select this option to show both Active and Inactive
employees.
Group Select this option to display a specific Group.

Division Select this option to display a specific Division.

3. To edit a transaction from the Approval Editor, double-click the transaction

you wish to change.

The Online Timecard will open to display the pay period during which the
transaction took place.

Figure 227: Online Timecard (from Approval Editor)

4. Add, edit or delete the transaction as needed. For more information on these
tasks, see Adding and Editing Transactions, page 245, and Deleting a
Transaction, page 255.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 259

Genesis SQL Manual

5. To edit or view the schedule, click on the Schedule tab. For more
information on editing a schedule see Employee Schedule Tab, page 204.
6. To edit or view the transactions, click on the Transaction tab. For more
information on editing a schedule see Employee Transactions Tab, page
212.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 260

Genesis SQL Manual

Status Board
The Status Board screen is a useful tool that displays the Status Board for recorded for each
employee within a certain time range (for example, in the last 18 hours). This is an excellent way
to find out the current whereabouts of your employees. The data displayed in the screen is for
information purposes only and cannot be edited.
NOTE: If an employee has not punched within the time range specified no data will appear next
to his or her name.

1. Click the Edit menu, Status Board. The Status Board screen will open. You
may select a specific type of status to view or select All to display each status
available.

Figure 228: Status Board

2. The Status Board screen contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Number Displays the number of the employee.

Name Displays the name of the employee.

Status The different color squares indicate the current

status of the employee.
NOTE: The status is only as accurate as the last
time it polled the clocks.
Date & Time Displays the day and time of the last punch
recorded.
Clock Displays the clock at which the punch occurred.

Key Displays the function key on the clock pressed.

Prompt Displays the prompt associated with the function

key pressed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 261

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Data Field 1 Displays the code for any data that the employee
was prompted to enter. For example, PRD1 for
per diem, TIP1 For tips, etc.
Data Field 2 Displays the code for any data that the employee
was prompted to enter. For example, PRD1 for
per diem, TIP1 For tips, etc.
Hours Back Enter the number of hours in the past you wish
Genesis SQL to look for the last punch. The
default is 18 hours, indicating that the Status
Board screen will show all transactions that have
occurred in the last 18 hours.
All Select this option to display all employees,
regardless of whether they have punched within
the Hours Back time range.
Punches Select this option to display only employees who
have punched within the Hours Back time range.
No Punches Select this option to display only employees who
have not punched within the Hours Back time
range.
Group Select a Group to only view employees assigned
to that Group.
Division Select a Division to only view employees
assigned to that Division.
Print button Print the Status Board report.

3. Click Close to exit the Status Board window.

Task Organizer
The Task Organizer is an extremely useful tool that allows the user to walk through the necessary
steps that should be performed for a specific period of time, such as Daily, Monthly, Annual,
Payroll and System Setup.
1. Click the Edit menu, Task Organizer. The Task Organizer screen will open.

2. The Task Organizer screen contains the following links:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 262

Genesis SQL Manual

• Daily
• Monthly
• Annual
• Payroll
• System Setup

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 263

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter IX Global Commands

This section describes commands and tasks that can be performed for many employees at
once. These tasks include Global Message Assignment, Schedule Assignment and
Changes, Profile Assignment and Transaction additions.

Figure 229: Global Menu

Selecting Employees in Global Operation Dialog Boxes

The method of selecting employees is the same in nearly all of the Global Operation (as well as
the Report Parameter) dialog boxes. For ease of use, the technique is described here and
referenced in the instructions below.
There are four ways to select employees: Individually, Globally, by Group, and by Division.

Figure 230: Selecting Employees

Select Employees Individually

1. Select the Employee you wish to choose.
2. Click the Add button. The employee will appear in the Selected list on the
right.
Select Employees Globally
1. Click the Add All button. All employees will appear in the Selected list on the
right.
Select Employees by Group
1. Click the Group button. The Group Selection dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 264

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 231: Group Selection

2. Use the drop-down to select in the From box to select the first Group you
wish to choose.
3. Use the drop-down to select in the To box to select the first Group you wish
to choose. (TIP: To choose a single group, select the same Group in both
boxes).
4. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the dialog box. All employees
in the selected Groups will appear in the Selected list on the right.

Select Employees by Division

1. Click the Division button. The Division Selection dialog box will open.

Figure 232: Division Selection

2. Use the drop-down to select in the From box to select the first Division you
wish to choose.
3. Use the drop-down to select in the To box to select the first Division you wish
to choose. (TIP: To choose a single Division, select the same Division in both
boxes).
4. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the dialog box. All employees
in the selected Division will appear in the Selected list on the right.

Global Message Assignment

Global Message Assignment allows you to create a customized message that will display when
employees punch at the clock. This is an easy way to send the same message to multiple
employees at once. For example, you might send a message that says "Welcome" or display the
employee's name after punching.

1. Click the Edit menu, Global, Message Assignment. The Global Message
Assignment dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 265

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 233: Global Message Assignment

2. Select the employee(s) to whom you wish to send the message using the
techniques described above (see Selecting Employees in Global
Operation Dialog Boxes, page 264).
3. Click the Details button. The Global Message Assignment Details dialog box
will open.

Figure 234: Global Message Assignment Details

4. Select the clock(s) to which the message should be sent by click Add to
select a single clock, or Add All to select all clocks.
5. Check Default message to Employee name or enter the Message you
wish to send. The Message can be up to 20 characters long (this is the
maximum number of characters that can display on the LCD panel of the
clock).
6. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Global Message
Assignment dialog box.
7. Click OK to send the message. The message will display to employees after
it is uploaded to the clock.
8. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Global Profile Assignment

Global Profile Assignment is used to assign Profile Lockouts and clock access to multiple
employees. The Profile Lockout is first assigned to the clock, and the clock is then assigned to
the employees. This makes the clock's profile available to the employees. You are then able to
choose which Profile Schedules apply for each day of the week.

1. Click the Edit menu, Global, Profile Assignment. The Global Profile
Assignment dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 266

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 235: Global Profile Assignment

2. Select the employee(s) you wish to assign using the techniques described
above (see Selecting Employees in Global Operation Dialog Boxes, page
264).
3. Click the Details button. The Global Profile Assignment Details dialog box
will open.

Figure 236: Global Profile Assignment Details

4. Fill in the settings as described in the Employee Profiles section, page 232.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Global Profile Assignment
dialog box.
6. Click OK again to complete the assignment.
7. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Global Schedule One Day Assignment

The Global Schedule One Day Assignment is used to assign multiple employees to the same
Shift, Department, Job, Step, Operation, and Task (if applicable) for one day. This can be useful if
you need an entire Group to come in on Saturday or work a special shift for a project, etc.

1. Click the Edit menu, Global, Schedule One-Day Assignment. The Global
Schedule One Day Assignment dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 267

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 237: Global Schedule One-Day Assignment

2. Select the employee(s) you wish to assign using the techniques described
above (see Selecting Employees in Global Operation Dialog Boxes, page
264).
3. Click the Details button. The Global Schedule One Day Details dialog box
will open.

Figure 238: Global Schedule One-Day Details

4. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Date Enter the date on which this schedule
assignment should take place.
Insert Shift Select the pre-defined Shift to be assigned.

Insert Department Select the Department in which the

employees will work.
Insert Job Select the Job on which the employees will
work.
Insert Step Select the Step on which the employees will
work.
Insert Operation Select the Operation on which the employees
will work.
Insert Task Select the Task on which the employees will
work.
Insert Working Check this box to indicate that the employees
will work on the date selected.
Scheduled to Work Check this box to indicate if the employees
are scheduled to work.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 268

Genesis SQL Manual

5. Click the Close button to commit the changes and return to the Global
Schedule One Day Assignment dialog box.
6. Click OK to complete the assignment.
7. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Global Schedule Copy

Global Schedule Copy allows you to copy a pre-defined Schedule Template to multiple
employees at once.

1. Click the Edit menu, Global, Schedule Copy. The Global Schedule Copy
dialog box will open.

Figure 239: Global Schedule Copy

2. Select the employee(s) you wish to assign using the techniques described
above (see Selecting Employees in Global Operation Dialog Boxes, page
264).
3. Click the Details button. The Global Schedule Copy Details dialog box will
open.

Figure 240: Global Schedule Copy Details

4. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Number Displays the number of the pre-defined
Schedule Template(s) available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 269

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Template Name Displays the name of the pre-defined
Schedule Template(s) available.
Display Button Click this button to view the details of the
selected Template.
Fast Copy (all) Check this box to copy all available Schedule
elements.
What to Copy These settings allow choosing which
Schedule elements will be copied, and will
only be available if Fast Copy is unchecked.
Shift Info Check this box to copy Shift Info (daily Start
and Stop times)
Work Check this box to copy which days are
expected to be worked.
Department Check this box to copy Department
assignments.
Job Check this box to copy Job assignments.

Step Check this box to copy Step assignments.

Operation Check this box to copy Operation

assignments.
Task Check this box to copy Task assignments.

Define Copy These settings determine the date range to

be copied to.
Starting Week Enter the day you wish the copied schedule
to start.
Ending Week Enter the day you wish the copied schedule
to end.
Copy Ongoing Check this option to cause Genesis SQL to
automatically copy the template on an
ongoing into the future.

5. Click the OK button to commit the changes and return to the Global
Schedule Copy dialog box.
6. Click OK again to complete the assignment.
7. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Global Status Assignment

Global Status Assignment allows you to assign multiple employees to a status area, such as
Status, Work Week, Work Type and Policy.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 270

Genesis SQL Manual

1. Click the Edit menu, Global, Status Assignment. The Global Status
Assignment dialog box will open.

Figure 241: Global Status Assignment

2. Select the employee(s) you wish to assign using the techniques described
above (see Selecting Employees in Global Operation Dialog Boxes, page
264).
3. Click the Details button. The Global Status Assignment Details dialog box
will open.

Figure 242: Global Status Assignment Details

4. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Date Enter the date that this Status change
becomes effective.
Insert Status Choose whether the employees are Active or
Inactive as of the selected date.
Active indicates that the employees are
currently working for the company.
Inactive indicates that the employees are not
currently working for the company, perhaps
because of a leave of absence or termination.
Insert Work Week Choose whether the employees are Full
Time or Part Time as of the selected date.
Insert Work Type Choose whether the employees are
Permanent or Temporary as of the selected
date.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 271

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Insert Policy Select the Policy that will apply to all
employees as of the effective date.

5. Click the OK button to commit the changes and return to the Global Status
Assignment dialog box.
6. Click OK again to complete the assignment.
7. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Multiple Schedule Adjuster

The Multiple Schedule Adjuster allows you to adjust the schedule for more than one employee
from one screen. You will still adjust each person’s schedule individually, but you will not need to
change screens to move from employee to employee.

1. Click the Edit menu, Global, Multiple Schedule Adjuster. The Multiple
Schedule Adjuster dialog box will open.

Figure 243: Multiple Schedule Adjuster

2. Select the employee whose schedule you wish to edit.

3. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

NOTE: A popup window is available to edit shifts and perform

shift overrides. The popup window can be accessed by double
clicking in the shift field.

Setting Definition
Date Indicates the date to be edited. These fill in
automatically based on the week selected at the
bottom of the dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 272

Genesis SQL Manual

Shift Selector Select the Shift assigned to each day of the week.

Work Box Check this box to indicate whether or not the

employee is scheduled to work that day and it will
display how many paid hours are forecasted.
Level button Defaults to Department. Clicking the button will
change the purpose of the Level Input box. The first
time you click the button, it will change to Job, then
to Step, then to Operation, then to Task, then back
to Department.
Select the Level for which you wish to enter input.
Level Input Select the Department, Job, Step, Operation, or
box Task assigned for each day. The values available
will depend upon the Level shown on the Level
button to the left.
Override Enter the start and stop schedule change time for
rounding rule purposes only.
Update Click this button if you wish to apply the schedule
Forward changes into the future.

Schedule Displays a list of employees and their currently

Display assigned schedule for the week.

Listed Displays the number of employees included in the

Multiple Schedule Adjuster.
Total Gives the total number of hours that each employee
Scheduled is scheduled to work.

Totals Gives the total number of hours by day and by week

that all the employees are scheduled to work.
Week Allows you to select the week for which you wish to
adjust the schedule.
Group Allows you to filter the employee list by Group.
Select the Group you wish to view.
Division Allows you to filter the employee list by Division.
Select the division you wish to view.

4. Repeat steps 2 through 3 for each employee you wish to change.

5. Click Print to view a report defined by Department, Job or Step.
6. Click Close to exit the Multiple Schedule Adjuster dialog box.

Global Add Transaction

Global Add Transaction allows you to add a transaction of any type for multiple employees. This
can be used to clock all employees out at a certain time, enter vacation or sick time for multiple
employees, etc.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 273

Genesis SQL Manual

1. Click the Edit menu, Global, Transactions. The Global Add Transaction
dialog box will open.

Figure 244: Global Add Transaction

2. Select the employee(s) you wish to assign using the techniques described
above (see Selecting Employees in Global Operation Dialog Boxes, page
264).
3. Click the Punch button. The Global Add Transaction Details dialog box will
open.

Figure 245: Global Add Transaction Details

4. Fill in the settings as described in the Adding and Editing Transactions

section, page 245.
5. Click the OK button to commit the changes and return to the Global Add
Transaction dialog box.
6. Click OK again to complete the entry.
7. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Global IP Access
Global IP Access is used to assign IP Addresses to employees punching on the Webclock.
Wildcards are okay.
1. Click the Edit menu, Global, IP Access. The Global IP Access Assignment
dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 274

Genesis SQL Manual

2. Select the employee(s) you wish to assign using the techniques described
above (see Selecting Employees in Global Operation Dialog Boxes, page
264).
3. Click the Details button. The Global IP Access Details dialog box will open.

4. Fill in the appropriate IP Address, wildcards are okay.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 275

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter X Reports
Genesis SQL has more than 300 available reports. In the interest of brevity, this section
will focus on the concepts and techniques associated with running reports and listings
rather than on the specifics of running every one of the reports.
Listings are a type of report that "lists" the items and settings in your Genesis SQL
database. Listings are good to print for reference information. Examples are listings of
Departments, Policies, Rounding rules, Clocks, etc.

Figure 246: Reports Menu

Important Information on Printing Reports

Genesis SQL prints reports to the printer that is currently defined for the program under File,
Print. By default, this is the same as the Windows default printer. If you wish to choose a different
printer, you must make the change prior to running the report, as the Report Print command
sends the report directly to the printer without prompting you to choose a printer.
The following instructions describe how to change your Genesis SQL printer.

Configure Printer
1. Click the File menu, Print. The Print Setup dialog box will open.

Figure 247: Print Setup

2. Using the Name drop-down box, select the pre-defined printer to which you
wish to print.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 276

Genesis SQL Manual

3. Click OK to commit the changes and exit the dialog box. The Genesis SQL
printer will be changed and reports will now print to it.

Running a Report
The basics of running reports are the same from report to report. Some reports may prompt for
additional information that is particular to that specific report, but most have standard settings.
The Reports are organized into categories to make them easier to find. The categories are:
• Payroll: Hours Paid, Timesheet, and other Payroll oriented reports.
• Attendance: Who's In, Who's Not In and other Attendance oriented reports.
• Exceptions: Absences, Missing Punches, and other Exception oriented reports
• Human Resources: Benefits, Seniority and other Human Resources reports.
• Schedule: Who's Scheduled, Coverage and other Schedule reports.
• Wage: Employee, Division, Group Wages and other Pay oriented reports
• Exports: Payroll exports
• Job Costing: Labor Distribution, Piece Wage and other Job oriented reports
• Access: Who was Granted Access and other building access reports.
• Listings: Lists and setup definitions for your Genesis SQL configuration.
Most reports can be run by Range (allowing you to select a range of items or employees) or
Individual (allowing you to selecting individual employees or groups of employees). Both methods
are described below.

Running a Report by Range

1. Click the Reports button to display the report categories.

2. Select the category in which you wish to search. The Select Report list for
that category will appear.
NOTE: The Location feature allows you to move a report from one report
category to another.

Figure 248: Example: Select Report dialog box

3. Select the report you wish to run.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 277

Genesis SQL Manual

4. Select the Ranges option.

5. Click the Run button. The Report Parameter Selection dialog box will open.

Figure 249: Report Parameter Selection

6. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Pay Period Select this option to run the report for a
pay period. You will need to fill in the rest
of the pay period options that become
available when the option is selected.
Policy: Select the policy that contains the
pay period definition you wish to use.
Pay Periods Back: Enter the number of
pay periods in the past for which to run the
report Verify the dates shown in the Start
and Stop fields.
TIP: Entering 0 will run the report for the
current pay period.
Pay Periods Back Enter the number of pay periods in the
past for which to run the report Verify the
dates shown in the Start and Stop fields.
TIP: Entering 0 will run the report for the
current pay period.
Select Click this button to select the Policy that
contains the pay period definition you wish
to use.
Policy Displays the number of the selected Policy

Period Displays the pay period frequency (weekly,

biweekly, etc.).
Special Select this option to enter the date range
manually.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 278

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Start The purpose of this field changes
depending upon which Date Range option
has been chosen.
If Special is chosen, enter the first date
you wish to display on the report.
If Pay Period is chosen, this field will
display the first date of the selected pay
period.
If Yesterday or Today are chosen, this
field will display Yesterday or Today's date.
Stop The purpose of this field changes
depending upon which Date Range option
has been chosen.
If Special is chosen, enter the last date
you wish to display on the report.
If Pay Period is chosen, this field will
display the last date of the selected pay
period.
If Yesterday or Today are chosen, this
field will display Yesterday or Today's date.
Yesterday Select this option to choose yesterday's
date.
Today Select this option to choose today's date.

Forecasting Check this box to include hours forecasted

from schedule (not worked yet) on the
reports.
Reprocess Check this box to reprocess punch
information prior to running the report.
NOTE: This significantly slows down the
running of the report and is unnecessary if
you already have AutoProcessing turned
on.
Employees Select which type of employees you wish
to be included on the report.
Active: The report will print only Active
employees.
Inactive: The report will print only Inactive
employees.
Both: The report will print both Active and
Inactive employees.
All Check All to indicate that you wish all
items in a collection to be printed.
Range Check Range to indicate that you wish to
choose a range of items.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 279

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Employees Select the employees for whom you wish
to print the report. If you have chosen
Range, select the starting and ending
employees. Genesis SQL will print all
employees between the selected
individuals (inclusive).
Departments Select the Departments for which you wish
to print the report. If you have chosen
Range, select the starting and ending
Departments. Genesis SQL will print
employees in all Departments between the
selected items (inclusive).
Divisions Select the Divisions for which you wish to
print the report. If you have chosen Range,
select the starting and ending Division.
Genesis SQL will print employees in all
Divisions between the selected items
(inclusive).
Groups Select the Groups for which you wish to
print the report. If you have chosen Range,
select the starting and ending Groups.
Genesis SQL will print employees in all
Groups between the selected items
(inclusive).

7. When all settings are complete, click OK to proceed to the Additional

Reporting Parameters dialog box.

Figure 250: Additional Reporting Parameters

8. The Additional Parameters dialog allows you to further filter and group report
data. Fill in the settings as appropriate:
Setting Definition
Status These settings allow you filter which
employees' data will be printed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 280

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Full Time/Part Time/Both Check Full Time to print only employees
whose Status is Full Time.
Check Part Time to print only employees
whose Status is Part Time.
Check Both to print both Full Time and Part
Time employees.
Permanent/Temporary/Both Check Permanent to print only employees
whose Status is Permanent.
Check Temporary to print only employees
whose Status is Temporary.
Check Both to print both Permanent and
Temporary employees.
Hourly/Salary Check Hourly to print only employees
whose Status is Hourly.
Check Salary to print only employees
whose Status is Salary.
Check Both to print both Hourly and Salary
employees.
Sort By Select the setting by which you want
employee records to sort. The options are
Number (Employee ID Number) or Name.
Group By Select the setting by which you want
employee records to group (organize). The
options are None, Department, Division
and Group.
Output to Select the media to which you wish to
output the report. The options are:
Screen: The report will preview on screen.
You are then able to print from the preview.
Printer: The report will be sent directly to
the printer.
File: The report will be sent to a FoxPro
report file.
Email: The report will be sent via email. If
you choose this option, you will be given an
additional screen to enter the email
recipients. (See Emailing a Report, page
289).
Email (Employee): The report will be sent
via email. If you choose this option, you will
be given an additional screen to select the
employee.
NOTE: Reports can only be Emailed via
Microsoft Outlook.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 281

Genesis SQL Manual

9. When all settings are complete, click the OK button to run the report.

NOTE: Some reports may prompt for additional information particular to the
specific report at this point. You may also be prompted for Email recipient
information, if you choose to send the report via email.
10. The report will output to your choice (Screen, Printer, File or Email.)
11. After receiving the report, click the Close button until you have exited all the
dialog boxes.

Running a Report by Individual

1. Click Reports to display the report categories.
2. Select the category in which you wish to search. The Select Report list for
that category will appear.
NOTE: The Location feature allows you to move a report from one report
category to another.

Figure 251: Example: Select Report dialog box

3. Highlight the report you wish to run.

4. Select the Individuals option.
5. Click the Run button. The Report Parameter Selection dialog box will open.

Figure 252: Report Parameter Selection

6. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 282

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Pay Period Select this option to run the report for a pay
period. You will need to fill in the rest of the
pay period options that become available
when the option is selected.
Policy: Select the policy that contains the
pay period definition you wish to use.
Pay Periods Back: Enter the number of pay
periods in the past for which to run the report
Verify the dates shown in the Start and Stop
fields.
TIP: Entering 0 will run the report for the
current pay period.
Pay Periods Back Enter the number of pay periods in the past
for which to run the report Verify the dates
shown in the Start and Stop fields.
TIP: Entering 0 will run the report for the
current pay period.
Select Click this button to select the Policy that
contains the pay period definition you wish to
use.
Policy Displays the number of the selected Policy

Period Displays the pay period frequency (weekly,

biweekly, etc.).
Special Select this option to enter the date range
manually.
Start The purpose of this field changes depending
upon which Date Range option has been
chosen.
If Special is chosen, enter the first date you
wish to display on the report.
If Pay Period is chosen, this field will display
the first date of the selected pay period.
If Yesterday or Today are chosen, this field
will display Yesterday or Today's date.
Stop The purpose of this field changes depending
upon which Date Range option has been
chosen.
If Special is chosen, enter the last date you
wish to display on the report.
If Pay Period is chosen, this field will display
the last date of the selected pay period.
If Yesterday or Today are chosen, this field
will display Yesterday or Today's date.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 283

Genesis SQL Manual

Yesterday Select this option to choose yesterday's date.

Today Select this option to choose today's date.

Forecasting Check this box to include hours forecasted

from schedule (not worked yet) on the
reports.
Reprocess Check this box to reprocess punch
information prior to running the report.
NOTE: This significantly slows down the
running of the report and is unnecessary if
you already have AutoProcessing turned on.
Employees Select which type of employees you wish to
be included on the report.
Active: The report will print only Active
employees.
Inactive: The report will print only Inactive
employees.
Both: The report will print both Active and
Inactive employees.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 284

Genesis SQL Manual

7. Select the employee(s) for whom you wish to run the report.

There are four ways to select employees: Individually, Globally, by Group,

and by Division.

Select Employees In Reports

Select Employees Individually
• Double-click the Employee you wish to choose. The Employee will be added to
the Selected list on the right.
Select Employees Globally
• Click the Add All button. All employees will appear in the Selected list on the
right.
Select Employees by Group
• Click the Group button. The Group Selection dialog box will open.

Figure 253: Group Selection

• Use the drop-down to select in the From box to select the first Group you wish to
choose.
• Use the drop-down to select in the To box to select the first Group you wish to
choose. (TIP: To choose a single group, select the same Group in both boxes).
• Click OK to accept the changes and return to the dialog box. All employees in the
selected Groups will appear in the Selected list on the right.
Select Employees by Division
• Click the Division button. The Division Selection dialog box will open.

Figure 254: Division Selection

• Use the drop-down to select in the From box to select the first Division you wish
to choose.
• Use the drop-down to select in the To box to select the first Division you wish to
choose. (TIP: To choose a single Division, select the same Division in both
boxes).
• Click OK to accept the changes and return to the dialog box. All employees in the
selected Divisions will appear in the Selected list on the right.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 285

Genesis SQL Manual

8. When all settings are complete, click OK to proceed to the Additional

Reporting Parameters dialog box.

Figure 255: Additional Reporting Parameters

9. The Additional Parameters dialog box allows you to further filter and group
report data. Fill in the settings as appropriate:
Setting Definition
Status These settings allow you filter which
employees' data will be printed.
Full Time/Part Time/Both Check Full Time to print only employees
whose Status is Part Time.
Check Part Time to print only employees
whose Status is Full Time.
Check Both to print both Full Time and Part
Time employees.
Permanent/Temporary/Both Check Permanent to print only employees
whose Status is Permanent.
Check Temporary to print only employees
whose Status is Temporary.
Check Both to print both Permanent and
Temporary employees.
Hourly/Salary Check Hourly to print only employees whose
Status is Hourly.
Check Salary to print only employees whose
Status is Salary.
Check Both to print both Hourly and Salary
employees.
Sort By Select the setting by which you want
employee records to sort. The options are
Number (Employee ID Number) or Name.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 286

Genesis SQL Manual

Group By Select the setting by which you want

employee records to group (organize). The
options are None, Department, Division
and Group.
Output to Select the media to which you wish to output
the report. The options are:
Screen: The report will preview on screen.
You are then able to print from the preview.
Printer: The report will be sent directly to the
printer.
File: The report can be created in several file
types including RTF, PDF and Excel.
Email: The report will be sent via email. If
you choose this option, you will be given an
additional screen to enter the email
recipients. (See Emailing a Report, page
289).
Email (Employee): The report will be sent
via email. If you choose this option, you will
be given an additional screen to select the
employee.

10. When all settings are complete, click the OK button to run the report.

NOTE: At this point some reports may prompt for additional information
particular to that specific report. You may also be prompted for Email
recipient information, if you choose to send a report via email.
11. The report will output to your choice (Screen, Printer, File or Email.)
12. After receiving the report, click the Close button until you have exited all the
dialog boxes.

On Screen Report Preview

If you chose to output the report to Screen, a Report Preview window will open. This window will
display the report as it will be printed and allows you to print directly from this window.

1. Run the report of your choice, selecting Output to Screen. See Running a
Report, page 277.
2. The Report Designer window for the selected report will open to preview your
report.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 287

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 256: Example: On Screen Report Preview

Figure 257: Print Toolbar

3. The Report Preview window contains several tool buttons. Reading from left
to right, these are:
Setting Definition
First Page Click this button to navigate to the first page
of a multi-page report.
Previous Page Click this button to navigate to the previous
page in a multi-page report.
Go To Page Click this button to enter the page to which
you wish to go.
Next Page Click this button to navigate to the next page
in a multi-page report.
Last Page Click this button to navigate to the last page
of a multi-page report.
Zoom Use this box to change the zoom percentage
of the report to show more or less of the
report on screen.
Close Preview Click this button to exit the Report Preview
screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 288

Genesis SQL Manual

Print Click this button to print the report to the

printer currently selected under File, Print.
(See Important Information on Printing
Reports, page 276).

4. Click the Close Preview button to exit the Report Preview screen.
5. Click the Close button until you have exited all the dialog boxes.

Emailing a Report
Genesis SQL allows you to email reports in Adobe Acrobat format using the email program
currently configured on your computer. Genesis SQL will attach the report to an email and place it
in the outgoing email queue of your email program. Your email program will then be responsible
for sending the email. The title of the email will be the same as the report you have chosen, and
the text of the message will include the date and time at which the report was run.
When you output a report to email, you will be asked to fill in the email addresses of the
recipients.

1. Run the report of your choice, selecting Output to Email. (See Running a
Report, page 277.) The Email Recipients dialog box will open.

Figure 258: Email Recipients

2. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Recipient List Displays a list of the recipients to whom
you've sent reports to in the past.
Add Button Click this button to add a new recipient. You
will be prompted to enter the person's name
and email address.
Edit Button Click this button to edit an existing recipient's
information. You will be prompted to enter
the person's name and email address.
Delete Button Click this button to delete an existing
recipient's information.
To Button Click this button to add the selected recipient
to the To: field of your email.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 289

Genesis SQL Manual

CC Button Click this button to add the selected recipient

to the CC: (Courtesy Copy) field of your
email.
BCC Button Click this button to add the selected recipient
to the BCC: (Blind Courtesy Copy) field of
your email.
Remove Button Click this button to remove a recipient added
in error.

3. When all recipients are added, click the OK button to send the email. You will
see a "Processing email" message, but the email will not appear on screen.
4. After the email is processed, click the Close button until you have exited all
the dialog boxes.
5. You can view the sent email from the sent mail folder of your email program
(for example, MS Outlook's Sent Items folder). The email will appear
something like this:

Figure 259: Example: Emailed Report

Report Editor
The Report Editor allows you to:
• Save a report to a new name for editing.
• Make modifications to a report.
• Move a report to another reports category.
• Delete a report that has been saved to another name. (You cannot delete a standard
report that comes with the system).
Not all reports can be modified or copied. If a report can be edited, the appropriate buttons will
become available automatically.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 290

Genesis SQL Manual

NOTE: The Report Editor uses FoxPro's report editing tools, which are beyond the scope of this
manual. If you wish to create new reports or make extensive modifications to an existing report,
you should become proficient with FoxPro's report editor.

Report Maintenance
1. Click the Reports menu, Report Editor, Maintenance. The Report
Maintenance Selection window will open.

Figure 260: Report Maintenance Selection

2. The Report Maintenance Selection dialog box contains the following

information:
Setting Definition
Report Listing Displays a listing of all the reports in you
Genesis SQL database.
Location Button Allows you to change the report category
under which the report appears.
Save As Button Allows you to copy a report (in order to
create a new one, etc.).
Modify Button Allows you to change an existing report.

Delete Button Allows you to delete a custom report (you

cannot delete the standard reports).

Relocate a Report
Genesis SQL allows you to move a report from one report category to another. For
example, you might want the Who's Not In report to appear in the Exceptions category
rather than the Attendance category.

1. Navigate to the Report Editor. See Report Editor, page 290.

2. Highlight the report you wish to relocate.
3. Click the Location button. The Location dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 291

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 261: Report Location

4. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Code Displays the code for the selected report.

Name Displays the current name of the report. You

may edit this setting to change the display
name of the report.
Sort Order Enter a number that indicates where in the
list of reports this item will appear (1 for the
top, 2 for the second position down, etc.).
Menu Select the report category under which you
wish this report to appear.
NOTE: Choosing None removes the report
from the menu entirely, but retains the report
definition in case you wish to reinstate it
later.

5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Report Maintenance

Selection screen.
6. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Copy a Report
Copying a report enables you to create a new report that builds upon an existing report
(so you don't have to reinvent the wheel).

1. Navigate to the Report Editor. See Report Editor, page 290.

2. Highlight the report you wish to copy.
3. Click the Save As button. The Save As dialog box will open.

NOTE: Not all reports can be copied. The Save As button will only be
available for reports that can be copied.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 292

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 262: Report Save As

4. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Code Displays the code for the selected report.

Name Displays the current display name of the

report. You may edit this setting to change
the display name of the report.
Sort Order Enter a number that indicates where in the
list of reports this item will appear (1 for the
top, 2 for the second position down, etc.).
File Name Enter the file name under which this report
should be saved. The name must be 4
characters or more. Do not enter a file
extension, as Genesis SQL will assign it
automatically.
Menu Select the report category under which you
wish this report to appear.
NOTE: Choosing None removes the report
from the menu entirely, but retains the report
definition in case you wish to reinstate it
later.

5. Click OK to commit the changes.

6. The Confirm Save screen will open. This screen notifies you of the file
names associated with your copied report. More than one file name may
appear, as each indicates a slightly different sorting and grouping order for
the report.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 293

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 263: Confirm Save

7. Click OK to confirm the save and return to the Report Maintenance Selection
screen. Your new report will be selected in the list.
8. You may now modify the report as desired. See below.

Modify a Report
You can modify existing or copied reports.
NOTE: The Report Editor uses FoxPro's report editing tools, which are beyond the scope
of this manual. If you wish to create new reports or make extensive modifications to an
existing report, you should become proficient with FoxPro's report editor.

1. Navigate to the Report Editor dialog box. See Report Editor, page 290.
2. Highlight the report you wish to modify.
3. Click the Modify button. The Modify Report Selection dialog box will open.

NOTE: Not all reports can be modified. The Modify button will only be
available for reports that can be copied.

Figure 264: Modify Report Selection

4. Highlight the report you wish to modify and click the Edit button. The Report
Designer window will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 294

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 265: Report Designer

5. Modify the report definition as desired.

6. When all changes are complete, close the Report Designer window (saving if
necessary)
7. Click Close to exit the Modify Report Selection window or select another
report to modify.
8. Click Close to exit the Report Maintenance Selection window.

Delete a Copied Report

Only copied reports can be deleted: Genesis SQL standard reports cannot be deleted.

1. Navigate to the Report Editor dialog box. See Report Editor, page 290.
2. Highlight the report you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted.

NOTE: Not all reports can be deleted. The Delete button will only be
available for reports that can be deleted.

Figure 266: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Report Maintenance Selection dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 295

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter XI Terminal Configuration

This section covers the concepts and tasks associated with setting up clocks.
Genesis SQL Supports the use of three types of clocks: TA520/530, TA620, PC Clock and
TASC. Support for ATS and Hand Reader, Videx DuraTrax clocks is available in additional
modules.
For each clock, the following parameters must be defined:
• Communication Type (RS232, RS485, Internal/External modem, or Ethernet)
• PC Comm Port used for communication
• Baud Rate
• Function Keys
• Default Levels
• Access Control (if applicable)
• Profiles (if applicable)
• Table Validation (if applicable)
• Bell Schedule (if applicable)

Figure 267: Clocks Menu

Types of Connections
Time America clocks are capable of communicating in one of four different ways:

• The Direct or RS-232 serial port solution is designed for a single, short-range
terminal. The terminal should not be placed beyond 50 feet of shielded wire from a
PC. Each terminal requires its own serial connection to a PC using an RS-232 serial
port.
• The LAN or RS-485 solution is designed for a direct connection, long-range, single or
multi-terminal system. RS-485 allows up to 32 terminals to be networked to one PC
serial port, creating a Local Area Network (LAN). Each terminal is connected to a
LAN distribution box. These boxes connect to the Polling PC with two conductor-
shielded cable. The total length of the serial connection can be as much as 5000 feet
(almost 1 mile). Each terminal is identified using a unique ID.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 296

Genesis SQL Manual

• The modem option is designed for a single- or multi-unit environment. The modem
solution provides two additional options: internal modem or external modem.
Generally, this option is utilized when the terminal is located out of cabling range or if
the use of cabling is being avoided. When data needs to be downloaded, Genesis
SQL can place a call (using a modem in the PC) to the terminal, download the
information and disconnect.

NOTE: The computer that polls the clocks will need a modem in order to call the
clock. Time America recommends U.S. Robotics modems, as they are capable of
communicating with the clock at the 1200 and 2400-baud rates required.
• The Ethernet connection is designed for Local or Wide Area Networks using the
TCP/IP protocol. The terminal is connected to the network through a hub, just like
any other computer on the network.
As part of the configuration of the clock, you will choose the type of connection for each clock.
The configuration dialog box will prompt you for information specific to the type of connection you
have chosen.
Smart Converters
Using a Smart Converter, Genesis SQL can transform a LAN clock into a Modem clock.

TA500, TA600 and TA7000 Series (TA520/530, TA620, TA7000)

Configuration of the TA500 Series, TA600 Series and TA7000 Series time clocks is virtually
identical. For this reason, they are combined into one section.
Since multiple clocks can be defined in the Genesis SQL, a copy feature is available to copy an
existing clock’s parameters when adding a new clock. This eliminates the need to re-enter an
entirely new clock configuration.

Configure a TA500/TA600/TA7000 Series Clock

1. Click the Clocks menu, Configure, TA500 or TA600 or TA7000. The
Configure Clock dialog box will open. The dialog box contains several tabs,
all of which are described below.

Figure 268: Configure TA500/TA600/TA7000 Clocks: General Tab

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 297

Genesis SQL Manual

2. The General tab defines the communication and general operation settings
and contains the following information:
Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a unique code (up to
4 characters) to identify the clock. Once defined,
this code cannot be changed.
Description Enter a description of the clock. This description will
be seen in the system and on reports. This field can
be used to describe the clock type and it’s location
in your facility (i.e. TA530 In BUILDING TWO). The
clock description can be up to 30 characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock
is currently in use. Uncheck this box if the clock is
not being used at this time.
Revision 5 or 6 THIS WILL ONLY SHOW FOR THE TA600 SERIES
Select the appropriate revision – you can check the
revision by powering up the clock.
Path Select the type of connection this clock will use. The
options are:
• Direct (RS232)
• LAN (RS485)
• Modem (Internal)
• Serial LAN (Smart Converter)
• Remote Direct (External Modem)
• Modem LAN (Smart Converter)
• Ethernet
For more information on these connections, see
Types of Connections, page 296.
Port Select the communications port on your computer
that will be used to communicate with the clock. The
factory default is COM 1.
Serial Baud This is the Direct connection (RS232) in the
Communication Path field.
• RS232 Baud = 9600 for all clocks
Lan These settings become available when LAN has
been chosen as the communication type in the
Communication Path field.
Baud Rate The default is 9600 baud. Make sure the baud rate
selected here matches the baud rate defined at the
clock. All clocks use 9600 for LAN. The TA600 can
go as high as 19200.
TIP: You can use the Configuration Badge
(000000000) at the clock to view/modify the clock’s
baud rate.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 298

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
LAN ID Enter the clock’s unique identification number in this
field. This number provides a way for the system to
distinguish between individual clocks. Any one-
character (alphabetic or numeric) ID may be used.
Make sure the LAN ID defined here matches the
LAN ID defined at the clock.
TIP: You can use the Configuration Badge
(000000000) at the clock to view/modify the clock’s
LAN ID.
Converter Select the type of converter used in the LAN setup.
The RTS converters have been phased out over the
years and were mainly used with AT style
computers that used a 25 pin serial port. Most new
computers use 9 pin serial ports that connect to the
newer SD style converters. If you are unsure which
you have, contact your dealer.
Ethernet These settings define how an Ethernet clock will
communicate with Genesis SQL.
IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the Etherlink
converter. DO NOT enter leading zeros.
IP Port Displays the port used on the Etherlink Converter.
The default is 3000 and should not be changed.
Altering this number will result in communication
failure, and the possibility of only being able to
connect to the Etherlink Converter serially.
Modem These settings define how a modem clock will
communicate with Genesis SQL.
Baud Rate Select the modem’s communication speed. Make
sure the baud rate selected here matches the baud
rate defined at the clock.
NOTE: The maximum baud rate for the TA500
internal modem is 1200 and the maximum baud rate
for the TA600 internal modem is 2400. The
maximum baud rate for the TA7000 internal modem
is TBD.
Phone Number Enter the phone number the PC modem must dial to
communicate with this clock. The number must be
entered in the following format:
Outside Line Access Code, Wait Symbol, Area
Code, Phone Number
If no outside line is required (such as 9), simply
enter the phone number. Omit the area code if not
applicable. On most modems, the wait symbol is a
comma (,) typically representing a one second
pause. Multiple wait symbols can be used if
necessary.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 299

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Start/Stop These fields control the time of day the clock’s
Answer internal modem will answer an incoming call. Enter
the modem’s start and stop answer time in military
format (HH:MM).
For example, to set the modem to answer only
between 7:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M., enter 07:00 and
18:00 in the fields provided. The default is 00:00
(midnight) and 23:59 (one minute before midnight).
In other words, the modem will answer any time it is
called during the day.
Ring Delay Enter the number of rings that the clock should wait
before picking up the line.
For example, setting the Ring Delay to 4 means
that after the clock detects a ringing phone; it will
wait 4 rings before answering. 0 means DO NOT
ANSWER.
Number of Retries Enter the number of times the computer should
attempt to connect to the clock if communication
either fails or is interrupted during polling.
Time Difference Enter the time difference (in hours) between the
Between Computer computer and time clock. Since the computer can
and Clock set the clock’s time, this field compensates for time
zone differences between the computer’s location
and the clock’s location. When the clock’s time is
set, the system either adds or subtracts this time
difference from the computer’s clock.
A setting of 0 indicates that the clock and computer
are in the same time zone.
Division Select the company division where the clock is
located. Every transaction entered on this clock is
tagged with this division code.
Supervisor These options define supervisor settings for the
clock.
Prefix for Entry Enter the prefix code used by the terminal to identify
a supervisor’s badge. Any badge starting with this
prefix can access the clock’s Supervisor Mode.
Using this mode, a supervisor can add, view, or
delete transactions in the time clock.
The default prefix is 11. For example, badge
number 112345 can access Supervisor Mode
Prefix for Recall Enter the prefix code used by the terminal to identify
a recall badge. Any badge starting with this prefix
can access the clock’s Recall Mode. In Recall
Mode, a person can view previous time transactions
but not add, edit, or delete transactions.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 300

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Default Date Check this box to automatically use the clock’s
current date for transactions added using a
supervisor’s badge. When this check box is clear,
the clock prompts the supervisor for the date of any
new transactions.
Default Time Check this box to automatically use the clock’s
current time for transactions added using a
supervisor’s badge. When this check box is clear,
the clock prompts the supervisor for the time of any
new transactions.
Input These settings determine how data can put entered
into the clock.
Initial Source Check the applicable check box(es) to indicate the
method by which an employee badge number is
entered into the clock.
Swipe The employee's badge number can be entered by
swiping a badge.
Key The employee's badge number can be entered by
pressing keys on the clock keypad.
Bar Code The employee's badge number can be entered by
scanning a bar code.
Employee Badge Check the applicable check box(es) to indicate the
Source By method by which a supervisor (in supervisor mode)
Supervisor can enter employee badge number into the clock.

Swipe The employee's badge number can be entered by

swiping a badge.
Key The employee's badge number can be entered by
pressing keys on the clock keypad.
Bar Code The employee's badge number can be entered by
scanning a bar code.

3. The Configure tab defines the message and timeout settings and contains
the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 301

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 269: Configure TA500/TA600/TA7000 Clocks: Configure Tab

Setting Definition
Time-Outs These settings determine how long prompts and
messages will appear on the clock's screen.
For data input Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
the clock will wait for a response to a prompt
before returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 10.0 means that the clock
will wait 10 seconds for a response after prompting
for input. The default is 60.0 seconds
To Enter function Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
the clock will wait for a response to enter a
function before returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 5.5 means that the clock will
wait 5½ seconds for a response after prompting for
input. The default is 20.0 seconds.
Displayed Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
messages the clock will display any message before returning
to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 1.5 means that the clock will
display messages for 1½ seconds. The default is
2.0 seconds.
Supervisor Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
questions the clock will wait for a response to a supervisor
question before returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 30.0 means that the clock
will wait 30 seconds for a supervisor’s response to
a question such as “Employee Badge #”. The
default is 90.0 seconds

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 302

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Error messages Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
the clock will display any error message before
returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 1.0 means that the clock will
display error messages for one second. The
default is 1.5 seconds.
Messages These settings define the text prompts for certain
operations at the clock.
Enter Function This field allows you to replace the default ENTER
FUNCTION message with a custom message (up to
16 characters in length).
This message is displayed after swiping a badge
or entering a badge number at the clock.
Invalid Source This field allows you to replace the standard
INVALID SOURCE message with a custom
message (up to 16 characters in length).
This message will display when an input source is
used that the terminal has been programmed to
ignore. For example, the employee uses a
magnetic strip badge to punch In when only
keypad entry is recognized.
Invalid Badge This field allows you to replace the standard
INVALID BADGE message with a custom message
(up to 16 characters in length).
An INVALID BADGE message displays when a
badge or card other than the specified badge
length is used.
Invalid Level This field allows you to replace the default
INVALID LEVEL message with a custom
message.
This message is displayed when Validation is
used, and an invalid level number is entered. It
cannot be more than 16 characters.
Idle Message Enter the message text that displays on the time
clock when in an idle state. If this field is left blank,
no message will be displayed.
The idle message will hold up to 16 characters.
Idle Display (sec) Enter the length of time (from 1 to 60 seconds) that
the idle message displays before switching to the
date and time. The default is 2. 0 indicates the idle
message should not display.
Date/Time display Enter the length of time (from 1 to 60 seconds) that
(sec) the Date and time display before switching back to
the idle message. The default is 2. 0 indicates the
date and time should not display.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 303

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Swipe & Go Badges If the Swipe & Go feature is used enter the highest
badge number that the terminal will recognize as a
Swipe & Go badge.
For example, if 2000 is entered here, only badge
numbers 0001 through 2000 are considered Swipe
& Go badges. All badge numbers above 2000 are
treated as “normal” badges requiring the employee
to enter a function key to complete the transaction
(Clock In or Out, Out to Lunch, In from Lunch,
etc.).
NOTE: The Swipe & Go feature is enabled in the
Main Company configuration screen. See Main
Company, page 46.
Use feedback Select this check box to use the optional Feedback
enhancer Enhancer (if applicable). If the Feedback Enhancer
is not being used, do not select this check box.
NOTE: The TA500 series clocks need to be wired
for bells and access for this feature to work.
Display idle time in Click this check box to display the clock’s idle time
military format in military format (i.e. a 24-hour format). Clear this
box to display the clock’s idle time in standard
format (i.e. a 12-hour clock). In both cases, the
time is displayed using the HH:MM:SS format.
Skip recording of Check this box to skip recording the Diagnostic
diagnostic and and Programming information that display on the
programming info Diag Info and Prog Info tabs.
These two files are created and written to each
time a clock is communicated with and
programmed using Genesis SQL. This information
is used for troubleshooting communication
problems. These files slow the polling process
down, although not noticeably, and can be turned
off by checking the box.
NOTE: Turning off these files will make it difficult to
troubleshoot certain communication problems.
Print Transactions If a printer is connected to the time clock’s serial
as they occur port (TA500) or parallel port (TA620), check this
box to print time transactions as they are entered
at the terminal. Uncheck this box if a printer is not
attached to the clock or you do not wish print
transactions
Line Feed After Controls how many lines should feed after the
receipt has printed.
Header line 1 Enter the first line of the header you wish to print
on all transaction listings printed directly from the
terminal. Up to 40 characters may be entered in
this field. The default is blank indicating Header
line 1 will not be printed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 304

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Header line 2 Enter the second line of the header you wish to
print on all transaction listings printed directly from
the terminal. Up to 40 characters may be entered
in this field. The default is blank indicating Header
line 2 will not be printed.

4. The Function Keys tab allows you customize the clock's keypad. As
customizing the keypad can be an extensive process, a section of this
manual has been dedicated to it. See Customizing Function Keys, page
375. This section merely describes the contents of the screen.

The tab contains the following information:

Figure 270: Configure TA500 Clock: Function Keys tab

Figure 271: Configure TA620 Clock: Function Keys tab

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 305

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 272: Configure TA7000 Clock: Function Keys tab

Setting Definition
Clock Code Displays the unique ID code assigned to this
clock.
Function Key Displays the function key number of the key
selected on the keypad graphic to the left.
Soft Key Displays the software function currently assigned
to the selected key. See page 376 for a
description of the functions available.
Supervisor only Check this box to allow only supervisor access to
this function key. (Supervisor access is gained by
swiping a supervisor badge in the clock.)
This is used for function keys that collect data or
change employee assignments, such as Group
Transfer or Category Entry. Clearing this box
permits any employee to access this function
key.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 306

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Check Profiles Check this box to enforce Profile Lockouts. This
option is only used when the optional Access
Control and Profile Lockout module is installed.
Checking this box means that when an employee
swipes a badge and presses this function key,
the clock will check the Profile information to
make sure the employee is allowed to use clock
during this time. If the box is unchecked, the
Profile table will not be accessed to verify the
information.
NOTE: The Profile Access Module needs to be
installed, and a Profile needs to be assigned to
the clock, before this checkbox is available. This
option will work only after a Profile is setup,
assigned to the correct employees, and assigned
to the clock. The clock needs to be polled with
the Program clocks and Load Profile Tables
options checked.
Check Access Check this box to enforce Profile Access. Access
is used to open doors or other electric lock type
enclosures.
If a valid badge is used, the door will open. When
used in conjunction with Profiles, Profiles will take
over the verification process. If the employee is
confirmed to be able to use this function key at
this time, the door will open.
NOTE: The Profile Access Module needs to be
installed, and Access must be defined for the
terminal, before this checkbox is available.
Prompt Displays the prompt associated with the function
key. The prompts themselves are entered in the
Prompt area in the upper left corner of the
keypad display. Up to four prompts are available.
For more information on creating custom
prompts, see page 376.
Swipe Check this box to indicate that employees must
swipe a magnetic badge to enter the information
requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Department
Key Check this box to indicate that employees may
key the information requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Tips
Bar Code Check this box to indicate that employees must
swiped a bar code to enter the information
requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Job

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 307

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Class The Class defines the information being entered,
for reporting. For example, is it a department
number, tips, etc.? Class choices cannot be
added. If None is chosen, the Type setting will
not be available.
See page 377 for a description of the classes
available.
Type Select the data Type for the information being
entered. The settings in Company Defaults of
Main company determine which Type options are
available for each Class.
The options are:
Alphabetic: Clock will accept letters only for this
entry.
Numeric: Clock will accept numbers only for this
entry.
Alphanumeric: Clock will accept both numbers
and letters.
Number with forced decimal places: Clock will
accept numbers only and will automatically place
the last two numbers entered behind the decimal
place. (For example, if 1499 is entered, the clock
will format it as 14.99).
Alphanumeric – hidden entry: Clock will accept
letters only; the letters will not display on the
clock's screen.
Number – hidden entry Clock will accept
numbers only; the numbers will not display on the
clock's screen.
Maximum Input Enter the maximum total number of characters
Characters that can be entered for this Prompt. The number
displayed in this field is based on the Class
selected.
Minimum Input Enter the minimum number of characters that can
Characters be entered for this Prompt. The default value for
this field is 1, but may be changed.
Number of Decimal Enter the number of places after the decimal
point for a numeric entry. A maximum of 4
decimal places may be entered. This field will
only be available if a Numeric option was chosen
in the Class field.
Display Entry data Check this box to display the input information.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 308

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Verify valid entry Check this box to enforce the Validation available
with the Job Cost/Validation Module. Validation
must be turned on for each level, Download
Names must be checked under the
miscellaneous tab, and Load Level Validation
must be checked as a polling option.
The clock will check the input information against
the downloaded level information. If the level
entry does not exist at the time of the last
programming, the data will be considered invalid.
Update Soft Key Click this button to commit the changes made to
a key's functions or settings.
Swipe and Go Click this button to display the Swipe and Go
Definition function, since there is no actual Swipe and Go
function key. Swipe and Go occurs when an
employee swipes a card through the clock, and is
not asked to enter a function.
Selecting Swipe on the Function Key dropdown
menu provides the same information. The Swipe
and Go function will work with all methods of
punching, as long as it is activated under
Configure Main Company. (See Main Company,
page 46).

5. The Miscellaneous tab defines clock defaults and contains the following
information:

Figure 273: Configure TA500/TA600/TA7000 Clocks: Miscellaneous tab

Setting Definition
Clock Defaults Used with the “Level change to clock default” function
key. This will transfer an employee to levels that
have been assigned to the clock.
NOTE: This is part of the Job Costing module.
Department Select the default Department for this clock.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 309

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Job Select the default Job for this clock, if applicable.

Step Select the default Step for this clock, if applicable.

Operation Select the default Operation for this clock, if

applicable.
Download Profile Check this box to have the Profile assigned to this
clock download to the clock. Assign the Profile from
the Profile box below. This must be done to cause
Profile Lockouts to take effect.
NOTE: The Profile Access must be turned on.
Allow Supervisor Check this box to allow a supervisor (swiping a
override supervisor badge) to override a lockout. This enables
the supervisor to punch on behalf of an employee
when the employee is locked out.
Profile Select the profile to be assigned to this clock. You
must check the Download Profile box in order to
make sure that the Profile is enforced at the clock.
Validation: Check this box to download valid Department, Job,
Download Names Step and Operation names to the clock. This option
is only available with the Job Costing/Validation
module.
NOTE: Load Level Validation also needs to be
checked in the Polling Options for the clock for this
setting to take effect.
Download Bell Check this box to download a pre-defined Bell
Schedule Schedule to this clock. This option is only available
with the Bell Schedule module.
Bell Schedule Select the pre-defined Bell Schedule you wish to
assign to this clock.

6. Access Control allows the clock to control who can enter a building and
when. The clock can be Access Only, or it can accept Time and Attendance
punches as well.

NOTE: These settings are only available with the Access Control module.

The Access Control tab defines the building access settings and contains the
following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 310

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 274: Configure TA500/TA600/TA7000 Clocks: Access Control tab

Setting Definition
Use Access Control Check this box to configure Access Control for this
clock.
Access only terminal Check this box to use this clock for building access
only. The clock will not record time punches such as
Clock In, Start Lunch, etc.
Report denied Check this box to have rejected punches recorded
access attempts for reporting purposes.
NOTE: This option only works in conjunction with
Profiles. If Profiles are not used, all punches are
defined as Accepted, and will show as such on the
report.
Allow access to all Check this option only when Access is being used in
badges conjunction with Profiles. If Profiles have not been
downloaded to the clock, and this option is checked,
any badge of the correct length will cause the clock
to grant access (open the door).
Access duration Enter the length of time, in seconds that the Access
relay will keep the door open.
Access Open These settings are used in conjunction with the
Window always open start and stop times.

Day of the Week Select the days of the week on which the doors will
always be open.
Always open start Enter the time of day when the clock unconditionally
time opens the door. Between this time and the Stop
time, the door will remain unlocked: no badge is
required for entry.
Enter this time in military format.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 311

Genesis SQL Manual

Always open stop Enter the time of day on the days selected when the
time clock stops opening the door unconditionally.
Between this time and the Start time, the door will
remain unlocked: no badge is required for entry.
Enter this time in military format.

7. The Diag Info tab contains the communication information between the
computer and the clock after each attempt to communicate.

NOTE: This tab will be blank if the clock has not been communicated with
yet, or if the Skip recording of diagnostic and programming info option is
checked.
8. The Prog Info tab contains the information that was sent to the clock after
any type of programming.

NOTE: This tab will be blank if the clock has not been communicated with
yet, or if the Skip recording of diagnostic and programming info option is
checked.
9. NOTE: This tab will only apply to TA7000 Clocks using the fingerprint
option.
The Assignments tab lists the employees that can use this clock. This is only
necessary if you are using fingerprints with TA7000 clocks.

Figure 275: Configure TA7000 Clocks: Assignment tab

The tab contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Employee Listing Displays a list of the employees that can use this
clock. Includes: employee code, employee name,
employee badge number, verification, authority level
and if they have a fingerprint template saved.
Fingerprint Mode Verify: This option will only verify employee
number with fingerprint.
Identify: This option will identify employee from the
fingerprint only.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 312

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Division Click this button to select employees based on
Division. Employees selected are assigned the
default Authority and Verification automatically.
NOTE: If you use this method to choose employees,
you may want to Edit the employee in order to
choose another Authority and Verification.
Group Click this button to select employees based on
Group. Employees selected are assigned the
default Authority and Verification automatically.
NOTE: If you use this method to choose employees,
you may want to Edit the employee in order to
choose another Authority and Verification.
Remove All Click this button to remove all employees currently
assigned to the clock.
Add All Click this button to assign all employees to the
clock. Employees selected are assigned the default
Authority and Verification automatically.
NOTE: If you use this method to choose employees,
you may want to Edit the employee in order to
choose another Authority and Verification.
Add Click this button to select employees individually.
You will be prompted to select the following:
Authority: The Authority Level defines which clock
menus employee can view or use at the clock. The
following options are available: Employee,
Supervisor or Configuration.

Verification: The Verification Level defines the

false read threshold.

TA715, TA777 and TA780 Series

Configuration of the TA715 Series, TA777 Series and TA780 Series time clocks is virtually
identical. For this reason, they are combined into one section.
Since multiple clocks can be defined in the Genesis SQL, a copy feature is available to copy an
existing clock’s parameters when adding a new clock. This eliminates the need to re-enter an
entirely new clock configuration.

Configure a TA715/TA777/TA780 Series Clock

1. Click the Clocks menu, Configure, TA715 or TA777 or TA780. The
Configure Clock dialog box will open. The dialog box contains several tabs,
all of which are described below.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 313

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 276: Configure TA715/TA777/TA780 Clocks: General Tab

2. The General tab defines the communication and general operation settings
and contains the following information:
Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a unique code (up to
4 characters) to identify the clock. Once defined,
this code cannot be changed.
Description Enter a description of the clock. This description will
be seen in the system and on reports. This field can
be used to describe the clock type and it’s location
in your facility (i.e. TA715 In BUILDING TWO). The
clock description can be up to 30 characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock
is currently in use. Uncheck this box if the clock is
not being used at this time.
Readers None or THIS WILL ONLY SHOW FOR THE TA780 SERIES
Finger
Only select finger if the clock will accept fingerprints.
Path Select the type of connection this clock will use. The
options are:
• Direct (RS232)
• LAN (RS485)
• Modem
• Ethernet
For more information on these connections, see
Types of Connections, page 296.
Port Select the communications port on your computer
that will be used to communicate with the clock. The
factory default is COM 1.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 314

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Serial Baud This is the Direct connection (RS232) in the
Communication Path field.
• RS232 Baud = 19200 for all clocks
Lan These settings become available when LAN has
been chosen as the communication type in the
Communication Path field.
Baud Rate The default is 19200 baud. Make sure the baud rate
selected here matches the baud rate defined at the
clock. All clocks use 19200 for LAN.
LAN ID Enter the clock’s unique identification number in this
field. This number provides a way for the system to
distinguish between individual clocks. Any one-
character (alphabetic or numeric) ID may be used.
Make sure the LAN ID defined here matches the
LAN ID defined at the clock. The default is 0.
Ethernet These settings define how an Ethernet clock will
communicate with Genesis SQL.
IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the Etherlink
converter. DO NOT enter leading zeros.
IP Port Displays the port used on the Etherlink Converter.
The default is 3734 and should not be changed.
Altering this number will result in communication
failure, and the possibility of only being able to
connect to the Etherlink Converter serially.
Modem These settings define how a modem clock will
communicate with Genesis SQL.
Baud Rate Select the modem’s communication speed. Make
sure the baud rate selected here matches the baud
rate defined at the clock. The default is 19200.
Phone Number Enter the phone number the PC modem must dial to
communicate with this clock. The number must be
entered in the following format:
Outside Line Access Code, Wait Symbol, Area
Code, Phone Number
If no outside line is required (such as 9), simply
enter the phone number. Omit the area code if not
applicable. On most modems, the wait symbol is a
comma (,) typically representing a one second
pause. Multiple wait symbols can be used if
necessary.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 315

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Start/Stop These fields control the time of day the clock’s
Answer internal modem will answer an incoming call. Enter
the modem’s start and stop answer time in military
format (HH:MM).
For example, to set the modem to answer only
between 7:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M., enter 07:00 and
18:00 in the fields provided. The default is 00:00
(midnight) and 23:59 (one minute before midnight).
In other words, the modem will answer any time it is
called during the day.
Ring Delay Enter the number of rings that the clock should wait
before picking up the line.
For example, setting the Ring Delay to 4 means
that after the clock detects a ringing phone; it will
wait 4 rings before answering. 0 means DO NOT
ANSWER.
Number of Retries Enter the number of times the computer should
attempt to connect to the clock if communication
either fails or is interrupted during polling.
Time Difference Enter the time difference (in hours) between the
Between Computer computer and time clock. Since the computer can
and Clock set the clock’s time, this field compensates for time
zone differences between the computer’s location
and the clock’s location. When the clock’s time is
set, the system either adds or subtracts this time
difference from the computer’s clock.
A setting of 0 indicates that the clock and computer
are in the same time zone.
Division Select the company division where the clock is
located. Every transaction entered on this clock is
tagged with this division code.
Supervisor These options define supervisor settings for the
clock.
Default Date Check this box to automatically use the clock’s
current date for transactions added using a
supervisor’s badge. When this check box is clear,
the clock prompts the supervisor for the date of any
new transactions.
Default Time Check this box to automatically use the clock’s
current time for transactions added using a
supervisor’s badge. When this check box is clear,
the clock prompts the supervisor for the time of any
new transactions.
Input These settings determine how data can be entered
into the clock.
Initial Source Check the applicable check box(es) to indicate the
method by which an employee badge number is
entered into the clock.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 316

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Swipe The employee's badge number can be entered by
swiping a badge.
Key The employee's badge number can be entered by
pressing keys on the clock keypad.
Bar Code The employee's badge number can be entered by
scanning a bar code. Must also select the type of
Bar Code badge.
Employee Badge Check the applicable check box(es) to indicate the
Source By method by which a supervisor (in supervisor mode)
Supervisor can enter employee badge number into the clock.

Swipe The employee's badge number can be entered by

swiping a badge.
Key The employee's badge number can be entered by
pressing keys on the clock keypad.
Bar Code The employee's badge number can be entered by
scanning a bar code. Must also select the type of
Bar Code badge.

3. The Configure tab defines the message and timeout settings and contains
the following information:

Figure 277: Configure TA715/TA777/TA780 Clocks: Configure Tab

Setting Definition
Time-Outs These settings determine how long prompts and
messages will appear on the clock's screen.
For data input Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
the clock will wait for a response to a prompt
before returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 10.0 means that the clock
will wait 10 seconds for a response after prompting
for input. The default is 60.0 seconds

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 317

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
To Enter function Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
the clock will wait for a response to enter a
function before returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 5.5 means that the clock will
wait 5½ seconds for a response after prompting for
input. The default is 20.0 seconds.
Displayed Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
messages the clock will display any message before returning
to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 1.5 means that the clock will
display messages for 1½ seconds. The default is
2.0 seconds.
Supervisor Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
questions the clock will wait for a response to a supervisor
question before returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 30.0 means that the clock
will wait 30 seconds for a supervisor’s response to
a question such as “Employee Badge #”. The
default is 90.0 seconds
Error messages Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
the clock will display any error message before
returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 1.0 means that the clock will
display error messages for one second. The
default is 1.5 seconds.
Messages These settings define the text prompts for certain
operations at the clock.
Enter Function This field allows you to replace the default ENTER
FUNCTION message with a custom message (up to
16 characters in length).
This message is displayed after swiping a badge
or entering a badge number at the clock.
Invalid Source This field allows you to replace the standard
INVALID SOURCE message with a custom
message (up to 16 characters in length).
This message will display when an input source is
used that the terminal has been programmed to
ignore. For example, the employee uses a
magnetic strip badge to punch In when only
keypad entry is recognized.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 318

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Invalid Badge This field allows you to replace the standard
INVALID BADGE message with a custom message
(up to 16 characters in length).
An INVALID BADGE message displays when a
badge or card other than the specified badge
length is used.
Invalid Level This field allows you to replace the default
INVALID LEVEL message with a custom
message.
This message is displayed when Validation is
used, and an invalid level number is entered. It
cannot be more than 16 characters.
Idle Message Enter the message text that displays on the time
clock when in an idle state. If this field is left blank,
no message will be displayed.
The idle message will hold up to 16 characters.
Use Swipe & Go Select this feature to activate swipe and go in the
clock.
NOTE: The Swipe & Go feature is enabled in the
Main Company configuration screen. See Main
Company, page 46.
Turn off function Select this feature if the clock will only be used as
keys Swipe & Go. This feature disables all function key
access at the clock.
Skip recording of Check this box to skip recording the Diagnostic
diagnostic and and Programming information that display on the
programming info Diag Info and Prog Info tabs.
These two files are created and written to each
time a clock is communicated with and
programmed using Genesis SQL. This information
is used for troubleshooting communication
problems. These files slow the polling process
down, although not noticeably, and can be turned
off by checking the box.
NOTE: Turning off these files will make it difficult to
troubleshoot certain communication problems.
Display idle time in Click this check box to display the clock’s idle time
military format in military format (i.e. a 24-hour format). Clear this
box to display the clock’s idle time in standard
format (i.e. a 12-hour clock). In both cases, the
time is displayed using the HH:MM:SS format.
Proximity Offset to Enter the number of characters defining the
remove Facility Facility code the proximity badge should not read.
code This feature is only available in the TA777 and
TA780.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 319

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Use Terminal in This feature will allow the terminal to send
online mode transactions to a specified server working as a
service.
NOTE: The service must be activated to accept
such transactions.

4. The Function Keys tab allows you customize the clock's keypad. As
customizing the keypad can be an extensive process, a section of this
manual has been dedicated to it. See Customizing Function Keys, page
375. This section merely describes the contents of the screen.

The tab contains the following information:

Figure 278: Configure TA715 Clock: Function Keys tab

Figure 279: Configure TA777 Clock: Function Keys tab

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 320

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 280: Configure TA780 Clock: Function Keys tab

Setting Definition
Clock Code Displays the unique ID code assigned to this
clock.
Function Key Displays the function key number of the key
selected on the keypad graphic to the left.
Soft Key Displays the software function currently assigned
to the selected key. See page 376 for a
description of the functions available.
Supervisor only Check this box to allow only supervisor access to
this function key. (Supervisor access is gained by
swiping a supervisor badge in the clock.)
This is used for function keys that collect data or
change employee assignments, such as Group
Transfer or Category Entry. Clearing this box
permits any employee to access this function
key.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 321

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Check Profiles Check this box to enforce Profile Lockouts. This
option is only used when the optional Access
Control and Profile Lockout module is installed.
Checking this box means that when an employee
swipes a badge and presses this function key,
the clock will check the Profile information to
make sure the employee is allowed to use clock
during this time. If the box is unchecked, the
Profile table will not be accessed to verify the
information.
NOTE: The Profile Access Module needs to be
installed, and a Profile needs to be assigned to
the clock, before this checkbox is available. This
option will work only after a Profile is setup,
assigned to the correct employees, and assigned
to the clock. The clock needs to be polled with
the Program clocks and Load Profile Tables
options checked.
Check Access Check this box to enforce Profile Access. Access
is used to open doors or other electric lock type
enclosures.
If a valid badge is used, the door will open. When
used in conjunction with Profiles, Profiles will take
over the verification process. If the employee is
confirmed to be able to use this function key at
this time, the door will open.
NOTE: The Profile Access Module needs to be
installed, and Access must be defined for the
terminal, before this checkbox is available.
Prompt Displays the prompt associated with the function
key. The prompts themselves are entered in the
Prompt area in the upper left corner of the
keypad display. Up to four prompts are available.
For more information on creating custom
prompts, see page 376.
Swipe Check this box to indicate that employees must
swipe a magnetic badge to enter the information
requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Department
Key Check this box to indicate that employees may
key the information requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Tips
Bar Code Check this box to indicate that employees may
input a bar code to enter the information
requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Job

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 322

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Class The Class defines the information being entered,
for reporting. For example, is it a department
number, tips, etc.? Class choices cannot be
added. If None is chosen, the Type setting will
not be available.
See page 377 for a description of the classes
available.
Type Select the data Type for the information being
entered. The settings in Company Defaults of
Main company determine which Type options are
available for each Class.
The options are:
Alphabetic: Clock will accept letters only for this
entry.
Numeric: Clock will accept numbers only for this
entry.
Alphanumeric: Clock will accept both numbers
and letters.
Number with forced decimal places: Clock will
accept numbers only and will automatically place
the last two numbers entered behind the decimal
place. (For example, if 1499 is entered, the clock
will format it as 14.99).
Alphanumeric – hidden entry: Clock will accept
letters only; the letters will not display on the
clock's screen.
Number – hidden entry Clock will accept
numbers only; the numbers will not display on the
clock's screen.
Maximum Input Enter the maximum total number of characters
Characters that can be entered for this Prompt. The number
displayed in this field is based on the Class
selected.
Minimum Input Enter the minimum number of characters that can
Characters be entered for this Prompt. The default value for
this field is 1, but may be changed.
Number of Decimal Enter the number of places after the decimal
point for a numeric entry. A maximum of 4
decimal places may be entered. This field will
only be available if a Numeric option was chosen
in the Class field.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 323

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Verify valid entry Check this box to enforce the Validation available
with the Job Cost/Validation Module. Validation
must be turned on for each level, Download
Names must be checked under the
miscellaneous tab, and Load Level Validation
must be checked as a polling option.
The clock will check the input information against
the downloaded level information. If the level
entry does not exist at the time of the last
programming, the data will be considered invalid.
Update Soft Key Click this button to commit the changes made to
a key's functions or settings.
Swipe and Go Click this button to display the Swipe and Go
Definition function, since there is no actual Swipe and Go
function key. Swipe and Go occurs when an
employee swipes a card through the clock, and is
not asked to enter a function.
Selecting Swipe on the Function Key dropdown
menu provides the same information. The Swipe
and Go function will work with all methods of
punching, as long as it is activated under
Configure Main Company. (See Main Company,
page 46).

5. The Miscellaneous tab defines clock defaults and contains the following
information:

Figure 281: Configure TA715/TA777/TA780 Clocks: Miscellaneous tab

Setting Definition
Clock Defaults Used with the “Level change to clock default” function
key. This will transfer an employee to levels that
have been assigned to the clock.
NOTE: This is part of the Job Costing module.
Department Select the default Department for this clock.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 324

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Job Select the default Job for this clock, if applicable.

Step Select the default Step for this clock, if applicable.

Operation Select the default Operation for this clock, if

applicable.
Download Profile Check this box to have the Profile assigned to this
clock download to the clock. Assign the Profile from
the Profile box below. This must be done to cause
Profile Lockouts to take effect.
NOTE: The Profile Access must be turned on.
Profile Select the profile to be assigned to this clock. You
must check the Download Profile box in order to
make sure that the Profile is enforced at the clock.
Validation: Check this box to download valid Department, Job,
Download Names Step and Operation names to the clock. This option
is only available with the Job Costing/Validation
module.
NOTE: Load Level Validation also needs to be
checked in the Polling Options for the clock for this
setting to take effect.
Download Bell Check this box to download a pre-defined Bell
Schedule Schedule to this clock. This option is only available
with the Bell Schedule module.
Bell Schedule Select the pre-defined Bell Schedule you wish to
assign to this clock.

6. Access Control allows the clock to control who can enter a building and
when. The clock can be Access Only, or it can accept Time and Attendance
punches as well.

NOTE: These settings are only available with the Access Control module.

The Access Control tab defines the building access settings and contains the
following information:

Figure 282: Configure TA715/TA777/TA780 Clocks: Access Control tab

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 325

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Use Access Control Check this box to configure Access Control for this
clock.
Access only terminal Check this box to use this clock for building access
only. The clock will not record time punches such as
Clock In, Start Lunch, etc.
Allow access for all Check this option only when Access is being used in
badges conjunction with Profiles. If Profiles have not been
downloaded to the clock, and this option is checked,
any badge of the correct length will cause the clock
to grant access (open the door).
Access duration Enter the length of time, in seconds that the Access
relay will keep the door open.

7. The Diag Info tab contains the communication information between the
computer and the clock after each attempt to communicate.

NOTE: This tab will be blank if the clock has not been communicated with
yet, or if the Skip recording of diagnostic and programming info option is
checked.
8. The Prog Info tab contains the information that was sent to the clock after
any type of programming.

NOTE: This tab will be blank if the clock has not been communicated with
yet, or if the Skip recording of diagnostic and programming info option is
checked.
9. NOTE: This tab will only apply to TA780 Clocks using the fingerprint
option.
The Assignments tab lists the employees that can use this clock. This is only
necessary if you are using fingerprints with TA780 clocks.

Figure 283: Configure TA780 Clocks: Assignments tab

The tab contains the following information:

Setting Definition

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 326

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Employee Listing Displays a list of the employees that can use this
clock. Includes: employee code, employee name,
employee badge number, special enrollment and if
they have a fingerprint template saved.
NOTE: Can use the Print feature to print an
assignment listing.
Fingerprint Mode Verify: This option will only verify employee
number with fingerprint.
Identify: This option will identify employee from the
fingerprint only.
Division Click this button to select employees based on
Division. Employees selected are assigned the
default Authority and Verification automatically.
NOTE: If you use this method to choose employees,
you may want to Edit the employee in order to
choose another Authority and Verification.
Group Click this button to select employees based on
Group. Employees selected are assigned the
default Authority and Verification automatically.
NOTE: If you use this method to choose employees,
you may want to Edit the employee in order to
choose another Authority and Verification.
Remove All Click this button to remove all employees currently
assigned to the clock.
Add All Click this button to assign all employees to the
clock. Employees selected are assigned the default
Authority and Verification automatically.
NOTE: If you use this method to choose employees,
you may want to Edit the employee in order to
choose another Authority and Verification.
Add Click this button to select employees individually.
You will be prompted to select the following:
Authority: The Authority Level defines which clock
menus employee can view or use at the clock. The
following options are available: Employee,
Supervisor or Configuration.

Verification: The Verification Level defines the

false read threshold.

PC Clock
Configuration of the PC Clock is done under the TA600 Series time clock. The PC Clock can use
Profile Lockouts and Messaging.
Since multiple clocks can be defined in the Genesis SQL, a copy feature is available to copy an
existing clock’s parameters when adding a new clock. This eliminates the need to re-enter an
entirely new clock configuration.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 327

Genesis SQL Manual

Configure a PC Clock
1. Click the Clocks menu, Configure, TA600. The Configure Clock dialog box
will open. The dialog box contains several tabs, all of which are described
below.

Figure 284: Configure PC Clocks: General Tab

2. The General tab defines the communication and general operation settings
and contains the following information:

Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter PC for this code.

Description In this field enter PC Clock for the description.

Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock is
currently in use. Uncheck this box if the clock is not
being used at this time.
Initial Source Check the applicable check box(es) to indicate the
method by which an employee badge number is
entered into the clock.
Swipe Swiping a badge can enter the employee’s badge
number.
Key Pressing keys on the clock keypad can enter the
employee’s badge number.
Bar Code Scanning a bar code can enter the employee’s badge
number.

3. The Configure tab defines the message and timeout settings and contains
the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 328

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 285: Configure PC Clock: Configure Tab

Setting Definition
Time-Outs These settings determine how long prompts
and messages will appear on the clock's
screen.
For data input Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9
seconds) the clock will wait for a response to
a prompt before returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 10.0 means that the
clock will wait 10 seconds for a response
after prompting for input. The default is 60.0
seconds
To Enter function Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9
seconds) the clock will wait for a response to
enter a function before returning to an idle
state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 5.5 means that the
clock will wait 5½ seconds for a response
after prompting for input. The default is 20.0
seconds.
Displayed Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9
messages seconds) the clock will display any message
before returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 1.5 means that the
clock will display messages for 1½ seconds.
The default is 2.0 seconds.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 329

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Supervisor Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9
questions seconds) the clock will wait for a response to
a supervisor question before returning to an
idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 30.0 means that the
clock will wait 30 seconds for a supervisor’s
response to a question such as “Employee
Badge #”. The default is 90.0 seconds
Error messages Enter the length of time (from 0.1 to 99.9
seconds) the clock will display any error
message before returning to an idle state.
Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a
second. For example, 1.0 means that the
clock will display error messages for one
second. The default is 1.5 seconds.
Messages These settings define the text prompts for
certain operations at the clock.
Enter Function This field allows you to replace the default
ENTER FUNCTION message with a custom
message (up to 16 characters in length).
This message is displayed after swiping a
badge or entering a badge number at the
clock.
Invalid Source This field allows you to replace the standard
INVALID SOURCE message with a custom
message (up to 16 characters in length).
This message will display when an input
source is used that the terminal has been
programmed to ignore. For example, the
employee uses a magnetic strip badge to
punch In when only keypad entry is
recognized.
Invalid Badge This field allows you to replace the standard
INVALID BADGE message with a custom
message (up to 16 characters in length).
An INVALID BADGE message displays when
a badge or card other than the specified
badge length is used.
Invalid Level This field allows you to replace the default
INVALID LEVEL message with a custom
message.
This message is displayed when Validation
is used, and an invalid level number is
entered. It cannot be more than 16
characters.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 330

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Idle Message Enter the message text that displays on the
time clock when in an idle state. If this field is
left blank, no message will be displayed.
The idle message will hold up to 16
characters.
Idle Display (sec) Enter the length of time (from 1 to 60
seconds) that the idle message displays
before switching to the date and time. The
default is 2. 0 indicates the idle message
should not display.
Date/Time display Enter the length of time (from 1 to 60
(sec) seconds) that the Date and time display
before switching back to the idle message.
The default is 2. 0 indicates the date and
time should not display.
Swipe & Go Badges If the Swipe & Go feature is used enter the
highest badge number that the terminal will
recognize as a Swipe & Go badge.
For example, if 2000 is entered here, only
badge numbers 0001 through 2000 are
considered Swipe & Go badges. All badge
numbers above 2000 are treated as “normal”
badges requiring the employee to enter a
function key to complete the transaction
(Clock In or Out, Out to Lunch, In from
Lunch, etc.).
NOTE: The Swipe & Go feature is enabled in
the Main Company configuration screen.
See Main Company, page 46.

4. The Function Keys tab allows you customize the clock's keypad. As
customizing the keypad can be an extensive process, a section of this
manual has been dedicated to it. See Customizing Function Keys, page
375. This section merely describes the contents of the screen.

The tab contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 331

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 286: Configure PC Clock: Function Keys tab

Setting Definition
Clock Code Displays the unique ID code assigned to this clock.

Function Key Displays the function key number of the key

selected on the keypad graphic to the left.
Soft Key Displays the software function currently assigned to
the selected key. See page 376 for a description of
the functions available.
Prompt Displays the prompt associated with the function
key. The prompts themselves are entered in the
Prompt area in the upper left corner of the keypad
display. Up to four prompts are available.
For more information on creating custom prompts,
see page 376.
Swipe Check this box to indicate that employees must
swipe a magnetic badge to enter the information
requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Department
Key Check this box to indicate that employees may key
the information requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Tips
Bar Code Check this box to indicate that employees must
swiped a bar code to enter the information
requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Job
Class The Class defines the information being entered, for
reporting. For example, is it a department number,
tips, etc.? Class choices cannot be added. If None
is chosen, the Type setting will not be available.
See page 377 for a description of the classes
available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 332

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Type Select the data Type for the information being
entered. The settings in Company Defaults of Main
company determine which Type options are
available for each Class.
The options are:
Alphabetic: Clock will accept letters only for this
entry.
Numeric: Clock will accept numbers only for this
entry.
Alphanumeric: Clock will accept both numbers and
letters.
Number with forced decimal places: Clock will
accept numbers only and will automatically place
the last two numbers entered behind the decimal
place. (For example, if 1499 is entered, the clock
will format it as 14.99).
Alphanumeric – hidden entry: Clock will accept
letters only; the letters will not display on the clock's
screen.
Number – hidden entry Clock will accept numbers
only; the numbers will not display on the clock's
screen.
Maximum Input Enter the maximum total number of characters that
Characters can be entered for this Prompt. The number
displayed in this field is based on the Class
selected.
Minimum Input Enter the minimum number of characters that can
Characters be entered for this Prompt. The default value for this
field is 1, but may be changed.
Number of Enter the number of places after the decimal point
Decimal for a numeric entry. A maximum of 4 decimal places
may be entered. This field will only be available if a
Numeric option was chosen in the Class field.
Display Entry data Check this box to display the input information.

Verify valid entry Check this box to enforce the Validation available
with the Job Cost/Validation Module. Validation
must be turned on for each level, Download Names
must be checked under the miscellaneous tab, and
Load Level Validation must be checked as a polling
option.
The clock will check the input information against
the downloaded level information. If the level entry
does not exist at the time of the last programming,
the data will be considered invalid.
Update Soft Key Click this button to commit the changes made to a
key's functions or settings.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 333

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Swipe and Go Click this button to display the Swipe and Go
Definition function, since there is no actual Swipe and Go
function key. Swipe and Go occurs when an
employee swipes a card through the clock, and is
not asked to enter a function.
Selecting Swipe on the Function Key dropdown
menu provides the same information. The Swipe
and Go function will work with all methods of
punching, as long as it is activated under Configure
Main Company. (See Main Company, page 46).

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 334

Genesis SQL Manual

WebClock
Configuration of the WebClock is done under the TA600 Series time clock.
Since multiple clocks can be defined in the Genesis SQL, a copy feature is available to copy an
existing clock’s parameters when adding a new clock. This eliminates the need to re-enter an
entirely new clock configuration.
NOTE: The TimeSheet Submittal portion of WebClock only permits up to 3 levels of Job Costing
to be entered or transferred.

Who Can Clock In and Out with WebClock?

WebClock can only be used by the employees who have been assigned to use the
WebClock. Employees can be assigned when they are entered into Genesis SQL or
assigned at a later date. For more information see Employee Details Tab, page 237.

Configure a WebClock
1. Click the Clocks menu, Configure, TA600. The Configure Clock dialog box
will open.

Figure 287: Configure WebClock Clocks: General Tab

2. The dialog box contains several tabs, all of which are described below. The
General tab defines the communication and general operation settings and
contains the following information:
Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter WEB and a number for
this code.
For example: WEB1 or WEB2
Description In this field enter the name of the WebClock for the
description.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock is
currently in use. Uncheck this box if the clock is not
being used at this time.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 335

Genesis SQL Manual

3. The Configure tab defines the message and timeout settings and contains
the following information:

Figure 288: Configure WebClock Clock: Configure Tab

Setting Definition
Idle Message Enter the message text that displays on the time clock
when in an idle state. If this field is left blank, no
message will be displayed.
The idle message will hold up to 16 characters.

4. The Function Keys tab allows you customize the clock's keypad. As
customizing the keypad can be an extensive process, a section of this
manual has been dedicated to it. See Customizing Function Keys, page
375. This section merely describes the contents of the screen.

The tab contains the following information:

Figure 289: Configure WebClock: Function Keys tab

Setting Definition
Clock Code Displays the unique ID code assigned to this
clock.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 336

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Function Key Displays the function key number of the key
selected on the keypad graphic to the left.
Soft Key Displays the software function currently
assigned to the selected key. See page 376 for
a description of the functions available.
Prompt Displays the prompt associated with the
function key. The prompts themselves are
entered in the Prompt area in the upper left
corner of the keypad display. Up to four
prompts are available.
For more information on creating custom
prompts, see page 376.
Key Check this box to indicate that employees may
key the information requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Tips
Class The Class defines the information being
entered, for reporting. For example, is it a
department number, tips, etc.? Class choices
cannot be added. If None is chosen, the Type
setting will not be available.
See page 377 for a description of the classes
available.
Type Select the data Type for the information being
entered. The settings in Company Defaults of
Main company determine which Type options
are available for each Class.
The options are:
Alphabetic: Clock will accept letters only for
this entry.
Numeric: Clock will accept numbers only for
this entry.
Alphanumeric: Clock will accept both
numbers and letters.
Number with forced decimal places: Clock
will accept numbers only and will automatically
place the last two numbers entered behind the
decimal place. (For example, if 1499 is
entered, the clock will format it as 14.99).
Alphanumeric – hidden entry: Clock will
accept letters only; the letters will not display
on the clock's screen.
Number – hidden entry Clock will accept
numbers only; the numbers will not display on
the clock's screen.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 337

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Maximum Input Enter the maximum total number of characters
Characters that can be entered for this Prompt. The
number displayed in this field is based on the
Class selected.
Minimum Input Enter the minimum number of characters that
Characters can be entered for this Prompt. The default
value for this field is 1, but may be changed.
Number of Decimal Enter the number of places after the decimal
point for a numeric entry. A maximum of 4
decimal places may be entered. This field will
only be available if a Numeric option was
chosen in the Class field.
Display Entry data Check this box to display the input information.

Verify valid entry Check this box to enforce the Validation

available with the Job Cost/Validation Module.
Validation must be turned on for each level,
Download Names must be checked under the
miscellaneous tab, and Load Level Validation
must be checked as a polling option.
The clock will check the input information
against the downloaded level information. If
the level entry does not exist at the time of the
last programming, the data will be considered
invalid.
Update Soft Key Click this button to commit the changes made
to a key's functions or settings.

Configuring TimeSheet Submittal

Configuring a TimeSheet Submittal MUST be done to use the TimeSheet Submittal feature in
WebClock. The configuration is done under the TA600 Series time clock.
Since multiple clocks can be defined in the Genesis SQL, a copy feature is available to copy an
existing clock’s parameters when adding a new clock. This eliminates the need to re-enter an
entirely new clock configuration.
NOTE: The TimeSheet Submittal portion of WebClock only permits up to 3 levels of Job Costing
to be entered or transferred.
1. Click the Clocks menu, Configure, TA600. The Configure Clock dialog box
will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 338

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 290: Configure WebClock Clocks: General Tab

2. The dialog box contains several tabs, all of which are described below. The
General tab defines the communication and general operation settings and
contains the following information:
Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter TIME for this code.

Description In this field enter the name TimeSheet Submittal for the
description.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock is
currently in use. Uncheck this box if the clock is not
being used at this time.

3. The Configure tab does not need to be configured.

4. The Function Keys tab allows you customize the clock's keypad.
When the WebClock should accept Job Costing information in the TimeSheet
Submittal process you must configure the “In” key and the “0” key with the
same Job Costing information.
For example:
The “In” key’s “soft key” should read “Clocked In” and the Prompts to follow
should be “Clocked In” and the appropriate Job Costing information you wish
to collect.
The “0” key’s “soft key” should read “Change” and the Job Costing
information should be duplicated from the prompts listed under the “In” key’s
first prompt, “Clocked In.”
As customizing the keypad can be an extensive process, a section of this
manual has been dedicated to it. See Customizing Function Keys, page
375. This section merely describes the contents of the screen.
The tab contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 339

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 291: Configure WebClock: Function Keys tab

Setting Definition
Clock Code Displays the unique ID code assigned to this
clock.
Function Key Displays the function key number of the key
selected on the keypad graphic to the left.
Soft Key Displays the software function currently
assigned to the selected key. See page 376 for
a description of the functions available.
Prompt Displays the prompt associated with the
function key. The prompts themselves are
entered in the Prompt area in the upper left
corner of the keypad display. Up to four
prompts are available.
For more information on creating custom
prompts, see page 376.
Key Check this box to indicate that employees may
key the information requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Tips
Class The Class defines the information being
entered, for reporting. For example, is it a
department number, tips, etc.? Class choices
cannot be added. If None is chosen, the Type
setting will not be available.
See page 377 for a description of the classes
available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 340

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Type Select the data Type for the information being
entered. The settings in Company Defaults of
Main company determine which Type options
are available for each Class.
The options are:
Alphabetic: Clock will accept letters only for
this entry.
Numeric: Clock will accept numbers only for
this entry.
Alphanumeric: Clock will accept both
numbers and letters.
Number with forced decimal places: Clock
will accept numbers only and will automatically
place the last two numbers entered behind the
decimal place. (For example, if 1499 is
entered, the clock will format it as 14.99).
Alphanumeric – hidden entry: Clock will
accept letters only; the letters will not display
on the clock's screen.
Number – hidden entry Clock will accept
numbers only; the numbers will not display on
the clock's screen.
Maximum Input Enter the maximum total number of characters
Characters that can be entered for this Prompt. The
number displayed in this field is based on the
Class selected.
Minimum Input Enter the minimum number of characters that
Characters can be entered for this Prompt. The default
value for this field is 1, but may be changed.
Number of Decimal Enter the number of places after the decimal
point for a numeric entry. A maximum of 4
decimal places may be entered. This field will
only be available if a Numeric option was
chosen in the Class field.
Display Entry data Check this box to display the input information.

Verify valid entry Check this box to enforce the Validation

available with the Job Cost/Validation Module.
Validation must be turned on for each level,
Download Names must be checked under the
miscellaneous tab, and Load Level Validation
must be checked as a polling option.
The clock will check the input information
against the downloaded level information. If
the level entry does not exist at the time of the
last programming, the data will be considered
invalid.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 341

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Update Soft Key Click this button to commit the changes made
to a key's functions or settings.

Accessing WebClock
• Launch your preferred web browser and point it to the proper web page (e.g.
your companies intranet site that contains the WebClock). The WebClock home
page will appear:

Figure 292: WebClock Home Page

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 342

Genesis SQL Manual

Clock Functions
Clocking In
1. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
2. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 293: WebClock Function Page

3. Select Clock In. The Clock In page will appear:

Figure 294: WebClock Clock In Page

4. Click Submit. The Transaction Successfully Entered label will appear:

Figure 295: Transaction Successfully Entered Label

5. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 343

Genesis SQL Manual

Clocking Out
1. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
2. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 296: WebClock Function Page

3. Select Clock Out. The Clock Out page will appear:

Figure 297: WebClock Clock Out Page

4. Click Submit. The Transaction Successfully Entered label will appear:

Figure 298: Transaction Successfully Entered Label

5. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 344

Genesis SQL Manual

Starting Lunch or Break

1. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
2. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 299: WebClock Function Page

3. Select Out For Lunch or Out On Break whichever is appropriate. The Out For
Lunch or Out On Break page will appear:

Figure 300: WebClock Out for Lunch Page

4. Click Submit. The Transaction Successfully Entered label will appear:

Figure 301: Transaction Successfully Entered Label

5. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 345

Genesis SQL Manual

Ending Lunch or Break

1. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
2. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 302: WebClock Function Page

3. Select In From Lunch or In From Break whichever is appropriate. The In From

Lunch or In From Break page will appear:

Figure 303: WebClock In from Lunch Page

4. Click Submit. The Transaction Successfully Entered label will appear:

Figure 304: Transaction Successfully Entered Label

5. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 346

Genesis SQL Manual

Transferring to a new Department, Job, Step, Operation or Task

1. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
2. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 305: WebClock Function Page

3. Select Enter Department, Enter Job, Enter Step, Enter Operation or Enter Task
whichever is appropriate.

The specific link you selected will appear:

Figure 306: WebClock Dpartment Page

4. Enter the Department code. If you need Help determining how many characters are
in the Department code click the Question Mark.

5. Click Enter.

6. Click Submit. The Transaction Successfully Entered label will appear:

Figure 307: Transaction Successfully Entered Label

7. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 347

Genesis SQL Manual

Enter Tips
1. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
2. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 308: WebClock Function Page

3. Select Tip. The Tip page will appear:

Figure 309: WebClock Department Page

4. Enter Tip Amount.

Remember to use the decimal—e.g. $10.00 = 10.00

If you need Help determining how many characters are available click the
Question Mark

5. Click Enter.

6. Click Submit. The Transaction Successfully Entered label will appear:

Figure 310: Transaction Successfully Entered Label

7. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

Other Key Functions

WebClock keys can be defined for any functionality. For more information see
Configure WebClock, page 335.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 348

Genesis SQL Manual

The Extras
Viewing the Time Card
1. Launch your preferred web browser and point it to the proper web page (e.g. your
companies intranet site that contains the WebClock). The WebClock home page will
appear:

Figure 311: WebClock Home Page

2. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
3. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 312: WebClock Function Page

4. Select the Timecards tab. The Timecard page will appear:

Figure 313: WebClock Timecard Page

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 349

Genesis SQL Manual

NOTE: The Timecard is a snapshot of Genesis based on the most current process of
data. The Timecard display is view only and will not accept any edits.

5. Click Previous and Next to display other pay periods.

Codes and Colors:

• A = Absent (red)
• D = Default Hours (pink)
• I = In Now (green)
• M = Missing Punch (purple)

6. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

Viewing the Schedule

1. Launch your preferred web browser and point it to the proper web page (e.g. your
companies intranet site that contains the WebClock). The WebClock home page will
appear:

Figure 314: WebClock Home Page

2. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
3. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 315: WebClock Function Page

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 350

Genesis SQL Manual

4. Select the Schedules tab. The Schedule page will appear:

Figure 316: WebClock Schedule Page

NOTE: The Schedule is a snapshot of Genesis based on the most current process of
data. The Schedule display is view only and will not accept any edits.

5. Click Previous and Next to view other weeks.

6. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

Viewing the Benefits

1. Launch your preferred web browser and point it to the proper web page (e.g. your
companies intranet site that contains the WebClock). The WebClock home page will
appear:

Figure 317: WebClock Home Page

2. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 351

Genesis SQL Manual

3. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 318: WebClock Function Page

4. Select the Benefits tab. The Benefits page will appear:

Figure 319: WebClock Benefits Page

NOTE: The Benefits are a snapshot of Genesis based on the most current process
of data. The Benefits display is view only and will not accept any edits.

5. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

Viewing the Status Board

1. Launch your preferred web browser and point it to the proper web page (e.g. your
companies intranet site that contains the WebClock). The WebClock home page will
appear:

Figure 320: WebClock Home Page

2. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 352

Genesis SQL Manual

3. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 321: WebClock Function Page

4. Select the Status Board tab. The Status Board page will appear:

Figure 322: WebClock Status Board Page

NOTE: The Status Board is a snapshot of Genesis based on the most current
process of data. The Status Board display is view only and will not accept any edits.

5. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 353

Genesis SQL Manual

Submitting Time Sheets

WebClock allows employees to enter their time via time sheet submittal. Time sheet
submittal may be used instead of clocking in and out, or it may be used in conjunction with
clocking in and out.

The entries from a submitted time sheet are visible in the Online Timecard in Genesis SQL.
Once a time sheet has been submitted it cannot be changed. Only additional time may be
added.

NOTE: An additional clock must be configured to use TimeSheet Submittal, for details see
page 338

1. Launch your preferred web browser and point it to the proper web page (e.g. your
companies intranet site that contains the WebClock). The WebClock home page will
appear:

Figure 323: WebClock Home Page

2. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
3. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 324: WebClock Function Page

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 354

Genesis SQL Manual

4. Select the TimeSheet Submittal tab. The TimeSheet Submittal page will appear:

Figure 325: WebClock TimeSheet Submittal Page

5. Verify that the dates for the time sheet are correct. Click Previous or Next to scroll
to the date desired.

6. Fill in the appropriate fields:

Shifts Per Day—This setting determines how many shifts may be entered each day
for this employee. A shift is an unbroken period of time worked during the day. Enter
the number of shifts per day for which Genesis SQL should expect entries.

7. Click the Update button to complete the entry before completing any other settings
on this page. The page will reload.

8. Fill in the Time Sheet data information for each shift, for each day as follows:

Setting Definition
Type Select the pay type that applies for this shift. (Work)

Start Day Type in the specific start time of the shift for the day.

Start Lunch Type in the specific start time for lunch.

End Lunch Type in the specific end time for lunch.

End Day Type in the specific end time of the shift for the day.

Enter Department Select the department to which this shift will be

coded.

Enter Job Select the job to which this shift will be coded.

Enter Step Select the step to which this shift will be coded.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 355

Genesis SQL Manual

Note: You do have the ability to complete a single day and Submit Shifts For
Processing only for that day or you can wait and complete the entire week then
Submit Shift For Processing.

9. When all shifts have been entered, click the Save New Shifts button. The WebClock
Time Sheet Submittal Page will appear with the entered data:

Figure 326: Time Sheet Submittal page with data

10. When all shifts have been entered and confirmed, click the Submit Shifts For
Processing button. The Submit Time Sheet For Week Screen will appear:

11. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 356

Genesis SQL Manual

Changing a Password

1. Launch your preferred web browser and point it to the proper web page (e.g. your
companies intranet site that contains the WebClock). The WebClock home page will
appear:

Figure 327: WebClock Home Page

2. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
3. Click Login. The Clock Function page will appear:

Figure 328: WebClock Function Page

4. Click the Employee link top left corner of screen in blue. The Change Password
page will appear:

Figure 329: WebClock Change Password Page

5. Enter the old password in the Existing Password field and press Tab.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 357

Genesis SQL Manual

6. Enter the new password in the New Password field and press Tab.

7. Reenter the new password in the Confirm Password field. Click Submit.

8. The system will automatically return to the Clock Function Screen when complete.

Supervisor Functions
Supervisors can perform all clock functions, as the employees do, except for TimeSheet
Submittal. In addition they can approve overtime and add categories from the WebClock.
Approving Overtime
1. Launch your preferred web browser and point it to the proper web page (e.g. your
companies intranet site that contains the WebClock). The WebClock home page will
appear:

Figure 330: WebClock Home Page

2. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
3. Click Login. The Select Employee To Maintain page will appear:

Figure 331: WebClock Select Employee to Maintain Page

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 358

Genesis SQL Manual

4. Select employee to work with by Employee Number or Name. The Supervisor

Clock Function with selected employee name page will appear:

Figure 332: WebClock Supervisor Clock Function Page

5. Select Approve Overtime. The Approve Overtime page will appear.

Figure 333: Approve Overtime Page

6. Enter Overtime hours in HHMM format e.g. 3 Overtime Hours = 0300.

If you need Help determining what can be entered into this field click the Question
Mark

7. Click Enter.

8. Confirm the date and time (which you can edit) then Click Submit.

9. The Transaction Successfully Entered label will appear.

10. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 359

Genesis SQL Manual

Adding a Category Transaction

1. Launch your preferred web browser and point it to the proper web page (e.g. your
companies intranet site that contains the WebClock). The WebClock home page will
appear:

Figure 334: WebClock Home Page

2. Enter Badge Number and Password.

NOTE: The Badge Number may include alphanumeric characters, if so all alpha
characters must be in uppercase.
3. Click Login. The Select Employee To Maintain page will appear:

Figure 335: WebClock Select Employee to Maintain Page

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 360

Genesis SQL Manual

4. Select employee to work with by Employee Number or Name. The Supervisor

Clock Function with selected employee name page will appear:

Figure 336: WebClock Supervisor Clock Function Page

5. Select Enter Category. The Enter Category page will appear:

Figure 337: WebClock Category Page

6. Enter the Category Code.

If you need Help determining what characters will be accepted click the Question
Mark.

7. Click Enter.

8. Enter Category Hours in HHMM format e.g. 8 Hours = 0800.

If you need Help determining what can be entered into this field click the Question
Mark.

9. Click Enter.

10. Enter the date and time for the Category Transaction then Click Submit.

The Transaction Successfully Entered label will appear.

.
11. Click Log Out to return to the WebClock Home Page

ATS Series Clocks

Genesis SQL offers a module that allows it to connect to Third Party clocks such as ATS and
Hand Reader. The ATS clocks are badge-swipe clocks similar to the TA500 and TA600 series.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 361

Genesis SQL Manual

Configure ATS Clocks

1. Click the Clocks menu, Configure, ATS. The Configure Clocks dialog box
will open. The Configure dialog box contains several tabs, all of which are
described below.

Figure 338: Configure ATS Clock

2. The General tab defines communication and operation settings and contains
the following information:
Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a unique code (up
to 4 characters) to identify the clock. Once
defined, this code cannot be changed.
ID Enter a unique ID number to identify the clock.
This number will also be programmed into the
clock.
Description Enter a description of the clock. This
description will be seen in the system and on
reports. This field can be used to describe the
clock type and it’s location in your facility (i.e.
ATS In BUILDING TWO). The clock description
can be up to 30 characters long
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
clock is currently in use. Uncheck this box if the
clock is not being used at this time.
RS485 or Serial Select this option to choose an RS485 or
RS232 connection.
Modem Select this option to choose a modem solution.

Ethernet Select this option to choose an Ethernet

solution.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 362

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Baud Rate Select the applicable communication speed.
Make sure the baud rate selected here
matches the baud rate defined at the clock.
• RS485, Serial and Ethernet: 9600
baud
• Modem: 2400 baud
Comm Port Select the communications port on your
computer that will be used to communicate with
the clock. The factory default is COM 1.
Retries Enter the number of times the computer should
attempt to connect to the clock if
communication either fails or is interrupted
during polling.
Connect wait The value entered into this field specifies the
greatest amount of time Genesis SQL will wait
before deciding the clock is unable to be
reached and will time out. This value is minutes
and tenths of minutes.
Connect wait minutes is used solely for
Ethernet communication. ATS series clocks do
not respond immediately to a communication
query across Ethernet communication, instead,
they broadcast continuously on a 30-second
cycle. Depending on the speed of the network
used, the amount of time needed for the
attention signal sent from Genesis SQL to
reach the clock, the clock to finish its' 30
second cycle, and send a signal back, can
fluctuate greatly.
Hayes compatible Check whether the modem used to call the
modem clock is Hayes Compatible. Hayes Corporation
is one of the founders of modem technology
and as a result some modems list themselves
as Hayes Compatible. If not sure, try both
configurations. Refers to modem connected to
this computer. Needed only if modem
communication will be used.
Modem number Enter the phone number the PC modem must
dial to communicate with this clock. The
number must be entered in the following
format:
Outside Line Access Code, Wait Symbol,
Area Code, Phone Number
If no outside line is required (such as 9), simply
enter the phone number. Omit the area code if
not applicable. On most modems, the wait
symbol is a comma (,) typically representing a
one second pause. Multiple wait symbols can
be used if necessary.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 363

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the clock.

IP Port Displays the port used for Ethernet. The default

is 2500 and should not be changed. Altering
this number will result in communication failure,
and the possibility of only being able to connect
to the Etherlink Converter serially.
Time difference Enter the time difference (in hours) between the
between clock and computer and time clock. Since the computer
computer can set the clock’s time, this field compensates
for time zone differences between the
computer’s location and the clock’s location.
When the clock’s time is set, the system either
adds or subtracts this time difference from the
computer’s clock.
A setting of 0 indicates that the clock and
computer are in the same time zone.
Division Select the company division where the clock is
located. Every transaction entered on this clock
is tagged with this division code.
Idle Message Enter the message text that displays on the
time clock when in an idle state. If this field is
left blank, no message will be displayed.
Keyboard entry Check this box to allow employees to enter
badge numbers and other data (such as
department numbers) on the clock's keypad.
Supervisor functions Check this box to allow supervisor functions,
such as entering punches, at the clock
Swipe & Go Check this box to make the clock Swipe & Go.
The system then determines whether the
individual punch was an In or an Out, based on
the last punch the employee did.
For data input Enter the length of time (duration) the
employee will have to enter information after
the badge is swiped.
Displayed messages Enter the length of time (duration) the message
displays on the time clock in seconds. For
example, 2 means the message displays for
two seconds. The maximum message timeout
is 9 seconds. If 0 is entered, no message
displays.
Validation Check this box to validate Job Costing entries
when they are entered at the clock. The F5
function key is configured for Change
Department. Only those Levels that have the
Validate box checked will be validated. After
turning on Validation, the clock must be
programmed. This option is only available with
the Job Costing/Validation module.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 364

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Download messages Check this box to download employee
messages to the clock for display when they
punch in. If an employee does not have a
message assigned to them, and this is
checked, they will not be able to punch in on an
ATS series clock.

3. The Miscellaneous tab defines clock defaults and contains the following
information:

Figure 339: Configure ATS Clocks: Miscellaneous tab

Setting Definition
Clock Defaults Each clock can be assigned a default
Department, Job, Step, and Operation (if
applicable). A function key is defined for the
Defaults in Function Key Setup. Using the
defined function key will automatically transfer
that employee into the Defaults.
Department Select the default Department for this clock.

Job Select the default Job for this clock, if

applicable.
Step Select the default Step for this clock, if
applicable.
Operation Select the default Operation for this clock, if
applicable.
Download Bell Check this box to download a pre-defined Bell
Schedule Schedule to this clock. This option is only
available with the Bell Schedule module.
Bell Schedule Select the pre-defined Bell Schedule you wish
to assign to this clock.

4. The Function Keys tab allows you customize the clock's keypad. As
customizing the keypad can be an extensive process, a section of this
manual has been dedicated to it. See Customizing Function Keys, page

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 365

Genesis SQL Manual

375. This section merely describes the contents of the screen.

The tab contains the following information:

Figure 340: Configure ATS Clock: Function Keys tab

Setting Definition
Clock Code Displays the unique ID code assigned to this
clock.
Soft Key Displays the software function currently assigned
to the selected key. See page 376 for a
description of the functions available.
Prompt Displays the prompt associated with the function
key. The prompts themselves are entered in the
Prompt area in the upper left corner of the
keypad display. Up to four prompts are available.
For more information on creating custom
prompts, see page 376.
Class The Class defines the information being entered,
for reporting. For example, is it a department
number, tips, etc.? Class choices cannot be
added. If None is chosen, the Type setting will
not be available.
Number of Input Enter total number of characters that can be
Characters entered for this Prompt. The number displayed in
this field is based on the Class selected, but may
be changed.
Number of Decimal Enter the number of places after the decimal
point for a numeric entry. A maximum of 4
decimal places may be entered. This field will
only be available if a Numeric option was chosen
in the Class field.
Update Soft Key Click this button to commit the changes made to
a key's functions or settings.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 366

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Swipe and Go Click this button to display the Swipe and Go
function, since there is no actual Swipe and Go
function key. Swipe and Go occurs when an
employee swipes a card through the clock, and is
not asked to enter a function. All swipes are
either In or Out punches.
Selecting Swipe on the Function Key dropdown
menu provides the same information. The Swipe
and Go function will work with all methods of
punching, as long as it is activated under
Configure Main Company. (See Main Company,
page 46).

Hand Reader Clocks

The Hand Reader biometric terminals are powerful computers capable of Hand Geometry
recognition. These devices collect clock data for Genesis SQL.
NOTE: Hand Reader Clocks are not Third Party Terminals; therefore they do not require a
separate module.
Configure a Hand Reader Clock
1. Click the Clocks menu, Configure, Hand Reader. The Configure Clocks
dialog box will open. The Configure dialog box contains several tabs, all of
which are described below.

Figure 341: Configure Hand Reader Clock

2. The General tab configures communication settings and contains the

following information:
Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a unique code (up to 4
characters) to identify the clock. Once defined, this
code cannot be changed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 367

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
ID Enter a unique ID number to identify the clock. This
number will also be programmed into the clock.
Description Enter a description of the clock. This description will
be seen in the system and on reports. This field can
be used to describe the clock type and it’s location in
your facility (i.e. HP3000 In BUILDING TWO). The
clock description can be up to 30 characters long
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock
is currently in use. Uncheck this box if the clock is
not being used at this time.
Model Select the model of your Hand Reader unit. The
options:
• ID3D
• HP2000
• HP3000
• HP4000
Idle Prompt Enter the message text that displays on the time
clock when in an idle state. If this field is left blank,
no message will be displayed.
RS485 or Serial Select this option to choose an RS485 or RS232
connection.
Modem Select this option to choose a modem solution.

Ethernet Select this option to choose an Ethernet solution.

Baud Rate Select the applicable communication speed. Make

sure the baud rate selected here matches the baud
rate defined at the clock.
• Rs485, Serial and Ethernet: 9600 baud
• Modem: 9600 baud
Comm Port Select the communications port on your computer
that will be used to communicate with the clock. The
factory default is COM 1.
Retries Enter the number of times the computer should
attempt to connect to the clock if communication
either fails or is interrupted during polling.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 368

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Modem number Enter the phone number the PC modem must dial to
communicate with this clock. The number must be
entered in the following format:
Outside Line Access Code, Wait Symbol, Area
Code, Phone Number
If no outside line is required (such as 9), simply enter
the phone number. Omit the area code if not
applicable. On most modems, the wait symbol is a
comma (,) typically representing a one second
pause. Multiple wait symbols can be used if
necessary.
IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the Etherlink
converter. DO NOT enter leading zeros.
IP Port Displays the port used for Ethernet. The default is
300 and should not be changed. Altering this
number will result in communication failure.
Time difference Enter the time difference (in hours) between the
between clock and computer and time clock. Since the computer can
computer set the clock’s time, this field compensates for time
zone differences between the computer’s location
and the clock’s location. When the clock’s time is
set, the system either adds or subtracts this time
difference from the computer’s clock.
A setting of 0 indicates that the clock and computer
are in the same time zone.
Division Select the company division where the clock is
located. Every transaction entered on this clock is
tagged with this division code.

3. The Time Zones tab sets time periods during which the clock can be used.
When a person is entered into the Hand Reader, they must be assigned a
Time Zone. Up to 60 Time Zones can be configured per clock. HP2000 Hand
Punch clocks do not support Time Zones. 4 windows for punching may be
setup for each Time Zone. By default, the Hand Punch allows punches at
any time.

The Time Zones table contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 369

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 342: Configure Hand Reader Clocks: Time Zones tab

Setting Definition
Time Zones Displays the number of the Time Zones. There
are 60 available Time Zones. Each time zone
can have up to four Access Windows.
Description Enter a description for each Time Zone.

Access Windows These settings determine the times or windows

during which the clock can be used.
Start Enter the time at which the clock will start
accepting punches. The time must be entered in
military time. The default value is 00:00.
TIP: To indicate that the clock can accept
punches all day, enter 00:00 in the Start and
23:59 in the stop.
Stop Enter the time at which the clock will stop
accepting punches. The time must be entered in
military time. The default value is 00:00.
TIP: To indicate that the clock can accept
punches all day, enter 00:00 in the Start and
23:59 in the stop.
Day of the Week Check the day(s) of the week each Access
Window will be in effect.

4. The Assignments tab lists the employees that can use this clock. This is
necessary because the Hand Reader clocks take measurements of an
employee's hand. Each time the employee punches, the reader compares
the employee’s hand to the existing template. Employee information and
hand templates are stored in the Hand Reader clock. For this reason,
employees must be assigned to a clock so their name and template will be
downloaded to the correct clock.

The tab contains the following information:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 370

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 343: Configure Hand Reader Clock: Employee tab

Setting Definition
Employee Listing Displays a list of the employees that can use this
clock. Includes: employee ID, employee name,
employee badge number, assigned time zone,
personal reject threshold, authority level, and if they
have a hand template saved.
Division Click this button to select employees based on
Division. Employees selected are assigned the
default Time Zone, Reject Threshold, and Authority
automatically.
NOTE: If you use this method to choose employees,
you may want to Edit the employee in order to
choose another Time Zone, Reject Threshold, and
Authority Level.
Group Click this button to select employees based on
Group. Employees selected are assigned the
default Time Zone, Reject Threshold, and Authority
automatically.
NOTE: If you use this method to choose employees,
you may want to Edit the employee in order to
choose another Time Zone, Reject Threshold, and
Authority Level.
Remove All Click this button to remove all employees currently
assigned to the clock.
Add All Click this button to assign all employees to the
clock. Employees selected are assigned the default
Time Zone, Reject Threshold, and Authority
automatically.
NOTE: If you use this method to choose employees,
you may want to Edit the employee in order to
choose another Time Zone, Reject Threshold, and
Authority.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 371

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Add Click this button to select employees individually.
You will be prompted to select the following:
Time Zone: Select the Time Zone (defined on the
previous tab) that applies to this employee.
Reject Override: The reject threshold indicates how
closely the hand has to match the original scanned
hand template. The lower the number, the more
exact the match needs to be.
0 is default and indicates that the default clock
threshold (set on the Miscellaneous tab) will be
used.
Authority Level: The Authority Level defines which
clock menus employee can view or use at the clock.
0 is the lowest (employee) and default, 5 is the
highest and allows complete at-the-clock setup
(supervisor).

5. The Miscellaneous tab defines default operations for the clock and contains
the following information:

Figure 344: Configure Hand Reader Clock: Miscellaneous tab

Setting Definition
Download Bell Check this box to download a pre-defined Bell
Schedule Schedule to this clock. This option is only available
with the Bell Schedule module.
Bell Schedule Select the pre-defined Bell Schedule you wish to
assign to this clock.
Site Enter a unique Site code for this clock. This field
duplicates the Code or Description.
Access Duration Enter the length of time, in seconds that the Access
relay will keep the door open. This value needs to
be entered in whole seconds.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 372

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Access Tries Enter the number of times a user may attempt to
punch into clock before being locked out. If an
employee is locked out, that employee will not be
able to punch until another employee succeeds at
punching the clock.
Reject Threshold The Reject Threshold indicates the point at which
the clock will reject a hand that does not match its
hand template. The lower the score, the closer the
match needs to be. If an employee's punch score
exceeds the Reject Threshold, a reject tone will
sound and the punch will not be accepted.
Keypad beep Check this option to cause a beep to sound when
keys are pressed on the clock keypad.
12 hour display Check this option to display times in 12-hour format
on the clock screen.
Use Access Control Check this box to use the clock for Access Control
to buildings.
Access Only Check this box to use this clock for building access
terminal only. The clock will not record time punches such as
Clock In, Start Lunch, etc.
Mode These settings determine what type of punches the
clock can accept. The options available in this area
depend on the type of Hand Reader clock being
configured.
No Menu: Use if Swipe-and-Go will be used. Allows
custom configuration of function keys on all models
except ID3D. (Available on all clocks).
Punch Menu: Use default menus in hand reader
clock. (Available on all clocks).
Department with No Menu: ID3D hand reader
clocks do not allow for configuration of function
keys. This option enables department transfers.
(ID3D only).
Department with Punch Menu: Allows use of ID3D
built in menu system. (ID3D only).
Passwords Each Clock Configuration menu needs a unique
password assigned. For information on how to
access the menus from the clock and the options
available under each menu, see the Hand Punch
manual. Passwords are numeric and can be up to
10 digits long.
Service Group Enter the password associated with the Service
Group settings at the clock. The default is 1.
Setup Enter the password associated with the Setup
settings at the clock. The default is 2.
Management Enter the password associated with the
Management settings at the clock. The default is 3.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 373

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Enrollment Enter the password associated with the Enrollment
settings at the clock. The default is 4.
Special Enter the password associated with the Special
settings at the clock. The default is 5.
Clock Defaults Each clock can be assigned a default Department,
Job, Step and Operation.
Department Select the default Department for this clock, if
applicable.
Job Select the default Job for this clock, if applicable.

Step Select the default Step for this clock, if applicable.

Operation Select the default Operation for this clock, if

applicable.

6. The Function Keys tab allows you customize the clock's keypad. The Hand
Reader only has two keys which can be programmed: F1 and F2. The ID3D
does not allow you to customize the keypad; therefore this tab will be grayed
out if ID3D is selected.

NOTE: The Hand Reader 4000 has 10 function keys. Eight are user
definable. Choose “No Menu” on the miscellaneous tab to activate.

The tab contains the following information:

Figure 345: Configure ATS Clock: Function Keys tab

Setting Definition
Function Key Displays the function key number being edited.
Number

Soft Key Select the function you wish to assign to this key.
See page 376 for a description of the functions
available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 374

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Prompt 1-4 Enter the text prompt you wish to display on the
clock's screen when this button is used. You may
enter up to four prompts, each of which may
require additional input from the employee.
For example, you might have the F1 key prompt
the employee to enter Piece Rate information,
prompting first for the number of "good" pieces and
next for the number of "bad" pieces.
Class Select the type of information that will be asked for
from the employee. For example, for an ENTER
TIPS prompt, you would choose the class Tip1 or
Tip2.
This field will not become available until you enter
a Prompt. See page 377 for a description of the
classes available.

NOTE: Upon polling convert transaction to access only. This is used mainly
to track access without the time and attendance * written for one person in
particular.
7. The Prog Info tab contains the information that was sent to the clock after
any type of programming.

Customizing Function Keys

Although each clock's keypad is slightly different, the basic procedures for customizing the
function keys are the same. There are four basic steps:
1. Select the key you wish to customize
2. Select the function you wish to assign to the clock.
3. Enter up to four prompts for information that will display when the key is pressed.
4. Define the type of information to be entered following each one of the prompts.
When the clock’s function key is pressed the first prompt displays. After an employee enters the
appropriate response to the first prompt, the second prompt displays, and so on. This continues
until all prompts are displayed or an unsuitable response is encountered. At least one prompt or
message must be entered per function.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 375

Genesis SQL Manual

Pre-Defined Function Keys

TA500, 600 Series, and PC Clock
There are 12 programmable function keys on the keypad. These are numbered 0 through
9, In and Out. Some of these keys come preset from the factory but can be modified or
reassigned.

Function Key Definition

0 Change (department, job, step, etc.)

1 None

2 None

3 None

4 Out for Lunch

5 None

6 In from Lunch

7 None

8 Supervisor Overtime Approval

9 Category Entry

In (10) Clocked In

Out (11) Clocked Out

Available Functions
The following table describes the functions that are available and their uses:

Function Definition Sample Prompt

None Function key unassigned No message.

Clock In Clock In Prompt 1 CLOCKED In

Clock Out Clock Out Prompt 1 CLOCKED Out

Blank System ignores entry No message required.

Change Transfer an employee to another Prompt 1 ENTER DEPT.

level
Prompt 2 ENTER JOB
Prompt 3 ENTER STEP
Prompt 4 ENTER OPER.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 376

Genesis SQL Manual

Function Definition Sample Prompt

Out on Break Clock Out for break Prompt 1 Out FOR BREAK

In from Break Clock In from break Prompt 1 In FROM BREAK

Out for Lunch Clock Out for lunch (factory Prompt 1 Out FOR LUNCH
preset)
In from Lunch Clock In from Lunch (factory Prompt 1 In FROM LUNCH
preset)
Level Change to Transfer employee to the clock Prompt 1 CHANGED – O.K.
Clock Default default level.

Out on Service Clock Out on service Prompt 1 Out ON SERVICE

In on Service Clock In on service Prompt 1 In ON SERVICE

Category Entry Post time In specific categories Prompt 1 ENTER CATEGORY

(vacation, sick, personal, etc.)
Group Transfer Transfer a group of employees to Prompt 1 ENTER GROUP
another level (department, job,
step, operation, etc.)
Group Transfer Transfer group back to original Prompt 1 ENTER GROUP
Back level

Tip Entry Enter tips Prompt 1 ENTER TIP AMOUNT

Supervisor OT Enter supervisor approved Prompt 1 APPROVE OVERTIME

approval overtime

Swipe & Go Use “swipe and go” feature Prompt 1 PUNCH ACCEPTED

Leave Request Employees may submit a Leave Prompt 1 ENTER CATEGORY

Request and the Supervisor will
approve in the Timecard.

Available Classes
Classes define the type of information to be entered following a prompt. The following
table describes the classes that are available and their uses

Function Definition
None This class is used for all prompts or
messages that do not require a response,
such as CLOCKED In or PUNCH ACCEPTED
Department This option classifies the input as a
Department. The clock will be expecting a
Department number to be entered.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 377

Genesis SQL Manual

Function Definition
Job This option classifies the input as a Job. The
clock will be expecting a Job number to be
entered.
Step This option classifies the input as a Step.
The clock will be expecting a Step number to
be entered.
Operation This option classifies the input as an
Operation. The clock will be expecting an
Operation number to be entered.
Category Code This class is used to enter miscellaneous
entries (such as Absences, Per Diems,
Vacation, etc.) at the clock.
TIP: A prompt asking for a dollar amount or
number of hours to be added or subtracted
should follow it.
Hours to Add This class is used to enter hour additions
(adjustment) to the employee's time. This
could be used to grant bonus hours, or to
make time adjustments from previous pay
periods.
Hours to Subtract This class is used to enter hour subtractions
(adjustment) from the employee's time. This
could be used to make time adjustments
from previous pay periods.
Dollars to Add This class is used to enter dollar additions
(adjustment) to the employee's time. This
could be used to add Bonuses or
Commissions from the clocks.
Dollars to Subtract This class is used to enter dollar subtractions
(adjustment) from the employee's time. This
could be used to deduct Union Dues or
payments from the clocks.
Overtime Accrue This class is used to specify if hours entered
through a Category Code, Hours to Add, or
Hours to Subtract, should count toward
overtime. The classes Overtime Accrue and
Overtime Level are only appropriate with
hours, not dollar amounts.
The valid entries for Overtime Accrue are 0
(do not accrue) and 1 (accrue).
Overtime Level This class is used in conjunction with the
Overtime Accrue to indicate the OT level at
which the overtime that are accruing should
be paid.
The valid entries for Overtime Level are 0
(regular time), 1 (OT1), 2 (OT2), and 3
(OT3).

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 378

Genesis SQL Manual

Function Definition
Group Code This class transfers a group of employees
from their current level assignment to
another level. Another function key can be
assigned to transfer them back. When
defining a key for the group transfer, you
must first identify the group code you are
transferring. The Group Code class is used
for this purpose.
Tip1 This class is used to enter and total tips
(typically cash or charge tips). Tips entered
with this class are reported on the
employee’s time card and added to the
category TIP1 for reporting.
Tip2 This class is used to enter and total tips
(typically cash or charge tips). Tips entered
with this class are reported on the
employee’s time card and added to the
category TIP2 for reporting.
Accepted Quantity This class is used to enter Piece Rate
information. The Accepted Quantity indicates
the number of pieces that were successfully
completed.
This option is only available if the optional
Job Costing module is installed and the Level
being worked on is configured for Piece
Rate. These quantities apply to the current
department, job and step levels the
employee is working at the time of entry.
Rejected Quantity This class is used to enter Piece Rate
information. The Rejected Quantity indicates
the number of pieces that were not
successfully completed.
This option is only available if the optional
Job Costing module is installed and the Level
being worked on is configured for Piece
Rate. These quantities apply to the current
department, job and step levels the
employee is working at the time of entry.
Generic Entry This class is used to collect custom data for
use by another software system. If you’re
collecting numeric values, such as a dollar
amount, use Generic Decimal Quantity to
specify the number of decimal places.
Generic dec. If you’re collecting numeric values, such as a
quantity dollar amount, use Generic Decimal
Quantity to specify the number of decimal
places. An entry of 0 indicates a whole
number.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 379

Genesis SQL Manual

Function Definition
Tip3 This class is used to enter and total tips
(typically banquet or other tips). Tips entered
with this class are reported on the
employee’s time card and added to the
category TIP3 for reporting.
Tip4 This class is used to enter and total tips
(typically banquet or other tips). Tips entered
with this class are reported on the
employee’s time card and added to the
category TIP4 for reporting.
Task This option classifies the input as a Task.
The clock will be expecting a task number to
be entered.

Customize Function Keys

1. Navigate to the Function Keys tab of the clock you wish to edit. See the
Configure section for the type of clock you are customizing: TA500/600, PC
Clock page 297; ATS, page 362; Hand Reader, page 367.
2. Select the key you wish to configure on the keypad figure on the left of the
dialog box.

NOTE: Not all function keys can be edited. The settings on the right side of
the dialog box will remain grayed out if you have selected a key that cannot
be edited.
3. The fields on the right side of the screen will display the current settings for
the button, if any.

Figure 346: Customizing Function Keys (Example shows a TA520 keypad)

4. Edit the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Clock Code Displays the unique ID code assigned to this clock.

Function Key Displays the function key number of the key

selected on the keypad graphic to the left.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 380

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Soft Key Select the software function you wish to assign to
the key. See page 376 for a description of the
functions available.
Prompt 1 through 4 Enter the Prompt(s) you wish to display when the
(Prompt area) employee presses the selected function key. You
may enter up to four prompts per key. At least one
prompt must be entered.
NOTE: The Prompt settings in the lower right of the
screen will not become available until you have
entered at least one prompt.
Supervisor only Check this box to allow only supervisor access to
this function key. (Supervisor access is gained by
swiping a supervisor badge in the clock.)
This is used for function keys that collect data or
change employee assignments, such as Group
Transfer or Category Entry. Clearing this box
permits any employee to access this function key.
Check Profiles Check this box to enforce Profile Lockouts. This
option is only used when the optional Access
Control and Profile Lockout module is installed.
Checking this box means that when an employee
swipes a badge and presses this function key, the
clock will check the Profile information to make
sure the employee is allowed to use clock during
this time. If the box is unchecked, the Profile table
will not be accessed to verify the information.
NOTE: The Profile Access Module needs to be
installed, and a Profile needs to be assigned to the
clock, before this checkbox is available. This option
will work only after a Profile is setup, assigned to
the correct employees, and assigned to the clock.
The clock needs to be polled with the Program
clocks and Load Profile Tables options checked.
Check Access Check this box to enforce Profile Access. Access is
used to open doors or other electric lock type
enclosures.
If a valid badge is used, the door will open. When
used in conjunction with Profiles, Profiles will take
over the verification process. If the employee is
confirmed to be able to use this function key at this
time, the door will open.
NOTE: The Profile Access Module needs to be
installed, and Access must be defined for the
terminal, before this checkbox is available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 381

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Prompt Displays the prompt associated with the function
key. The prompts themselves are entered in the
Prompt area in the upper left corner of the keypad
display. Up to four prompts are available.
NOTE: These Prompt settings will not become
available until you have entered at least one
prompt in the Prompt area in the upper left of the
screen.
Swipe Check this box to indicate that employees must
swipe a magnetic badge to enter the information
requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Department
Key Check this box to indicate that employees may key
the information requested by the prompt.
Example: Enter Tips
Bar Code Check this box to indicate that employees must
swipe a bar code to enter the information requested
by the prompt.
Example: Enter Job
Class Select the class of information to be entered
following the prompt. See page 377 for a
description of the classes available.
NOTE: If None is chosen, the Type setting will not
be available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 382

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Type Select the data Type for the information being
entered. The settings in Company Defaults of Main
company determine which Type options are
available for each Class.
The options are:
Alphabetic: Clock will accept letters only for this
entry.
Numeric: Clock will accept numbers only for this
entry.
Alphanumeric: Clock will accept both numbers
and letters.
Number with forced decimal places: Clock will
accept numbers only and will automatically place
the last two numbers entered behind the decimal
place. (For example, if 1499 is entered, the clock
will format it as 14.99).
Alphanumeric – hidden entry: Clock will accept
letters only; the letters will not display on the clock's
screen.
Number – hidden entry Clock will accept numbers
only; the numbers will not display on the clock's
screen.
Maximum Input Enter the maximum total number of characters that
Characters can be entered for this Prompt. The number
displayed in this field is based on the Class
selected.
Minimum Input Enter the minimum number of characters that can
Characters be entered for this Prompt. The default value for
this field is 1, but may be changed.
Number of Decimal Enter the number of places after the decimal point
for a numeric entry. A maximum of 4 decimal
places may be entered. This field will only be
available if a Numeric option was chosen in the
Class field.
Display Entry data Check this box to display the input information.

Verify valid entry Check this box to enforce the Validation available
with the Job Cost/Validation Module. Validation
must be turned on for each level, Download Names
must be checked under the miscellaneous tab, and
Load Level Validation must be checked as a polling
option.
The clock will check the input information against
the downloaded level information. If the level entry
does not exist at the time of the last programming,
the data will be considered invalid.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 383

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Swipe and Go Click this button to display and edit the Swipe and
Definition Go function, since there is no actual Swipe and Go
function key. Swipe and Go occurs when an
employee swipes a card through the clock, and is
not asked to enter a function.
Selecting Swipe on the Function Key dropdown
menu provides the same information. The Swipe
and Go function will work with all methods of
punching, as long as it is activated under Configure
Main Company. (See Main Company, page 46).

5. When all settings are complete, click the Update Soft Key to commit the
changes.

Add a Clock
1. Click the Clocks menu, Configure, and select the type of clock you wish to
add. The Configure Clock dialog box will open.
2. Click the Add button. If this is the first clock of this type that you are adding,
the General tab will become available.

Figure 347: Example: Add a Clock

3. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure section for the type of clock
you are adding. TA500/600, PC Clock page 297; Web Clock page 335; ATS,
page 362; Hand Reader, page 367.
4. If there is already a clock of this type defined, the Default Clock Add dialog
box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 384

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 348: Default Clock Add

5. Highlight the clock whose settings you would like to copy or click No to start
from scratch.
6. Enter a unique code for this clock, up to four characters.
7. Enter a Description of the clock (i.e., Warehouse, Back Office, California,
etc.)
8. Click the Yes button to continue. You will be returned to the General tab.
9. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure section for the appropriate
clock. See TA500/600, page 297; ATS, page 362; Hand Reader, page 367.
10. When all settings are complete, click OK to commit the changes.

Edit a Clock
1. Click the Clocks menu, Configure and select the type of clock you wish to
edit. The Configure Clock dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Clock you wish to edit using the drop-down list at the top of the
screen.
3. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected category.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Clock section for the clock you
are editing.
5. When all settings are complete, click OK to commit the changes.

Delete a Clock
1. Click the Clocks menu, Configure and select the type of clock you wish to
edit. The Configure Clock dialog box will open.
2. Highlight the Clock you wish to edit using the drop-down list at the top of the
screen.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 385

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 349: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the Configure Clock dialog box.

Videx Data Collectors

The Videx can record employee routes, time, and monitor productivity for a multitude of industries
including Security, Manufacturing, Retail, Hospitals and Healthcare. The Videx can have multiple
configurations ranging from a simple route to complex route and issue tracking. Videx is a contact
bar code and Touch Memory button reader. Videx brings you the latest in highly functional
portables.

6. Click the Clocks menu, Configure, Videx. The Configure Videx Data
Collectors dialog box will open. The dialog box contains several tabs, all of
which are described below.

Figure 350: Configure Videx Data Collectors: General tab

7. The General tab defines the communication and general operation settings
and contains the following information:
Setting Definition
Code This is a required field. Enter a unique code
(up to 4 characters) to identify the data
collector. Once defined, this code cannot be
changed.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 386

Genesis SQL Manual

Description Enter a description of the data collector. This

description will be seen in the system and on
reports. This field can be used to describe
the clock type and it’s location in your facility
(i.e. Videx In BUILDING TWO). The clock
description can be up to 30 characters long.
Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the
data collector is currently in use. Uncheck
this box if the data collector is not being used
at this time.
Model Select the model of your Videx Data
Collector. The options:
• Dura Trax
• LaserLite
• LaserLite Pro
• LaserLite MX
Comm Port Select the communications port on your
computer that will be used to communicate
with the data collector.

Idle Message Enter the message text that displays on the

time clock when in an idle state. If this field is
left blank, no message will be displayed.
The idle message will hold up to 16
characters.

Division Select the Division that the data collector is

for.

Download OS Click this button to download the operating

system to the data collector.

Figure 351: Configure Videx Data Collectors: Input Definition

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 387

Genesis SQL Manual

3. Input Definition tab specifies the message and timeout settings and contains
the following information:

Setting Definition
Function Key Displays the function key number of the key
selected.
Soft Key Displays the software function currently
assigned to the selected key.
Prompt 1 through 4 Enter the Prompt(s) you wish to display when
(Prompt Area) the employee presses the selected function
key. You may enter up to four prompts per
key. At least one prompt must be entered.
NOTE: The Prompt settings to the right of the
screen will not become available until you
have entered at least one prompt.
Prompt Definition Displays the prompt associated with the
function key. The prompts themselves are
entered in the Prompt area to the left of the
screen. Up to four prompts are available.
Input Data Select this feature to enable data input.

Class The Class defines the information being

entered, for reporting. For example, is it a
department number, tips, etc.? Class choices
cannot be added. If None is chosen, the
Type setting will not be available.
See page 377 for a description of the classes
available.
Number of input The number of characters that can be
characters entered for this Prompt.

Use I-button for Select this feature to activate I-button use for
input? data input.

Update soft key Click this button to commit the changes

made to a key’s functions or settings.
Print barcoded keys Allows you to generate barcodes for the
selected keys. This can save time and effort
at the clock, not to mention helping to ensure
that the numbers entered are accurate.

Add a Data Collector

4. Click the Clocks menu, Configure, and select the type of clock you wish to
add. The Configure Videx Data Collectors dialog box will open.
5. Click the Add button. If this is the first data collector of this type that you are
adding, the General tab will become available.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 388

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 352: Example: Add a Videx Data Collector

6. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Videx Data Collectors

section.
7. Click on the Input Definition tab.

Figure 353: Adding Videx Data Collector

8. Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Videx Data Collectors

section.
9. When all settings are complete, click OK to commit the changes.

Edit a Data Collector

10. Click the Clocks menu, Configure and select the type of clock you wish to
edit. The Configure Videx Data Collectors dialog box will open.
11. Highlight the Data Collector you wish to edit.
12. Click the Edit button. The General screen will become available for you to
edit the selected category.
13. Edit the settings as described in the Configure Videx Data Collector section.
14. When all settings are complete, click OK to commit the changes.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 389

Genesis SQL Manual

Delete a Data Collector

15. Click the Clocks menu, Configure and select the type of clock you wish to
edit. The Configure Videx Data Collectors dialog box will open.
16. Highlight the Data Collector you wish to delete.
17. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 354: Deletion Confirmation

18. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

19. Click Close to exit the Configure Videx Data Collectors dialog box.

Set Date and Time

The Set Date and Time function synchronizes the date and time of the terminals with the
computer that is running the software. You can set the date and time on one or more clocks.
However, all clocks must be defined in Clock Maintenance before the date and time is set.
Before using this function, the host computer must be set to the correct date and time. Otherwise,
all clock transactions will have an incorrect date and time stamp (although admittedly they'll all be
synchronized).
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not perform this function during periods of high clock
activity (such as the start of day when employees are clocking In).

1. Click the Clocks menu, Set Date and Time. The Set Date and Time Clock
Selection dialog box will open.

Figure 355: Set Date and Time

2. Select the clock(s) for which you wish to set the date and time by using the
Add button to add the selected clock individually, or Add All to add all
clocks.
3. Click the Date/Time button to display the Windows Date/Time Properties
dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 390

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 356: Windows Date/Time Properties

4. If necessary, edit the date and time to be accurate and click OK.
5. Click the Set Time button to commit the changes.
6. When Genesis SQL has finished sending the Date and Time to clock, click
Close to exit the dialog box.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 391

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter XII Terminal Polling and AutoProcessing

This section describes the concepts and techniques associated with polling clocks and
setting up Auto Processes.
Polling is the process of communicating data to and from the clock, including transferring
employee time transactions and other data from the clocks to the host computer (PC) for
processing. Clocks can be manually polled or automatically polled on a pre-defined
schedule.
AutoProcessing allows certain common tasks to be run automatically. Polling, Reports,
custom files, and Reindexing can set to Auto Process.

Polling
Polling Time Clocks
Polling is the process of communicating data back and forth between the clock and
Genesis SQL. Polling can be done manually, which means a supervisor or administrator
must launch the Genesis SQL software and request that the clock be polled. Polling may
also be set as an auto process, which means that the Genesis SQL is responsible for
communicating with the clock on a pre-defined schedule.
This section describes how to poll the clock manually.
1. Click the Clocks menu, Poll. The Poll Clock Selection dialog box will open.

Figure 357: Poll Clock Selection

2. Select the clock(s) you wish to poll by using the Add button to add the
selected clock individually, or the Add All button to add all clocks.
3. Click the Polling Options tab to select it. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Poll Transactions Check this option to transfer punches from
the clock to Genesis SQL.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 392

Genesis SQL Manual

Clear Clock Check this option to clear the transactions

Transactions from the clock after transferring them to
Genesis SQL.
TIP: This does not need to be done every
time. You may leave the transactions in the
clock until payroll is processed successfully,
however if you have a lot of employees you
will want to clear frequently so the clock does
not get full.
Set Clock Date and Check this option to send the computer's
Time current date and time to the clock.
TIP: You may not want to do this every time,
as the clock's internal clock tends to be much
more accurate that the computer's.
Program Clock Check this option to send programming and
configuration information (such as the
settings in the Configure Clock dialog box) to
the clock. Clock function keys and function
messages are sent to the clock during
programming.
This option should only be used when basic
clock setup has been changed since the
initial programming.
Load Bell Check this option to send pre-defined Bell
Schedules Schedule assigned to the clock.
Bell schedules are only checked at midnight,
so a bell will not ring on the same day the
bell schedule was downloaded. The Bell
Module must be installed to use this option.
Load Access Check this option to send the Access Control
Control table settings defined in Configure Clock to the
clock.
This option must be turned on in the clock
setup, and the Profile/Access Module must
be installed.
Load Profile tables Check this option to send Profile Lockout
settings to the clock.
The Profile/Access Module must be installed
to use this option.
Load Level Check this option to send Department, Job,
Validation Step and Operation number validation to the
clock.
When an employee punches in department,
job, step, or operation number, it is
compared to the defined codes that were
downloaded from Genesis SQL. If the codes
do not match, the input is rejected.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 393

Genesis SQL Manual

Load Messages Check this option to send employee

messages to the clock.
Hand Reader These settings only apply to the Hand
Reader clocks. The options are:
Send Hand Templates: Select this option to
send employee hand templates to the clock.
This can be used to upload a template to a
new clock, or to restore templates to a clock
that has been cleared.
Clear Templates: Check this option to clear
the templates from the clock. USE THIS
OPTION VERY CAREFULLY, as it will
delete all existing templates in the clock and
employees will not be able to punch until the
templates are restored.
Retrieve Hand Templates: Check this
option to download new hand templates from
the clock for input into the Genesis SQL
database.
Process Punches Check this option to automatically put the
after polling punches into the online timecards of the
employees.

4. Click the Poll button to start the polling process.

Polling Videx DuraTrax

Polling is the process of communicating data back and forth between the data collector
and Genesis SQL. Polling can be done manually, which means a supervisor or
administrator must launch the Genesis SQL software and request that the data collector
be polled. Polling may also be set as an auto process, which means that the Genesis
SQL is responsible for communicating with the data collector on a pre-defined schedule.
1. Click the Clocks menu, Poll. The Poll Clock Selection dialog box will open.

Figure 358: Poll Clock Selection

2. Select the Data Collector you wish to poll by using the Add button to add the
selected data collector.
NOTE: Data Collectors must be polled individually.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 394

Genesis SQL Manual

3. Click the Polling Options tab to select it. Fill in the settings as appropriate:
Setting Definition
Poll Transactions Check this option to transfer punches from
the clock to Genesis SQL.
Clear Clock Check this option to clear the transactions
Transactions from the clock after transferring them to
Genesis SQL.
TIP: This does not need to be done every
time. You may leave the transactions in the
clock until payroll is processed successfully,
however if you have a lot of employees you
will want to clear frequently so the clock does
not get full.
Set Clock Date and Check this option to send the computer's
Time current date and time to the clock.
TIP: You may not want to do this every time,
as the clock's internal clock tends to be much
more accurate that the computer's.
Program Clock Check this option to send programming and
configuration information (such as the
settings in the Configure Clock dialog box) to
the clock. Clock function keys and function
messages are sent to the clock during
programming.
This option should only be used when basic
clock setup has been changed since the
initial programming.
Load Bell Check this option to send pre-defined Bell
Schedules Schedule assigned to the clock.
Bell schedules are only checked at midnight,
so a bell will not ring on the same day the
bell schedule was downloaded. The Bell
Module must be installed to use this option.
Load Access Check this option to send the Access Control
Control table settings defined in Configure Clock to the
clock.
This option must be turned on in the clock
setup, and the Profile/Access Module must
be installed.
Load Profile tables Check this option to send Profile Lockout
settings to the clock.
The Profile/Access Module must be installed
to use this option.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 395

Genesis SQL Manual

Load Level Check this option to send Department, Job,

Validation Step and Operation number validation to the
clock.
When an employee punches in department,
job, step, or operation number, it is
compared to the defined codes that were
downloaded from Genesis SQL. If the codes
do not match, the input is rejected.
Load Messages Check this option to send employee
messages to the clock.
Hand Reader These settings only apply to the Hand
Reader clocks. The options are:
Send Hand Templates: Select this option to
send employee hand templates to the clock.
This can be used to upload a template to a
new clock, or to restore templates to a clock
that has been cleared.
Clear Templates: Check this option to clear
the templates from the clock. USE THIS
OPTION VERY CAREFULLY, as it will
delete all existing templates in the clock and
employees will not be able to punch until the
templates are restored.
Retrieve Hand Templates: Check this
option to download new hand templates from
the clock for input into the Genesis SQL
database.
Process Punches Check this option to automatically put the
after polling punches into the online timecards of the
employees.

4. Click the Poll button to start the polling process.

Configure an AutoProcess
The Auto Process feature allows you to schedule the following tasks to run automatically at pre-
determined times:
• Poll one or more time clocks
• Launch executable programs
• Generate reports
No user interaction is required when using the Auto Process feature. In fact, you can poll time
clocks, run reports, download payroll data, and back up the Genesis SQL data without ever
touching the computer. The Auto Process feature is ideal for processes that need to be
performed after working hours or during less busy times of the day.
Each automatic procedure can consist of one or more auto process cycles. Each cycle can run a
program, poll the time clocks, or generate a report and is assigned a time and day(s) of the week

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 396

Genesis SQL Manual

to run. To create an AutoProcess that runs several times a day, you will add several cycles: one
for each time you wish the process to run.
NOTE: The Genesis SQL software must be running on the computer doing the polling in order for
the AutoProcess to occur.

Run as Service
The autoprocess can be configured to run as a service it must be installed locally as it will not run
over a network. The server must run the service.
1. In Windows Explorer find the Genesis SQL folder. Locate and double-click
InstallAutoprocess. A black command prompt window will flash.
2. In Windows Explorer find the Genesis SQL folder. Locate and double-click
autoProcess this will install the automated User responsible for the Auto
Process. A white Auto poll dialogue window will appear, but will give the
message “nothing to poll.”
NOTE: To confirm the success of this action open Genesis SQL click the
File menu, Security, User Maintenance. There will be a new user:
Autoprocess Service.
3. Open Genesis SQL, click the Clocks menu, Auto Process. In the
Configure Auto Processing dialog window select 1000 Autoprocess Service,
click Edit and configure your specific auto process features (see Add an
AutoProcess).
4. Locate your system Services window and Start the Time America Auto
Process or…
5. In Windows Explorer find the Genesis SQL folder. Locate and double-click
autoProcessServiceSetup this will allow you to start the automated service.
6. Click the Start button. If you want the service to start when the operating
system is starting, check the appropriate box.

Add an AutoProcess
1. Click the Clocks menu, AutoProcess. The Configure Auto Process dialog
box will open.
2. Click the Add button and the Auto Process Maintenance dialog box will
open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 397

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 359: Configure Auto Process

3. Enter the Number and Name for this Auto Process.

4. Click the Add button. The Auto Process Schedule Details dialog box will
open.

Figure 360: Auto Process Schedule Details

Setting Definition
Description Enter a description for this AutoProcess
Schedule. Examples: Poll California Clock,
Run Payroll Reports, etc.
Run a File Select this option to schedule an Event that
will launch any sort of executable program.
An example of this might be a Batch file that
"zips" up your data files and copies them to a
safe location on your network. With this
option selected, you must enter the path to
the desired file.
Poll Clocks Select this option to schedule an event that
will poll the transactions from any or all of
your time clocks. This Event can also
perform any of the other normal time clock
polling options.
You must be sure to "tag" all the time clocks
you want to poll by either double-clicking on
them or selecting the "tag all" button. You
must also select at least one polling option
by clicking the "Poll Options" button.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 398

Genesis SQL Manual

Run Reports Select this option to schedule an Event that

will automatically run any of several reports
such as "Missing Punches" or "Hours".
You may notice that the list of available
reports is greatly abridged and that none of
the Payroll Exports are available. Time Card
data should be thoroughly reviewed before
running any Payroll Export. Each report to be
run must be "tagged" by double-clicking it
and choosing the desired settings in the
Report Parameter Window. Once set, these
parameters can be changed at any time by
clicking the Report Options button.
Reindex Select this option to schedule an event that
will Reindex all the system databases.
This Event must be scheduled at a time
when it is most likely that all users will be
logged out. If another user is logged into the
system, this Event will be skipped.
Items List The items that display in this list depend
upon the type of AutoProcess chosen. For
example, if Poll Clocks is selected, this list
will display all the clocks configured in the
program.
To select a single item, double-click the item
to "tag" it.
Click the Tag All button to select all items.
Time Enter the time at which you want the process
to occur.
Day of the Week Select the days of the week you want the
process to occur.
Tag All/Untag All Click the Tag All button to select all the
items in the list. Click Untag All to deselect
all the items in the list.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 399

Genesis SQL Manual

Poll Clocks AutoProcess

1. If Poll Clocks is selected, select the clock(s) you wish to poll with this
process by double-clicking each clock to "tag" it.
2. If Poll Clocks is selected, click the Polling Options button to configure the
settings for polling. The Polling Options dialog box will open.

Figure 361: Polling Options

3. Check the options that are appropriate:

Setting Definition
Poll Transactions Check this option to transfer punches from
the clock to Genesis SQL.
Clear Clock Check this option to clear the transactions
Transactions from the clock after transferring them to
Genesis SQL.
TIP: This does not need to be done every
time. You may leave the transactions in the
clock until payroll is processed successfully,
however if you have a lot of employees you
will want to clear more frequently so the
clock memory does not fill up.
Set Clock Date and Check this option to send the computer's
Time current date and time to the clock.
TIP: You may not want to do this every time,
as the clock's internal clock tends to be much
more accurate that the computer's.
Program Clock Check this option to send programming and
configuration information (such as the
settings in the Configure Clock dialog box) to
the clock. Clock function keys and function
messages are sent to the clock during
programming.
This option should only be used when basic
clock setup has been changed since the
initial programming.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 400

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Load Bell Check this option to send pre-defined Bell
Schedules Schedule assigned to the clock.
Bell schedules are only checked at midnight,
so a bell will not ring on the same day the
bell schedule was downloaded. The Bell
Module must be installed to use this option.
NOTE: This is not recommended with the
TA520 or TA530, as the clock needs to roll
past midnight for the bell schedule to take
effect.
Load Access Check this option to send the Access Control
Control table settings defined in Configure Clock to the
clock.
This option must be turned on in the clock
setup, and the Profile/Access Module must
be installed.
Load Profile tables Check this option to send Profile Lockout
settings to the clock.
The Profile/Access Module must be installed
to use this option.
Load Level Check this option to send Department, Job,
Validation Step and Operation number validation to the
clock.
When an employee punches in department,
job, step, or operation number, it is
compared to the defined codes that were
downloaded from Genesis SQL. If the codes
do not match, the input is rejected.
Load Messages Check this option to send employee
messages to the clock.
Hand Reader These settings only apply to the Hand
Reader clocks. The options are:
Send Hand Templates: Select this option to
send employee hand templates to the clock.
This can be used to upload a template to a
new clock, or to restore templates to a clock
that has been cleared.
Clear Templates: Check this option to clear
the templates from the clock. USE THIS
OPTION VERY CAREFULLY, as it will
delete all existing templates in the clock and
employees will not be able to punch until the
templates are restored.
Retrieve Hand Templates: Check this
option to download new hand templates from
the clock for input into the Genesis SQL
database.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 401

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Process Punches Check this option to automatically put the
after polling punches into the online timecards of the
employees.
4. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Auto Process Maintenance
screen.
5. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Auto Process
Screen.
6. Click Start to activate the Auto Process schedule.
NOTE: Genesis SQL must be running for the Auto Process to work. You may
minimize the Genesis SQL window.
NOTE: For network installs, you will need to check that the network is not
doing any backups or running any utilities during the auto processing
schedule.
Run Reports AutoProcess
1. If Run Reports is selected, choose the report(s) you wish to run by double-
clicking each report to "tag" it and filling in the report settings. The Report
Parameters dialog box for the selected report will open.
2. Fill in the Report Parameters windows as described in the Run Reports
section.
3. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Auto Process
Screen.
4. Click Start to activate the Auto Process schedule.
Run a File AutoProcess
1. If Run a File is selected, you will be prompted to choose the file (program,
etc.) to run.
2. When all settings are complete, click OK. The AutoProcess will begin on the
next occurrence of the date and time specified in the AutoProcess Schedule
Details.
3. Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Auto Process
Screen.
4. Click Start to activate the Auto Process schedule

Edit an Auto Process

1. Click the Clocks menu, AutoProcess. The Configure Auto Process dialog
box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 402

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 362: Configure Auto Process

2. Select the AutoProcess you wish to change.

3. Click the Edit button.
4. Edit the settings as described in the Add an AutoProcess section.
Delete an AutoProcess
1. Click the Clocks menu, AutoProcess. The Auto Process Maintenance
dialog box will open.
2. Select the AutoProcess you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete button. You will be prompted:

Figure 363: Deletion Confirmation

4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

5. Click Close to exit the dialog box.
Replicate an AutoProcess
1. Click the Clocks menu, AutoProcess. The Auto Process Maintenance
dialog box will open.
2. Select the AutoProcess you wish to replicate.
3. Click the Replicate button. You will be prompted:

4. Define the minutes within a 24 hour period.

5. Click OK to confirm the replication.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 403

Genesis SQL Manual

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 404

Genesis SQL Manual

Chapter XIII Utilities

This section describes the system utilities built into Genesis SQL. It includes importing
and exporting, reindexing, system archiving, system backups, and more.

Importing
It is possible to import data from other programs. Employee data, time transactions, and
departments can be imported from previous versions of the software as well as from other third
party systems, spreadsheets, and payroll programs.

Advanced Import
Employee data and attendance reports from third party accounting systems, spreadsheets, and
payroll programs can be imported into Genesis SQL. The original files may be in any number of
formats including ASCII comma delimited, Excel, or Lotus 1-2-3. When imported, the data is
appended to the specified system database file. The file types Genesis SQL Import supports are:
• Framework II (FW2)
• Microsoft Multiplan 4.01 (MOD)
• Paradox 3.5/4.0 (DB)
• Rapidfile (RPD)
• Lotus 123 versions 1 through 3 (WKS, WK1, WK3)
• Symphony version 1 through 1.2 (WRK, WR1)
• Microsoft Excel (XLS)
• Comma Delimited
• Tab Delimited
• Space Delimited
• System Data Format (SDF)
• Symbolic Link Format (SYLK)
• Data Interchange Format (DIF)
• FoxPro

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 405

Genesis SQL Manual

1. Click the File menu, Import, Advanced. The Configure Import dialog box will
open.

Figure 364: Configure Import

2. Select the type of file to be imported.

3. Click the Import File button to select the file that contains the information to
be imported. The Open dialog box will open.

Figure 365: Open File

4. Navigate to and select the file you wish to import. The file must be of one of
the types listed at the beginning of the Import section.
5. Click the Select button to commit the change.
6. Click the Append To button to select the table onto which this data will be
appended. The Open dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 406

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 366: Open

7. Select the Genesis SQL database file to which you wish to append, and click
the USE button to continue.
8. Click OK to begin the import process.

Import Benefits
1. Click the File menu, Import, Benefits. The Import File dialog box will open.

Figure 367: Import Benefits

2. Click the Import File button to select the file that contains the information to
be imported. The Open dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 407

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 368: Open File

3. Navigate to and select the file you wish to import, then click the Select button
to commit the change.
4. Click the OK button to begin importing employee data.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 408

Genesis SQL Manual

Exporting Data
The Export function allows you to extract data from Genesis SQL for use in other programs.
When exported, the database files can be used with many commercial spreadsheet programs
and report writers to generate custom reports. The supported applications are:
• Microsoft Multiplan 4.01 (MOD)
• Lotus 123 versions 1 through 2 (WKS, WK1)
• Symphony version 1 through 1.2 (WRK, WR1)
• Microsoft Excel (XLS)
• Comma Delimited
• Tab Delimited
• Space Delimited
• System Data Format (SDF)
• Symbolic Link Format (SYLK)
• Data Interchange Format (DIF)
• Database (FoxPlus)

1. Click the File menu, Export. The Configure Export dialog box will open.

Figure 369: Configure Export

2. Click the Export File button. The Open dialog box will appear.

Figure 370: Open

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 409

Genesis SQL Manual

3. Select the file you wish to export and click the USE button to continue.
4. Select the type of file you wish to export to. See above for a list of the
available file types.
5. Click the Save As button to define the file name of the exported data. The
Save As dialog box will open.

Figure 371: Save As

6. In the File Name box, enter the name you wish to use for the exported data
file. The extension will fill in automatically based on the type of file chosen in
the previous dialog box.
7. Click Save to continue.
8. Click OK to begin the export.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 410

Genesis SQL Manual

System Utilities
Genesis SQL provides utilities to keep your system running smoothly. Among other things, these
utilities can repair databases, perform backups, and archive data for long-term storage.
Because these utilities affect data, and ultimately your payroll, contact your local
representative if you have questions or concerns about the operation of a specific utility.
The following utilities are found under the Utilities menu under File and are described in this
section:
• Initialize Databases
• Change Employee Number
• Change Employee Number Width
• Print Barcodes
• Set Reprocess Date
• Fix Unassigned Badges
• Restore Original Reports
• Repost R-Files
• Purge R-Files
• Post Historical Data

Initialize Databases
The Initialize Databases utility completely removes the contents of database files. This
utility is useful when databases become corrupted beyond recovery
NOTE: This utility completely deletes ALL data in the selected databases. Only the
SYSOP is able to initialize data.

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Initialize Databases. The Initialize Selection
dialog box will open.

Figure 372: Initialize Selection

2. Select the database you wish to initialize by clicking Add to select an

individual database or Add All to add all.
3. Click OK to begin the process. ALL DATA IN THE SELECTED TABLES
WILL BE DESTROYED.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 411

Genesis SQL Manual

Change Employee Number

Once an employee has been added to the system, you can no longer change his or her
employee number through the Configure Employees Detail screen. This utility allows you
to change employee numbers, one employee at a time.

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Change Employee Number. The Change
Employee Number dialog box will open.

Figure 373: Change Employee Number

2. Select the employee whose number you wish to change using the drop-down
list in the Old field.
3. Enter the new employee number in the New field.
4. Click OK to change the employee's number.

Change Employee Number Width

The number of digits (width) in the Employee Number is initially defined in the Configure
Main Company dialog box. However, once employees have been added you can no
longer change the setting through the Main Company screen. This avoids accidental data
loss.
This utility allows you to change the number of digits for Employee Numbers safely.
Typically, the width should only be changed to a higher (longer) number in order to avoid
losing data. When digit length is increased, the digits are added on to the left of the
current number. When digits are taken away, they are taken from the right.

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Change Employee Number Width. The
Change Employee Number Width dialog box will open.

Figure 374: Change Employee Number Width

2. Enter the number of digits for the new employee number.

3. Click OK to commit the change.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 412

Genesis SQL Manual

Print Barcodes
The Print Barcodes utility allows you generate barcodes for Employee Numbers, as well as
Department, Job, Step, Operation, and Task Numbers. Using this utility you can create your
employee badges or create bar-code sheets that employees can use to scan in Department,
Job, Step, Operation, and Task (rather than having to key the numbers in manually.) This can
save time and effort at the clock, not to mention helping to ensure that the numbers entered
are accurate.

Badge Maker
The Badge Maker allows you to print Employee Numbers as bar codes suitable for
creating employee badges.

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Print Barcodes, Badge Maker. The Select
Employee dialog box will open.

Figure 375: Select Employee

2. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Selection Select the status of employee to be printed.
The options are:
Active: Prints barcodes for active employees
only.
Inactive: Prints barcodes for inactive
employees only.
Both: Prints barcodes for both active and
inactive.
Output Destination Select where you want the completed
barcodes to go. The options are:
Screen: Previews the badges on screen,
from which you can print.
Printer: Sends the badges directly to the
printer.
File: Sends the badges to an external file.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 413

Genesis SQL Manual

Employees Select the employee(s) for whom you wish to

make badges. Click the Add button to add
the selected employee, or the Add All button
to add all employees.

3. Click OK to create the badges. The badges will be sent to the Output
Destination selected.

Figure 376: Completed Badges

4. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Level Codes
The Print Level Codes utility generates labels that contain barcodes for the different
Department, Jobs, Steps, Operations, and Tasks (if applicable) in your database.

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Print Barcodes, Level Codes. The Select
Level dialog box will open. (The title of this dialog box will reflect the current
level chosen).

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 414

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 377: Select Level

2. Fill in the settings as appropriate:

Setting Definition
Selection Select the level to be printed. The options
are Department, Job, Step, Operation, and
Task (if Job Costing is in Use).
Output Destination Select where you want the completed
barcodes to go. The options are:
Screen: Previews the badges on screen,
from which you can print.
Printer: Sends the badges directly to the
printer.
File: Sends the badges to an external file.
Items Select the items(s) for which you wish to
make badges. Click the Add button to add
the selected item, or the Add All button to
add all items.

3. Click OK to create the badges. The badges will be sent to the Output
Destination selected.

Figure 378: Completed Badges

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 415

Genesis SQL Manual

4. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Set Reprocess Date

The Set Reprocess Date utility allows you to globally reset the reprocess date for
employees.
Processing occurs when Genesis SQL takes the punches from a clock and applies them
to the correct employee, taking into account pre-setup information such as Company
Policy, Shift rules, etc. Reprocessing is what happens when a user has made changes to
the polled punches, and/or configuration information, and now needs to have Genesis
SQL recalculate the data. If Genesis SQL had to recalculate data every time a user
opened an employee timecard, the usefulness of the program would be offset by the
amount of time needed for the calculations. Time is saved by allowing a user to make all
necessary changes before reprocessing the data, which is the driving reason behind
having automated timekeeping software.
This utility does not actually reprocess the punches. It allows a user to decide how far
back, and for whom, the system will process punches. After changing this setting, you will
need to manually reprocess, at which time the system will reprocess back to the date
entered here for the employees selected.

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Set Reprocess Date. The Reprocess
Punches dialog box will open.

Figure 379: Reprocess Punches

2. Enter the Reprocess date.

3. Select the employees for whom you wish to reprocess by using the Add
button to select an individual employee or Add All to select all.
4. Click OK to complete the change.
5. Reprocess punches. This can be accomplished by clicking the Reprocess
button in the Online Timecard. See Online Timecard, page 243. Or by
running a report with the Reprocess button selected.

Fix Unassigned Badges

Employees are able to start punching at the clocks before their data is entered into
Genesis SQL. The badge used by the employee is considered to be unassigned if the
employee's punches are polled prior to the employee being added to the software. You
can repost the employee's punches after adding the employee to the software using this
utility.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 416

Genesis SQL Manual

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Fix Unassigned Badges. The Unassigned
Badge Maintenance dialog box will open.

Figure 380: Unassigned Badge Maintenance

2. This screen will show the employees whose badges were unassigned at the
time of polling.
3. Select the employee you wish to repost. Make sure that this employee is
added to the program at this time and has the correct badge number. You
may also click Print to view a list of all unassigned badges.
4. Click the Repost button. Genesis SQL will match the badge in the
transaction to a badge assigned to the employee.
5. The Special Repost option will compare the listed badges to current
employee numbers (rather than comparing to a badge number). It assigns
any transaction to the employee whose employee number matches the
unassigned badge number. This option should only be chosen after a regular
reposting.
6. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Restore Original Reports

This utility enables you to reinstate the factory definitions of all reports. This will overwrite
any customization you may have done to reports. This is useful when reports have been
corrupted.
NOTE: This utility removes data (customized reports). Use it very carefully.

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Restore Original Reports. The Restore
Original Reports dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 417

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 381: Restore Original Reports

2. Select the type of report you wish to view: Reports or Listings. The list will
display the items of the type chosen.
3. Select the report(s) you wish to restore by clicking the Add button to add an
individual item or Add All to choose all.
4. Click OK to restore the report(s).

Repost from R-Files

R-Files are the files that store punch data downloaded from the clocks. There is one R-
File for each day, which contains all the punches from that day. This data is imported into
Genesis SQL, but the original file is kept so that it can be referenced or re-imported if
necessary. Reposting an R-File allows you to re-import the punch data stored in one of
these files.

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Repost from R-Files. The Repost R-Files
dialog box will open.

Figure 382: Repost R-Files

2. Select the file you wish to repost by double-clicking it to "tag" it. Or select all
files by clicking the Tag All button.
3. Click OK to repost the files.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 418

Genesis SQL Manual

Purge R-Files
R-Files are the files that store punch data downloaded from the clocks. There is one R-
File for each day, which contains all the punches from that day. This data is imported into
Genesis SQL, but the original file is kept so that it can be referenced or re-imported if
necessary. These files are kept indefinitely, taking up space on your hard drive. You may
wish to purge (delete) these files periodically in order to free up disk space.
This should not be done before a particular R-File has been successfully imported to
Genesis SQL, as doing so will result in a loss of the punches contained in the R-File.

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Purge R-Files. The Purge R-Files dialog box
will open.

Figure 383: Purge R-Files

2. Select the file you wish to purge by double-clicking it to "tag" it. Or select all
files by clicking the Tag All button.
3. Click OK to purge the files.

Post Historical Data

Posting Historical Data allows you to move historical information to another location,
where it can still be accessed for reports, but where it is not slowing down the
performance of the program. You must also Post Historical Data prior to archiving it. (See
Archive, page Error! Bookmark not defined.).
Genesis SQL keeps track of a large amount of information. As the number of employees
goes up, the amount of data that pertains to those employees goes up. After awhile, the
amount of data that needs to be processed will noticeably slow down the computer.
Genesis SQL allows a user to decide when past transactions will no longer be needed for
editing, and ‘saves’ the processed punches to another file. The transactions in this new
file cannot be edited in any way.
Posted transactions will appear in reports, but will not appear in online timecards or
transactions screens. If the transactions do need to be edited, they will need to be
unposted. The difference between posting data and archiving data is posted data will
appear on reports, archived data will not. Data cannot be archived until it has been
posted.

1. Click the File menu, Utilities, Post Historical Data. The Post Historical Data
dialog box will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 419

Genesis SQL Manual

Figure 384: Post Historical Data

2. Enter the date up to which you wish to post data. As posted data can no
longer be edited on screen, make sure that the date entered is far enough in
the past to suit your needs.
3. If you wish to Unpost previously posted data (in order to edit it, for example),
check the Unpost data box.
4. Click OK to complete the action

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 420

Genesis SQL Manual

Additional Utilities
Genesis SQL provides some "nice-to-have" utilities in addition to the System Utilities, including:
• Calculator
• Conversion Table
• System Info
• Macros
These utilities are found under the Help menu.

Figure 385: Help Menu

Calculator
1. Click the Help menu, Calculator. The Calculator will open.

Figure 386: Calculator

2. You may enter numbers and functions by typing or by clicking the

appropriate buttons on the keypad.

About
The About screen displays the serial number information and all extra modules the client
has purchased. This is also where you can activate the Hand Reader.
NOTE: This only applies to Hand Readers that do not match the Time America internal
code and were not purchased directly from Time America.
1. Click the Help menu, About. The About will open.
2. Click on Hand Reader Activation button as shown below.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 421

Genesis SQL Manual

System Configuration
The System Configuration screen displays the technical setup of your computer.
1. Click the Help menu, System Configuration. The System Configuration
window will open.

Figure 387: System Configuration

2. Press the Close button, , to exit the dialog box.

Conversion Table
The Conversion Table displays conversions from 12 Hour to 24 Hours and minutes to
hundredths of an hour.
1. Click the Help menu, Conversion Table. The Conversion Table will open.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 422

Genesis SQL Manual

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 423

Genesis SQL Manual

Macros
Macros allow you to record keyboard steps in Genesis SQL and play them back by
pressing a key. For example, you could record a macro to Poll time clocks.

1. Click the Help menu, Macros. The Record Macro dialog box will open.

Figure 388: Record Macro

2. Press the key or key combination that will run this macro.
3. Enter a name for the macro (no spaces.)
4. Click OK to begin recording.
5. Perform the steps you wish to record. Type the keystrokes you normally
press to perform an operation on the keyboard. Remember, only keyboard
operations can be recorded.
6. Press Shift + F10 to stop recording. The Stop Recording Macro dialog box
will open.

Figure 389: Stop Recording

7. Click one of the following:

Setting Definition
OK Click OK to stop recording the macro.

Continue Click continue to continue recording the macro

after a pause.
Discard Click Discard to cancel recording and discard
the macro.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 424

Genesis SQL Manual

Setting Definition
Insert Literal Click Insert Literal to record the literal
meaning of the next keystroke. For example, if
CTRL+P is used to execute a macro, but you
want to record CTRL+P as a keystroke, click
Insert Literal before typing the keystroke. This
prevents a macro from being recorded.
Insert Pause Click this button to insert a pause into the
macro, then select the Key to Resume or
Seconds option below.
Key to Resume Select this option to pause the macro until
SHIFT+F10 is pressed to continue.
Seconds Click Seconds to pause the macro for a period
of time (in seconds). Enter the number of
seconds in the adjacent field.

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 425

Genesis SQL Manual
INDEX

Additional Employee Features .......................185 employee.................................................... 216

Approval Editor.......................................258, 262 Categories........................................................ 57
ATS ................................................................361 add ............................................................... 61
configure.....................................................362 configure....................................................... 58
Attendance .......................................................63 delete............................................................ 62
Attendance codes edit................................................................ 62
add................................................................64 Category and Attendance Infractions
configure.......................................................63 add ............................................................. 175
delete ............................................................65 delete.......................................................... 177
edit ................................................................64 edit.............................................................. 177
Attendance Infractions Change Employee Number ........................... 412
reporting .............................................172, 183 Change Employee Number Width ................. 412
Attendance Notices ........................................179 Change Password.......................................... 163
add..............................................................177 Clocks ............................................................ 296
customize notice.........................................177 adding.................................................384, 388
delete ..........................................................179 ATS ............................................................ 361
edit ..............................................................179 ATS, configure............................................ 362
Audit Trails .....................................................255 auto polling ................................................. 396
Automatic Processes .....................................396 connections ................................................ 296
AutoProcess...................................................396 customize ................................................... 375
add..............................................................397 Deleting ..............................................385, 390
delete ..........................................................403 editing.................................................385, 389
edit ..............................................................402 function keys .............................................. 375
AutoProcessing ..............................................392 Hand Reader .............................................. 367
Background Hand Reader, configure ............................. 367
change ..........................................................43 polling ......................................................... 392
Badges ...........................................................231 TA500/600 Series ..............................297, 313
add..............................................................231 TA500/600 Series, configure.....297, 313, 328,
delete ..........................................................232 335
edit ..............................................................232 Configuration.................................................... 45
employee ....................................................231 attendance.................................................... 63
Barcodes ........................................................413 Bell Schedules....................................135, 182
Bell Schedules .......................................135, 182 Benefits ..............................................164, 183
add..............................................................136 categories..................................................... 57
configure.....................................................135 Departments.......................................110, 115
edit ..............................................................137 Divisions ....................................................... 54
Benefit Accruals .....................................164, 183 Groups................................................105, 143
add..............................................................169 Holidays...................................................... 101
adjust ..........................................................222 Job Costing ................................................ 182
configure.....................................................164 Main Company ............................................. 46
delete ..........................................................223 Occurrence Ratings ...........................172, 183
details .........................................................220 Policies ......................................................... 66
edit ..............................................................171 Profile Lockouts..................................139, 183
update.........................................................220 Rounding ...................................................... 83
update to current ........................................172 Security ...................................................... 145
Benefit Accumulators shifts ............................................................. 90
configure.....................................................166 Configure Users ............................................. 158
Benefit Entitlement Databases
configure.............................................194, 216 initialize....................................................... 411
delete ..........................................................218 DB Admin........................................................ 18
details .........................................................217 Delete a Occurrence Rating .......................... 175
grant............................................................218 Delete an Attendance Code............................. 65
Benefits ..................................................164, 183 Demonstration (demo) key .............................. 35
accumulators ..............................................166 Departments ..........................................110, 115
configure.....................................................219 add ............................................................. 113

© August 2007 Time America, Inc.

Genesis SQL Manual
INDEX, Cont.

configure.....................................................110 Ethernet ......................................................... 296

delete ..........................................................114 Exceptions
edit ..............................................................114 configure ..................................................... 80
Differential Exiting Genesis Pro ......................................... 38
configure .....................................................79 Exporting........................................................ 409
Divisions ...........................................................54 From Schedule............................................... 254
add................................................................55 Function Keys
configure.......................................................54 classes ....................................................... 377
delete ...........................................................55 customize ...........................................375, 380
edit ................................................................55 functions ..................................................... 376
Edit/Add Start .................................................250 predefined .................................................. 376
Edit/Add Stop .................................................251 Getting Started................................................. 37
Editing time records .......................................243 Global............................................................. 264
Email ..............................................................289 message assignment ................................. 265
Employee Details profiles................................................266, 274
configure.....................................................237 schedule assignment ................................. 267
Employee info ................................................237 schedules ...................................269, 270, 272
Employee Level Wage transactions ................................................ 273
add..............................................................229 Global Wages
edit ..............................................................230 delete.......................................................... 228
Employee Maintenace edit.............................................................. 228
Benefits.......................................................216 Groups ...................................................105, 143
Timecard.....................................................200 add .....................................................106, 144
Employee Maintenance..................................198 configure.............................................105, 143
Badges........................................................231 delete..................................................107, 144
configure employee ............................198, 199 edit......................................................107, 144
Details.........................................................237 Hand Reader.................................................. 367
Messages ...................................................223 configure..................................................... 367
Profiles................................................232, 235 Hardware keys
Schedule.....................................................204 demonstration (demo) .................................. 35
Status..........................................................213 System key................................................... 35
Transactions .......................................192, 212 Hardware requirements ................................... 11
Wages.........................................................226 Help.................................................................. 41
Employee Reviewer .......................................185 Contents ....................................................... 41
Employee settings..........................................237 Find .............................................................. 42
Employee Status Index............................................................. 41
configure.....................................................213 online............................................................ 41
Employee Timesheets....................................195 Print .............................................................. 42
Employees..............................................198, 199 Historical data ................................................ 419
add..............................................................240 Holidays ........................................................ 101
badges ........................................................231 add .....................................................102, 104
benefits .......................................................216 configure.............................................101, 103
delete ..........................................................242 configure pay options................................ 69
details .........................................................237 delete..........................................103, 105, 215
edit ..............................................................241 edit......................................................102, 104
messages ...................................................223 Importing ........................................................ 405
profiles ................................................232, 235 Advanced ................................................... 405
schedule .....................................................204 Benefits ...................................................... 407
selecting .............................................264, 265 In/Out on Service ........................................... 76
Status..........................................................213 Initialize .......................................................... 411
transactions ........................................192, 212 Installation........................................................ 11
wages .........................................................226 hardware keys .............................................. 34
Environment instructions ................................................... 12
bell tones ......................................................43 system requirements.................................... 11
change background ......................................43 Job Costing ............................................109, 182
large button toolbar.......................................44 add jobs...................................................... 119

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 427

Genesis SQL Manual
INDEX, Cont.

add Operations ...................................128, 133 configure ..................................................... 72

add Steps ...................................................123 Passwords
configure jobs .............................................116 change........................................................ 163
configure Operations ..........................125, 130 Pay Period
delete jobs ..................................................119 configure ..................................................... 67
edit jobs ......................................................119 PC Clock
edit Operations ...................................129, 134 who can use ............................................... 335
edit Steps....................................................124 Per diem
Jobs configure ..................................................... 77
add..............................................................119 Policies............................................................. 66
configure.....................................................116 add ............................................................... 81
delete ..........................................................119 configure....................................................... 66
edit ..............................................................119 delete............................................................ 82
Keyboard ..........................................................39 differential ................................................... 79
Keyboard usage edit................................................................ 82
programmed keys.........................................40 exceptions................................................... 80
shortcut keys ................................................40 holidays....................................................... 69
underlined letters ..........................................39 In/Out on service ........................................ 76
Keys overtime ...................................................... 72
hardware.......................................................34 pay periods ................................................. 67
programmed .................................................40 per diem ...................................................... 77
shortcut.........................................................40 punch defaults............................................ 68
Last Punch .....................................................261 Polling ............................................................ 392
Logging In.........................................................37 Print
Main Company .................................................46 configure printer ......................................... 276
Manual Printing........................................................... 276
about.............................................................10 Profile Lockouts .....................................139, 183
Messages .......................................................223 add ............................................................. 141
add..............................................................224 assign .................................................232, 235
configure.....................................................223 configure..................................................... 139
delete ..........................................................225 delete.......................................................... 142
edit ..............................................................225 edit.............................................................. 142
global ..........................................................265 global..................................................266, 274
Modem ...........................................................296 Profiles ...................................139, 183, 232, 235
Multiple Misc. .................................................251 add ............................................................. 233
Multiple Miscellaneous ...................................251 configure.....................................232, 235, 236
Occurrence Ratings ...............................172, 183 delete.......................................................... 235
add..............................................................174 edit.............................................................. 234
category and attendance infractions ..........175 global..................................................266, 274
configure.....................................................172 Programmed keys............................................ 40
edit ..............................................................175 Punch defaults
Online Timecard.............................................243 configure ..................................................... 68
accessing....................................................243 Report Editor.................................................. 290
navigating ...................................................244 Reports ..................................................276, 277
Operations......................................................125 copy............................................................ 292
add......................................................128, 133 delete.......................................................... 295
configure.............................................125, 130 edit.............................................................. 294
delete ..................................................129, 134 editor .......................................................... 290
edit ......................................................129, 134 emailing ...................................................... 289
Optional Modules ...........................................182 individual .................................................... 282
Bell Schedules....................................135, 182 maintenance............................................... 291
Benefits...............................................164, 183 range .......................................................... 277
Job Costing.................................................182 relocate....................................................... 291
Occurrence Ratings............................172, 183 restore ........................................................ 417
Profile Lockouts ..................................139, 183 running ....................................................... 277
Overtime scheduling .................................................. 396

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 428

Genesis SQL Manual
INDEX, Cont.

Reprocess ......................................................416 add ............................................................. 123

Reprocess Date .............................................416 configure..................................................... 120
Requirements, hardware..................................11 delete.......................................................... 124
R-Files edit.............................................................. 124
purge...........................................................419 Support
repost..........................................................418 Technical ...................................................... 10
Rounding ..........................................................83 System
configure.......................................................83 requirements ................................................ 11
Rounding Rules System Environment
add................................................................88 customizing .................................................. 43
delete ............................................................88 System Utilities .............................................. 411
edit ................................................................88 TA500 Series .........................................297, 313
Running a Report configure.............................297, 313, 328, 335
by individual................................................282 TA520/530 .............................................297, 313
by range......................................................277 TA600 Series .........................................297, 313
Schedules.......................................................204 configure.............................297, 313, 328, 335
assign .........................................................206 TA620 ....................................................297, 313
copy ............................................................210 Tasks ............................................................. 130
delete ..........................................................207 Technical support............................................. 10
employee ....................................................204 Terminals ....................................................... 296
global ................................. 267, 269, 270, 272 connections ................................................ 296
rotating........................................................208 Third Party Terminals .................................... 184
template ......................................................209 Timecard ........................................................243
Security ..........................................................145 accessing ................................................... 243
add a user...................................................162 description .................................................. 200
change password .......................................163 navigating ................................................... 244
configure levels...........................................145 online.......................................................... 243
configure users ...........................................158 Timecards ...................................................... 243
User Maintenance ......................................158 Tips and Techniques ....................................... 39
who's logged in ...........................................163 Toolbar
Security Levels displaying large buttons ............................... 44
add..............................................................157 Transactions ..................................243, 245, 255
configure.....................................................145 add .............................246, 247, 250, 251, 254
delete ..........................................................158 adding......................................................... 245
edit ..............................................................157 deleting....................................................... 255
Serial ..............................................................296 description ..........................................192, 212
Set Date and Time .........................................390 edit......................................................250, 251
Shift Group editing.........................................245, 258, 262
add................................................................98 global.......................................................... 273
configure.......................................................90 navigating ................................................... 245
delete ............................................................99 Unassigned Badges....................................... 416
edit ................................................................98 Underlined letters............................................. 39
Shifts ................................................................90 User Accounts
add................................................................99 SYSOP ......................................................... 37
delete ..........................................................100 User Maintenance.......................................... 158
edit ................................................................99 Users................................................................ 37
shift group.....................................................90 add ............................................................. 162
Shortcut keys ...................................................40 delete.......................................................... 163
Starting Genesis Pro ........................................37 edit.............................................................. 162
Status .............................................................213 Utilities ........................................................... 405
add..............................................................214 additional .................................................... 421
edit ..............................................................215 system ........................................................ 411
employee ....................................................213 Wages............................................................ 226
Step Costing add ............................................................. 228
configure Steps...........................................120 configure..................................................... 226
Steps ..............................................................120 WebClock....................................................... 184

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 429

Genesis SQL Manual
INDEX, Cont.

Who's Logged In ............................................163

© March 2009 Time America, Inc. 430